JP2022053709A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To appropriately control the lending of a game medium.SOLUTION: A game machine includes game medium number control means and total game medium number storage means. When the total game medium number reaches a threshold (15000), the game medium number control means can execute processes for prohibiting or limiting the lending of a game medium (steps S868, S874). When the total game medium number does not reach the threshold due to the bet of the game medium in the situation where the total game medium number reaches the threshold ("No" in the step S868"), the game medium number control means can execute processes (steps S869, S870, S872) for permitting the lending of the game medium.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 69

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines ("medalless gaming machines", "managed gaming machines", "enclosed" that use electronic information (electronic medals) without using physical (as a tangible object) medal as the gaming value (game medium). It is known as a "type game machine" or the like (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-062558

An object to be solved by the present invention is to enable appropriate information processing to be executed in a gaming machine that uses electronic information as a gaming value.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (in parentheses, the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown). The invention according to the initial claim of the present application corresponds to the initial invention 1 among the initial inventions 1 to 11 described later.
The present invention
With the game medium number control means (for example, the second main control CPU 105 in FIG. 29),
It is provided with a total number of game media storage means (for example, in FIG. 29, a game medium number storage means 103a) capable of storing the total number of game media.
When the total number of game media reaches the threshold value (15000), the game medium number control means can execute a process for prohibiting or limiting the lending of the game media (step in FIG. 69). S868, S874),
The game medium number control means is in a situation where the total number of game media has not reached the threshold value due to betting of the game medium while the total number of game media has reached the threshold value (in FIG. 69, The “No” in step S868 is characterized in that the process for permitting the lending of the game medium (steps S869, S870, S872) can be executed.

According to the present invention, appropriate information processing can be executed.

In the first embodiment, it is a block diagram which shows the outline of the control of the slot machine which is an example of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of the electric power supply path in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of the electric power supply path in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the command (main control command) transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the command (the payout control command) transmitted from the payout control board to the main control board in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the command (management apparatus command) transmitted from the management apparatus to the payout control board in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the command (game machine command) transmitted from the payout control board to a management apparatus in 1st Embodiment. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the process flow of the main routine in a payout control board. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control command analysis processing in step S110 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control command analysis processing in step S110 of FIG. 8, and is the flowchart which follows FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the lending process in step S119 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the counting process in step S117 of FIG. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the processing flow of the main routine in the main control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the power-on processing in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the setting change processing in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the three bet processing in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1-sheet bet processing in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game start processing in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game end processing in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the payout process in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the return process in a main control board and a payout control board. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the power-on process in a payout control board and a management apparatus. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the lending process in a payout control board and a management apparatus. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the counting process in a payout control board and a management apparatus. In the first embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the counting process in a payout control board and a management apparatus, and is the flowchart which follows FIG. 24. In the first embodiment, it is a figure which shows the waveform of the data signal and the strobe signal of serial communication between a payout control board and a management apparatus. In the first embodiment, it is a timing chart which shows on / off of each signal at the time of lending an electronic medal. In the first embodiment, it is a timing chart which shows on / off of each signal at the time of electronic medal counting (refund). In the second embodiment, it is a block diagram which shows the outline of the control of a gaming machine. In the second embodiment, it is a figure explaining the telegram between a gaming machine and a rental unit. In the second embodiment, it is a figure explaining the gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, and the hall control / fraud monitoring information. In the second embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the basic communication sequence. In the second embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the example 1 of the activation sequence (when the gaming machine is activated first). In the second embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the example 2 of the activation sequence (when the lending unit is activated first). In the second embodiment, it is a time chart showing a basic sequence of gaming machine information notification. In the second embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the count notification sequence. In the second embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the counting process. In the second embodiment, it is a time chart showing a lending notification sequence. In the second embodiment, it is a figure which shows the gaming machine information notification timer and the gaming machine information notification request flag. In the second embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the update sequence of the gaming machine information notification timer. In the second embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the game machine information management. It is a figure which shows the built-in memory of the main CPU 55 in 3rd Embodiment, (A) shows the outline of the built-in memory, (B) shows the built-in register area. It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of an F register. It is a figure which shows the stack area in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the main instruction in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the mode of the LDF instruction and the LD instruction. It is a figure which shows the mode of the CALLEX instruction. It is a figure which shows an example of the conventional CALL instruction and RET instruction. It is a flowchart which shows the program start (M_PRG_SET) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which used the CALLEX instruction and the jump instruction. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the control of the gaming machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the built-in memory in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the division of the area in 4th Embodiment, (A) shows Example 1, and (B) shows Example 2. It is a figure explaining the communication between regions in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the program example (example 1) of the control area 1 to 3. It is a figure which shows the program example (example 2) of the control area 1 to 3. It is a figure which shows the program example (example 3) of the control area 1 to 3. It is a figure which shows the modification of the program of the control area 1 to 3. In the fifth embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the game medium number addition processing of a main control means. In the fifth embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the game medium number addition process of the game medium number control means. In the fifth embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process (I_INTR) of the game medium number control means. It is a flowchart which shows the input port reading process (I_IN_READ) in step S801 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the gaming machine information management (I_INF_CTL) in step S802 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the hall control fraud monitoring information set (I_INF_INJ) in step S823 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the gaming machine performance information set (I_INF_ABI) in step S824 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the gaming machine installation information set (I_INF_INS) in step S825 of FIG. In the fifth embodiment, it is a figure which shows the update sequence of the gaming machine information notification timer. It is a flowchart which shows the counting control (I_CAL_CTL) in step S803 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 1 of the lending control (I_LEN_CTL) in step S805 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 2 of the lending control (I_LEN_CTL) in step S805 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 3 of the lending control (I_LEN_CTL) in step S805 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 4 of the lending control (I_LEN_CTL) in step S805 of FIG. In the fifth embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the example 1 of the threshold value processing of the main control means. In the fifth embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the example 2 of the threshold value processing of a main control means. In the fifth embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the example 1 of the threshold value notification processing of a sub-control means. In the fifth embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the example 2 of the threshold value notification processing of a sub-control means.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
The "game value (game medium)" refers to a medium used for a game, and is "electronic information (electronic medal)" in the present embodiment.
Further, "electronic information (electronic medal)" means that when money (banknotes) is inserted into the management device (CR unit) 200, it is converted into electronic information according to the amount of money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played. It is possible to credit the gaming machine as a gaming value for playing the game on the machine.

Furthermore, the "management device (CR unit) 200" is a device for managing the lending and refund of electronic information as a game value, which is provided for each game machine and is adjacent to the game machine. Is arranged. In the hall, the management device 200 is called a sand because it is arranged between the gaming machines. Further, a "gaming system" is configured from the gaming machine and the management device 200 corresponding to the gaming machine.
Further, "rental" means transferring electronic information as a game value from the management device 200 to the game machine and crediting the inside of the game machine.

Further, "counting" means returning the electronic information as the game value credited inside the game machine to the management device 200. When the counting switch 47 is operated, the electronic information as the game value credited inside the game machine is returned to the management device 200. At this time, the number of credits becomes "0", and the electronic information managed by the management device 200 is added accordingly.
Furthermore, "credit" means storing electronic information as a game value inside the game machine.
Further, "bet" means betting electronic information as a game value in order to play a game. When the bet switch 40 is operated, electronic information as a credited game value is bet.

The "specified number" means the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game.
Further, "payout" means to add electronic information as a number of game values according to the dividend of the winning combination to the number of credits based on the winning of the winning combination.
Furthermore, the "bet medal" refers to electronic information as a game value bet for playing a game.
Further, the "reservoir medal" refers to electronic information as a game value that is credited (reserved).

Further, the "reservoir bet" means that by operating the bet switch 40, a part or all of the electronic information as the game value credited inside the game machine is used within the range where the bet is possible in the game. Bet to play a game.
Furthermore, "automatic betting" means that when a replay wins a prize, electronic information as a game value of the number bet in the previous game is automatically bet by the control process of the slot machine 10 as a game machine. To say.

Further, "cancel" means to return the electronic information (bet medal) as the bet game value to the credit by operating the cancel switch 46. When the cancel switch 46 is operated, the electronic information as the bet game value is returned to the credit. At this time, the number of bet medals becomes "0", and the amount is added to the number of credits.
Further, "return" means to store electronic information as a game value stored in the management device 200 in a card (magnetic card, IC card, etc.) and eject the card from the card reader / writer 205. say. When the return switch 203 is operated, the electronic information is stored in the card and discharged from the card reader / writer 205.

Further, when the game progresses with "N-1" game, "N" game, "N + 1" game, ... ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N". When it is a game, the game of the "N" game is referred to as "this time game". Further, the game of the "N-1" game is referred to as "previous game". Furthermore, the game of the "N + 1" game is referred to as "next game".

In the present specification, a numerical value having "(B)" added to the end of the numerical value (particularly, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with "(H)" at the end of the number means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal is expressed as "00010000 (B)" in binary and "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. Further, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is expressed as "16 (D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether it is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the ending symbols of "(B)", "(D)", and "(H)" may be omitted, respectively. ..

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
<First Embodiment>
The slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine in the first embodiment, uses electronic information (electronic medals) as a gaming value (game medium) without using physical medals (as tangible objects). be. Therefore, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment does not include a medal slot, a medal selector, a medal payout device, or the like.

Further, in the first embodiment, the management device (CR unit) 200 is arranged adjacent to the slot machine 10, and further, the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 are connected so as to be communicable in both directions. There is. Then, the electronic medals can be transferred between the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 by communication, and in the slot machine 10, the game can be executed using the electronic medals transferred from the management device 200. ing.

FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10 which is an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 1 shows a management device (CR unit) 200 and a hall computer 300 together with a slot machine 10.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 includes a main control board 50, a sub control board 80, and a payout control board 100 (credit number management board) as typical control boards.

In FIG. 1, the solid line portion is a communication line indicating data exchange, and the direction of the arrow indicates the direction in which data flows. For example, the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are formed so as to be communicable in both directions. On the other hand, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 communicate in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (it does not mean that only those shown in FIG. 1 are provided). ).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and the peripheral device for game progress including the operation switch such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via the input port 51 or the output port 52. There is.
The input port 51 is a connection unit to which a signal such as an operation switch is input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as a motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow indicating that the signal from the peripheral device is directed to the main control board 50, and the output peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub control board 80).

Further, the RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like.
Furthermore, the ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, a data table) necessary for the progress of the game.
Further, the main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (IC having a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculation, and the like, and specifically, draws a combination. Drive control of the reel 31 and payout at the time of winning are executed.

Further, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. The RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.
The MPU including the RWM83, ROM84, and subCPU85 is also mounted on the sub-control board 80 described later. The RWM 83 and ROM 84 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 has a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a cancel switch 46 as operation switches operated by the player. , And a counting switch 47.
The bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and the cancel switch 46 are electrically connected to the main control board 50, and the counting switch 47 is the main control board. Instead of 50, it is electrically connected to the payout control board 100 (credit number management board) described later.

Here, the "operation switch (or simply," switch ")" switches on / off the electric signal based on the operation of the operating body by the player (operator) (receives an external force). It refers to a device (including an electric circuit and / or an electric component), and does not limit the shape of an operating body operated by a player.
When the operation switch is in the off state, for example, the light from the light emitting element continues to be incident on the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect the light, the operation switch is in the off state). Then, when the operation switch (operation body) is operated by a player or the like, the light from the light emitting element is not incident on the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electric signal indicating that the operation switch is turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the light is turned on. You may.

In the present embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 has a lever (bar) shape (hence, also referred to as a “start lever (switch) 41”), a bet switch 40, a stop switch 42, and a cancel switch 46. , The operation body of the counting switch 47 is in the shape of a push button (for this reason, "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", "cancel button (switch) 46", "counting". Button (switch) 47 ").

Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided in or near or in the vicinity of the operating body of the operation switch. Then, when the operation acceptance of the operation switch is in the permitted state, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, and when the operation acceptance of the operation switch is in the unauthorized state, for example, the operation switch of the operation switch. By emitting red light from the LED or the like, the player is shown the permission / non-permission state of the operation switch.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting an electronic medal credited inside the slot machine 10 for the game this time.
In the present embodiment, as the bet switch 40, a 1-bet switch 40a for betting one electronic medal in one operation and three (maximum number, specified number) electronic medals are bet in one operation. It is equipped with a 3-bet switch 40b for using the switch.
It should be noted that only one bet switch 40 is provided, and by operating this bet switch 40 once, three (maximum number, specified number) electronic medals among the credited electronic medals are bet. May be good.

Further, the start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right) (starting the rotation of the reels 31).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped. ..

Further, the cancel switch 46 is an operation switch operated by the player when returning the bet electronic medal (bet medal) to the credit.
When the cancel switch 46 is operated, the bet electronic medal is returned to the credit. At this time, the number of bets becomes "0", and the amount is added to the number of credits. For example, if the cancel switch 46 is operated in a situation where three electronic medals are bet, the number of bets changes from "3" to "0", and "3" is added to the number of credits.

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on / off.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is operated when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.
When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on.
Further, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on in the state where the power switch 11 is turned off (the state where the power is turned off) and the power switch 11 is turned on in this state, the setting is being changed, that is, the setting change mode is set.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on while the power switch 11 is on, the setting is being confirmed, that is, the setting confirmation mode is set.

The setting switch 13 is a switch that is operated when the set value is changed.
Every time the setting switch 13 is operated once while the setting is being changed, the set value is added by "1".
In the present embodiment, the set value has from setting 1 to setting 6, and during the setting change, the set value is changed from “1” → “2” → ... → every time the setting switch 13 is operated once. It switches from "6" to "1" to ....
While the setting is being changed, one of the set values is displayed on a predetermined display device, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed set value is confirmed.

The reset switch 14 is a switch that is operated when the RWM 53 is initialized or when an error is cleared.
When the power switch 11 is turned on with the reset switch 14 turned on, the initialization process is performed and the predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
Further, when the cause of the error is removed and the reset switch 14 is operated (on), the error is cleared.

Further, the main control board 50 outputs an external signal (outer end signal) to the external centralized terminal board 190 from a part of the output port 52.
Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (a hall computer 300, a data counter installed in a hall, etc.) via an external centralized terminal board 190.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the hall computer 300 via an external centralized terminal board 190. Then, a signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the external centralized terminal board 190 in one direction, and a signal is transmitted from the external centralized terminal board 190 to the hall computer 300 in one direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 includes an acquired number display LED 78 and a credit number display LED 76 as a number display device.
The acquired number display LED 78 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, and the credit number display LED 76 is electrically connected to the payout control board 100 (credit number management board) described later, instead of the main control board 50. It is connected.
The acquired number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of electronic medals paid out (the number acquired by the player) at the time of winning a winning combination, and is composed of two digits, a high-order digit and a low-order digit.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no electronic medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit may be turned off and only the lower digit may be displayed as "0".

Further, the acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the number of electronic medals paid out (acquired number), but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (notifies an advantageous push order) in a game that notifies the push order during AT.
Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also displays the number of payouts (acquired number), the error content, and the push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying push order instruction information may be provided.
During AT, the advantageous push order notification is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub control board 80.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a motor 32 (stepping motor in this embodiment) of the symbol display device and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes a reel 31 for displaying a symbol (three in this embodiment), a motor 32 for driving each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65.
Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and the stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a symbol combination corresponding to the combination) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor 33.

The reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Then, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.
Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. This makes it possible to detect the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected. Further, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, the number of pulses of the (stepping) motor 32 must be driven to stop the symbol ahead of the symbol on the effective line, counting from the symbol on the reference position. It becomes possible to identify whether or not it can be done.

When the player starts the game, the player bets the credited electronic medal by operating the bet switch 40. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated with the specified number of electronic medals of the game bet, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 performs a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means), and drives and controls all the motors 32 to control all the reels 31 to rotate. By rotating the reel 31 by the motor 32 in this way, the symbol on the reel 31 is moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, by operating the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42).
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 so as to correspond to the lottery result (result determined by the internal lottery means) of the winning combination lottery means 61. The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed. Then, the game result of this game is displayed by the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops at the valid line (when the winning combination is won), the electronic medal corresponding to the winning winning combination is paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following winning combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are examples, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.
The winning combination lottery means 61 draws (determines, selects) the winning number. Here, the "lottery of winning numbers by the winning combination lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the rules of the Fudosan Law (rules concerning certification of gaming machines and verification of types, hereinafter simply referred to as "rules"). The lottery result by the combination lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as an "internal lottery means 61" in an expression according to the rules.

When the winning number is determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the winning combination condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device that can be operated in the game is determined. In addition, the accessory condition device will be determined. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.
The combination lottery means 61 is based on, for example, a random number generation means (hardware random number or the like) for lottery, a random number extraction means for extracting random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extraction means. It is equipped with a winning number determining means for determining a winning number.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined area (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number that the counter that counts 1 in 200 n (nano) sec keeps counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle, and is a random number while the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. Keep counting.
The random number extraction means extracts the random numbers generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (on) by the player.
The winning number determining means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs by collating the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means with the lottery table.

The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61.
In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all combinations. Then, when any of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of that winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). The winning combination may be a case where there is one winning combination (single winning) or a case where there are a plurality of winning combinations (duplicate winning).

The reel control means 65 starts the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when the rotation start command of the reels 31 is received, particularly when the operation (ON) of the start switch 41 is detected in the present embodiment. To control.
Further, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off of the winning flag in the game this time after the winning number is determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. Is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation (ON) of the stop switch 42 is detected. The motor 32 is driven and controlled to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, the reel control means 65 enables a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (a combination in which the winning flag is turned on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 in a game in which at least one winning flag is on. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that it can be stopped on the line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as not to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (the winning combination with the winning flag turned off) on the effective line.
Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the rotation amount (number of moving symbols (frames)) of the reel 31. Means within range.

In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations in one minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for the predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) in which the MB is operating. Is set to. As a result, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the stop of the reel 31 is set to 4 symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB operation.
On the other hand, for the predetermined reel 31 in which the MB is operating, the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. As a result, for the predetermined reel 31 in which the MB is operating, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to one symbol.

Then, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. The symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop at the predetermined valid line, the reel 31 is stopped before the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, it is controlled so that the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is stopped at a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

On the contrary, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number stops at the effective line, when the reel 31 is stopped, the reel 31 By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, it is controlled so that the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number is not stopped on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Further, in a game in which a plurality of roles are won (for example, when the push order bell is won), the priority of the winning combination is predetermined according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the pull-in stop control of the symbol related to the highest priority combination is performed according to a predetermined priority.

The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination of the reel 31 stopped on the effective line is a symbol combination corresponding to any combination when the reel 31 is stopped.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped at the effective line. Specifically, from the condition device operated in the game and the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination that stops the reel 31 on the effective line before actually stopping is preliminarily set. Judgment is made, or the symbol combination stopped at the effective line after the reel 31 is stopped is judged in advance.

When the winning determination means 66 determines that the symbol combination stopped on the effective line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations, the payout means 67 determines that the winning combination is a prize. The process of adding the number of electronic medals according to the winning combination to the number of credits is performed.
Further, the payout means 67 controls to automatically insert (automatic bet) the number of electronic medals inserted in the game this time without adding the electronic medals to the number of credits at the time of winning the replay.

The main control board 50 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effect output by the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
As control commands, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, information about the winning combination lottery result (result determined by internal lottery), and the stop switch 42 are operated. Information on the time, information on the winning role, etc. can be mentioned.

The sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, and the like of the effect (information) during the game and the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected to each other, and the main control board 50 is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80 by serial communication, and information (control) necessary for output of the effect is obtained. Command) is sent.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected by using an optical communication means. Further, in both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection, not only the serial communication but also the parallel communication may be used, and the serial communication and the parallel communication may be used in combination.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The following peripheral devices for effect such as the effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for production are not limited to these.

The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing various data and the like when performing a lottery related to the production as the production data.
Further, the sub CPU 85 refers to a CPU (IC having a calculation function) provided on the sub control board 80, and executes and calculates a program necessary for outputting an effect during a game and a game standby.

Further, the effect lamp 21 is composed of, for example, an LED or the like, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect lamp 21 is lit or blinks in a predetermined pattern, respectively.
The effect lamp 21 is a back lamp, which is arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and is used to illuminate the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols that can be seen from the display window) from behind. Includes a fluorescent lamp that illuminates the pattern on the reel 31 from the top, a frame lamp that is arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when a winning combination is won.
Furthermore, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.

Further, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and various effect images (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the condition device operated in the game, etc.) and the like during the game. , Game information (number of games played, number of acquired cards, etc. at the time of operation of a character or in an advantageous section (AT)) and the like are displayed.
Further, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect output control means 91. Then, the effect output control means 91 determines what kind of effect is to be output at what timing based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, and based on this determination, the effect output control means 91 is used for the effect. Control to output various effects from peripheral devices.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 includes a payout control board 100 (credit number management board).
Further, the payout control board 100 manages the number of credits for electronic medals.
Here, the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are electrically connected to each other so that bidirectional communication is possible.
The main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected by using an optical communication means.
Further, in both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection, serial communication may be performed, parallel communication may be performed, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

The payout control board 100 includes an input port 101, an output port 102, an RWM 103, a ROM 104, a credit number management CPU 105, and the like, similarly to the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.
Further, the payout control board 100 is external to the main control board 50, the counting switch 47 as an operation switch, the credit number display LED 76 as a number display device, and the slot machine 10 via the input port 101 or the output port 102. A management device (CR unit) 200 or the like is electrically connected.

The RWM 103 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data or the like captured when the credit number management CPU 105 manages the number of credits.
Further, the ROM 104 is a storage medium for storing a program for managing the number of credits, various data, and the like.
Further, the credit number management CPU 105 refers to a CPU (IC having a calculation function) provided on the payout control board 100, and executes a program necessary for managing the credit number, performs calculation, and the like.

Further, the counting switch 47 is an operation switch operated by the player when returning the electronic medal credited inside the slot machine 10 to the management device 200.
When the counting switch 47 is operated, the electronic medal credited inside the slot machine 10 is returned to the management device 200. At this time, the number of credits becomes "0", and the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200 is added accordingly.
For example, if 100 electronic medals are credited inside the slot machine 10, the number of credits changes from "100" to "0" when the counting switch 47 is operated, and the electronic medals managed by the management device 200. "100" is added to the number of sheets.

Further, for example, when the cancel switch 46 is operated in a situation where three electronic medals are bet and 100 electronic medals are credited, the bet electronic medals are returned to the credit. At this time, the number of bets changes from "3" to "0", and the number of credits changes from "100" to "103". After that, when the counting switch 47 is operated, the number of credits changes from "103" to "0", and "103" is added to the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200.
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player stops the game, if there is an electronic medal bet, first, the cancel switch 46 is operated to return the bet electronic medal to the credit, and then. Then, the counting switch 47 is operated to return the credited electronic medal to the management device 200.

However, when the replay wins in the previous game and the number of electronic medals bet in the previous game is automatically bet, even if the cancel switch 46 is operated, the automatically bet electronic medals cannot be returned to the credit. Is set to. That is, the automatically bet electronic medal is set so that it cannot be returned to the credit even if the cancel switch 46 is operated.
Both the electronic medal bet based on the operation of the bet switch 40 and the electronic medal automatically bet based on the replay winning prize may be returned to the credit by operating the cancel switch 46.

Further, the bet electronic medal and the credited electronic medal may be returned to the management device 200 by operating the counting switch 47.
For example, when three electronic medals are bet and 100 electronic medals are credited, when the counting switch 47 is operated, the bet electronic medals and the credited electronic medals are transferred to the management device 200. The number of bets and the number of credits may be set to "0", and "103" may be added to the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200.
In this case, the cancel switch 46 may or may not be provided.

Further, the credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of electronic medals credited inside the slot machine 10.
In this embodiment, up to 10,000 electronic medals can be credited. That is, the upper limit of the number of credits is set to "10000". Therefore, the credit number display LED 76 is composed of five digits.
The upper limit of the number of credits is not limited to "10000", and may be, for example, "15000", "30000", or "50,000".
Further, the number of digits of the credit number display LED 76 is not limited to 5 digits, and can be appropriately set according to the upper limit of the number of credits.

Further, it is possible to transmit an enable signal from the payout control board 100 to the main control board 50. The main control board 50 is set so that various processes can be executed when the enable signal is on, and predetermined processes cannot be executed when the enable signal is off.
In the present embodiment, when the credit number reaches the upper limit value, that is, when the display of the credit number display LED 76 reaches "10000", the enable signal is turned off. Then, when the enable signal is turned off, the main control board 50 controls so that the operations of the bet switch 40 and the start switch 41 cannot be accepted.
The enable signal may be turned off when the number of credits reaches "15,000", "30,000", or "50,000".

Further, for example, a normal game and a special game (1BB game; first-class big bonus game; operation of a first-class accessory continuous operation device) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game can be executed from the normal game. When the game shifts to the special game, it may be stopped at the end of the special game so that the game cannot be advanced. That is, it may have a stop function. Further, the conditions for stopping the game are not limited to the end of the special game, and can be appropriately set. Then, the enable signal may be turned off when the condition for stopping is satisfied.

In this case, a stop presence / absence setting switch for setting (switching) whether the stop function is enabled (with stop) or disabled (without stop) can be provided. Further, a stop release switch for releasing the stop can be provided. Then, when the condition for stopping is satisfied, by operating the stop release switch, the stop can be released, the game can proceed, and the enable signal can be turned on. Further, the stop release switch can be used in combination with other switches such as the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14.

Further, the credit number management CPU 105 of the payout control board 100 includes a credit number management means 111. Then, the credit number management means 111 manages (adds or subtracts) the credit number based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the control command transmitted from the management device 200, and the operation of the counting switch 47. At the same time, the display of the number of credits on the credit number display LED 76 is controlled.

Further, the management device (CR unit) 200 is a device for managing the lending and refund of electronic medals. One management device 200 is installed for each slot machine 10. In the hall, the management device 200 is referred to as a sand because it is arranged between the slot machines 10. Further, one gaming system is configured from the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 corresponding to the slot machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 are electrically connected to each other so that bidirectional communication is possible.
The payout control board 100 and the management device 200 are connected via a terminal board for renting a game ball or the like.
Further, the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected by using an optical communication means.
Furthermore, in both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection, serial communication may be performed, parallel communication may be performed, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the payout control board 100 is capable of bidirectional communication with the main control board 50 and is also capable of bidirectional communication with the management device 200. ..
Then, the electronic medals can be transferred (rented) from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 by communication between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100, and the rented electronic medals can be credited to the payout control board 100. It is said that.

Further, by communication between the payout control board 100 and the main control board 50, it is possible to bet an electronic medal credited to the payout control board 100 and execute a game, and when a winning combination is won, the payout electronic medals are made possible. It is said that medals can be credited to the payout control board 100.
Further, when the player quits the game, the electronic medal credited to the payout control board 100 can be transferred (refunded) to the management device 200 by communication between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100. There is.

As shown in FIG. 1, the management device 200 includes a bill slot 201, a lending switch 202, a return switch 203, a frequency display unit 204, a card reader / writer 205, and the like.
The bill slot 201 is a bill slot for inserting bills (for example, 1000-yen bills) necessary for lending electronic medals.
When the bill inserted into the management device 200 is correctly recognized from the bill insertion slot 201, the frequency corresponding to the inserted bill is displayed on the frequency display unit 204. The frequency display unit 204 is composed of, for example, a 3-digit 7-segment display. For example, when a 1000-yen note is inserted, "10" is displayed as the frequency, and when a 10,000-yen note is inserted, "100" is displayed as the frequency.

The lending switch 202 is a switch operated by the player when lending an electronic medal, provided that the remaining frequency is displayed on the frequency display unit 204.
For example, each time the lending switch 202 is pressed, the electronic medal corresponding to the frequency "10" can be lent out.
Here, for example, when a 1000-yen bill is inserted into the management device 200 from the bill insertion slot 201, the frequency displayed on the frequency display unit 204 is "10", and the number of electronic medals lent out per frequency "1". Is 5 sheets. In this case, if the lending switch 202 is operated when the display of the frequency display unit 204 is "10", 50 electronic medals are lent out. Then, by communication between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100, the rented 50 electronic medals are credited to the payout control board 100.

The number of electronic medals credited to the payout control board 100 is displayed on the credit number display LED 76. For example, if 50 electronic medals are lent out when the number of credits is "0", the display of the credit number display LED 76 changes from "0" to "50".
As described above, in the present embodiment, the physical (as a tangible object) medal is not lent to the player, and the rented electronic medal is managed by the communication between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100. The device 200 is transferred to the payout control board 100 and credited.

The return switch 203 is a switch operated by the player when the game is stopped.
When the counting switch 47 of the slot machine 10 is operated, the electronic medal is returned from the slot machine 10 to the management device. Then, when the return switch 203 of the management device 200 is operated, the number of electronic medals returned from the slot machine 10 to the management device 200 and the number of electronic medals corresponding to the frequencies displayed on the frequency display unit 204 are electronic data. Is stored in a card (magnetic card, IC card, etc.), and the card is ejected from the ejection port of the card reader / writer 205.

For example, it is assumed that the frequency "10" (corresponding to 50 electronic medals) is displayed on the frequency display unit 204 of the management device 200. Further, it is assumed that 150 electronic medals are returned from the slot machine 10 to the management device 200 by operating the counting switch 47 of the slot machine 10. At this time, when the return switch 203 of the management device 200 is operated, electronic data corresponding to 200 electronic medals is stored in the card and discharged from the discharge port of the card reader / writer 205.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the management device 200 is electrically connected to the hall computer 300. Then, the management device 200 transmits information regarding lending and refunding of electronic medals to the hall computer 300 in one direction.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example 1 of a power supply path.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 includes a power supply board 150. Further, the power storage board 150 is mounted with the storage capacitor 151, and the payout control board 100 is also mounted with the storage capacitor 106.
Furthermore, the power supply board 150 and the main control board 50 are connected by a harness A161, and it is possible to supply electric power from the power supply board 150 to the main control board 50 through the harness A161.

Further, the power supply board 150 and the payout control board 100 are connected by a harness C163, and it is possible to supply electric power from the power supply board 150 to the payout control board 100 through the harness C163.
Power is supplied to the power supply board 150 from the outside by alternating current. Then, the power supply board 150 converts alternating current into direct current to supply electric power to the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
Further, the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are connected by a harness B162, and through the harness B162, the main control board 50 is connected to the payout control board 100, or the payout control board 100 is connected to the main control board 50. It is said that it can supply electric power.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are connected by a harness D164, and commands can be bidirectionally communicated between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 through the harness D164. Has been done.
The payout control board 100 is a control board that manages the number of credits of electronic medals, and its stability greatly affects the interests of the player. Therefore, power is directly supplied from the power supply board 150 to the payout control board 100 through the harness C163. I have to.

Further, when the harness C163 is cut off, electric power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the payout control board 100 via the harness A161, the main control board 50, and the harness B162.
Furthermore, a capacitor 106 for storing electricity is mounted on the payout control board 100, and when the power supply from the power supply board 150 is interrupted, the power can be supplied from the capacitor 106 to the payout control board 100.

Further, when the harness A161 and the harness C163 are cut off, power can be supplied from the capacitor 106 to the payout control board 100, and power can be supplied from the payout control board 100 to the main control board 50 through the harness B162. There is.
As described above, in Example 1, a capacitor 106 for a backup power supply is mounted on the payout control board 100, and even if the power supply from the power supply board 150 is interrupted due to disconnection of the harness A161 or the harness C163, the payout is performed. The control board 100 and the main control board 50 are driven so that the processing at the time of power failure can be reliably executed so as not to cause a disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example 2 of a power supply path.
As shown in FIG. 3, in Example 2, the power supply board 150 is not mounted with a capacitor, and the payout control board 100 is mounted with a capacitor A107 and a capacitor B108 for storing electricity.
Further, the power supply board 150 and the main control board 50 are connected by a harness E165, and it is possible to supply electric power from the power supply board 150 to the main control board 50 through the harness E165.

Furthermore, the power supply board 150 and the payout control board 100 are connected by a harness G167, and it is possible to supply electric power from the power supply board 150 to the payout control board 100 through the harness G167.
Further, the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are connected by a harness F166, and through the harness F166, the main control board 50 is connected to the payout control board 100, or the payout control board 100 is connected to the main control board 50. It is said that it can supply electric power.

Further, the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are connected by a harness H168, and commands can be bidirectionally communicated between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 through the harness H168. ing.
When the harness G167 is cut off, electric power can be supplied from the power supply board 150 to the payout control board 100 via the harness E165, the main control board 50, and the harness F166.

Further, the payout control board 100 is equipped with a capacitor A107 and a capacitor B108 for storing electricity, and when the power supply from the power supply board 150 is interrupted, the power can be supplied to the payout control board 100 from the capacitor A107 and the capacitor B108. It is said that.
Further, when the harness E165 and the harness G167 are cut off, power can be supplied from the capacitor A107 and the capacitor B108 to the payout control board 100, and power can be supplied from the capacitor A107 to the main control board 50 through the harness F166. There is.

Also in Example 2, when the power supply from the power supply board 150 is interrupted, power is supplied to the payout control board 100 and the main control board 50 from the backup power supply capacitor mounted on the payout control board 100. It is the same as 1.
However, in Example 2, the capacitor B108 is used as a backup power source dedicated to the payout control board 100. As a result, even if the power supply from the power supply board 150 is interrupted due to disconnection of the harness E165 or the harness G167, the payout control board 100 that manages the number of credits of the electronic medal is surely driven, and when the power is cut off. It is made sure that the processing of the above can be executed so as not to disadvantage the player.

In Example 2, it is preferable to set the electric capacity of the capacitor B108 to be larger than the electric capacity of the capacitor A107. As a result, the backup power can be reliably supplied to the payout control board 100, which greatly affects the profit of the player, and the processing at the time of power failure can be reliably executed.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned off, the program on the payout control board 100 is set to stop before the program on the main control board 50.
Further, in the present embodiment, the program on the payout control board 100 is set to start before the program on the main control board 50 when the power is restored from the power failure.

4 to 7 are diagrams showing a list of commands.
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a list of commands transmitted from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a list of commands transmitted from the payout control board 100 to the main control board 50. be.
Further, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a list of commands transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100, and FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a list of commands transmitted from the payout control board 100 to the payout control board 200. be.

Here, the commands transmitted from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 are collectively referred to as "main control commands".
Further, the commands transmitted from the payout control board 100 to the main control board 50 are collectively referred to as "payout control commands".
Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the payout control board 100 to the management device 200 are collectively referred to as "game machine commands".
Further, the commands transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 are collectively referred to as "management device commands".

In the present embodiment, the main control command, the payout control command, the gaming machine command, and the management device command are all composed of 16-bit (2 bytes) data.
Further, the main control command, the payout control command, the game machine command, and the management device command are all composed of a preceding command (upper 8 bits) and a succeeding command (lower 8 bits).
That is, one main control command, a payout control command, a gaming machine command, and a management device command are composed of 16-bit (2-byte) data consisting of a preceding command and a succeeding command.
The preceding command is data indicating the type of the command, and the succeeding command is data indicating parameters (variables).
Then, in the present embodiment, commands are transmitted / received by serial communication between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.

In FIGS. 4 to 7, the data in the "preceding" column indicates the preceding command (upper 8 bits), and the data in the "subsequent" column indicates the succeeding command (lower 8 bits). Further, both the preceding command and the succeeding command are represented by hexadecimal numbers.
As the main control command, eight types of commands described in the "contents" column in FIG. 4 can be mentioned. Further, among these eight types of commands, the setting change start command, the setting change end command, the game start + RT state command, and the game end + game state command are collectively referred to as "game information command". Furthermore, the input request command, the payout request command, and the return request command are collectively referred to as an "operation request command".

As the payout control command, 12 types of commands described in the “contents” column in FIG. 5 can be mentioned. Further, the ACK response of the input request command is also referred to as a "input repeat command", and the NAK response of the input request command is also referred to as a "input non-subject command". Similarly, the ACK response of the payout request command, the NAK response, the ACK response of the return request command, and the NAK response are "payout repeat command", "non-payout command", "return repeat command", and "non-returnable command", respectively. Also called. Furthermore, the NAK response at the time of abnormality is also referred to as an "error command".

As the management device command, five types of commands described in the "contents" column in FIG. 6 can be mentioned. Further, the ACK response of the lower count request command is also referred to as a "lower count repeat command", and the ACK response of the upper count request command is also referred to as a "upper count repeat command".
As the game machine commands, 13 types of commands described in the “contents” column in FIG. 7 can be mentioned. The ACK response of the lending request command is also referred to as a “lending repeat command”.

In FIG. 4, the start confirmation command is a command for confirming whether or not the communication between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 is normal on the main control board 50 side, and is the main command when the power is turned on. This is a command transmitted from the control board 50 to the payout control board 100.
The main control board 50 transmits a start confirmation command to the payout control board 100 when the power is turned on. Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the start confirmation command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the start confirmation command shown in FIG. 5).
Then, on the main control board 50 side, the transmitted start confirmation command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is, so that it can be determined that the communication between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 is normal. ..

Further, as described above, when the power is turned off, the program on the payout control board 100 is stopped before the program on the main control board 50, and when returning from the power off, the program is paid out before the program on the main control board 50. The program on the control board 100 starts.
Here, when the power is turned on, that is, when the power is restored from the power failure, the main control board 50 sends a start confirmation command to the payout control board 100, but the program on the payout control board 100 starts first. , You can reliably receive the startup confirmation command. Then, when the main control board 50 determines that the communication between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 is normal because the transmitted start confirmation command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is, the subsequent processing is performed. Is set to proceed.

In FIG. 4, the setting change start command is a command for transmitting to the payout control board 100 side that the setting change mode has been entered, and the setting change mode is changed from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100. It is a command sent to. Further, the subsequent "01H" indicates that the setting key switch 12 is in the ON state.
The main control board 50 transmits a setting change start command to the payout control board 100 at the time of transition to the setting change mode. Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the setting change start command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the setting change start command shown in FIG. 5), and further, the setting change is also made to the management device 200. Send a start command (Fig. 7). That is, the payout control board 100 transmits a setting change start command to both the main control board 50 and the management device 200.

As a result, it can be determined that the payout control board 100 has shifted to the setting change mode. Further, on the main control board 50 side, it can be determined that the transmission to the setting change mode can be transmitted to the payout control board 100 by sending back the transmitted setting change start command as it is from the payout control board 100. Further, it can be determined on the management device 200 side that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode.

In FIG. 4, the setting change end command is a command for transmitting the end of the setting change mode to the payout control board 100 side, and is a command from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 at the end of the setting change mode. Is a command sent. Further, the subsequent "00H" indicates that the setting key switch 12 is in the off state.
At the end of the setting change mode, the main control board 50 transmits a setting change end command to the payout control board 100. Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the setting change end command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the setting change end command shown in FIG. 5), and further, the setting change is also made to the management device 200. Send the end command (Fig. 7). That is, the payout control board 100 transmits a setting change end command to both the main control board 50 and the management device 200.

As a result, on the payout control board 100 side, it can be determined that the setting change mode has ended. Further, on the main control board 50 side, it can be determined that the end of the setting change mode can be transmitted to the payout control board 100 by sending back the transmitted setting change end command as it is from the payout control board 100. Further, the management device 200 can also determine that the setting change mode has ended.

In FIG. 4, the game start + RT state command is a command for transmitting the start of the game and the RT state to the payout control board 100 side, and the payout control board 100 is sent from the main control board 50 when the start switch 41 is turned on. The command sent to.
When the start switch 41 is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a game start + RT state command to the payout control board 100. Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the game start + RT state command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as it is (the game start + RT state command ACK response shown in FIG. 5), and also to the management device 200. The game start + RT status command is transmitted (Fig. 7). That is, the payout control board 100 transmits a game start + RT state command to both the main control board 50 and the management device 200.

Thereby, on the payout control board 100 side, it is possible to determine that the game has started and the RT state. Further, on the main control board 50 side, it can be determined that the game start and the RT state can be transmitted to the payout control board 100 by sending back the transmitted game start + RT state command as it is from the payout control board 100. Further, the management device 200 can also determine that the game has started and the RT state.

In FIG. 4, the game end + game state command is a command for transmitting the game end and the game state to the payout control board 100 side, and corresponds to the third stop switch 42 (corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last). This is a command transmitted from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 when the stop switch 42) is turned from on to off.
The main control board 50 transmits a game end + game status command to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off (the player releases his hand from the third stop switch 42). do. Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the game end + game state command, it sends it back to the main control board 50 as it is (game end + ACK response of the game state command shown in FIG. 5), and further, to the management device 200. However, the game end + game status command is transmitted (Fig. 7). That is, the payout control board 100 transmits a game end + game state command to both the main control board 50 and the management device 200.

As a result, on the payout control board 100 side, it is possible to determine that the game has ended and the game state. Further, on the main control board 50 side, it can be determined that the game end and the game state can be transmitted to the payout control board 100 by sending back the transmitted game end + game state command as it is from the payout control board 100. Further, the management device 200 can also determine that the game has ended and the game state.

In FIG. 4, the input request command is a command that requests the payout control board 100 to subtract the number of bets from the number of credits, and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 when the bet switch 40 is turned on. It is a command.
Further, the subsequent command of the input request command indicates the number of bets (the number requested to be subtracted from the number of credits based on the operation of the bet switch 40).

In the present embodiment, the main control board 50 requests the payout control board 100 to subtract the bet number "1" from the credit number as an input request command when the 1-bet switch 40a is turned on (2001H). Send one sheet insertion request command).
Further, when the 3-bet switch 40b is turned on, the main control board 50 requests the payout control board 100 to subtract the bet number "3" from the number of credits as a payout request command "2003H" (three pieces are inserted). Request command) is sent.
When the 3-bet switch 40b is turned on, the one-sheet loading request command may be transmitted to the payout control board 100 three times as a charging request command.

Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the input request command, whether or not the input request can be accepted, specifically, the number of credits is equal to or greater than the number of bets (the number indicated by the subsequent command of the input request command). Judge whether or not.
Then, when it is determined that the input request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the number of credits is equal to or greater than the number of bets, the payout control board 100 executes a process of subtracting the number of bets from the number of credits and credits. The process of updating the display of the number display LED 76 is executed, and the input repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50 (the received input request command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the input request command shown in FIG. 5). ).

For example, when the credit number is "50" and the three-card insertion request command "2003H" is received, the payout control board 100 is indicated by the subsequent command of the three-card insertion request command "2003H" from the credit number "50". The process of subtracting the bet number "3" is executed, the display of the credit number display LED 76 is changed from "50" to "47", and the input repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the insertion request cannot be accepted, that is, it is determined that the number of credits is less than the number of bets (for example, in the situation where the number of credits is "2", the three-card insertion request command "2003H" (Received), the payout control board 100 transmits a non-input command to the main control board 50 without executing the process of subtracting the number of bets from the number of credits (NAK of the input request command shown in FIG. 5). response).

Further, when the input repeat command is received (the transmitted input request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that the request to subtract the bet number from the credit number is permitted. A process corresponding to the bet of the electronic medal (for example, a process of lighting the 1-bet display LED to the 3-bet display LED, and a process of making the operation of the start switch 41 acceptable) is executed.
On the other hand, when the non-insertion command is received, the main control board 50 determines that the request for subtracting the bet number from the credit number is not permitted, and does not execute the process according to the bet of the electronic medal.
Further, if neither the input repeat command nor the input non-capable command is received even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the input request command is transmitted, a timeout occurs and the main control board 50 reappears to the payout control board 100. Send a submission request command.

In this way, when the payout control board 100 is requested to subtract the number of bets from the number of credits, one round-trip command communication is performed between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
As a result, the processing related to the bet of the electronic medal is surely executed on both the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and the number of credits is managed accurately, so that the player is not disadvantaged. Can be done.

Further, as described above, when the power is turned off, the program on the payout control board 100 is stopped before the program on the main control board 50, and when returning from the power off, the program is paid out before the program on the main control board 50. The program on the control board 100 starts.
Furthermore, if the main control board 50 transmits a payout request command to the payout control board 100 when the bet switch 40 is turned on, and the payout control board 100 can receive the payout request when the payout request command is received. The input repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50, and if the input request cannot be accepted, the input non-input command is transmitted to the main control board 50.

Further, when the main control board 50 receives the input repeat command, it executes the process according to the bet of the electronic medal, and when it receives the command that cannot be input, it does not execute the process according to the bet of the electronic medal. If neither the input repeat command nor the input non-repeated command is received, the input request command is transmitted to the payout control board 100 again.
Here, after the main control board 50 transmits a payout request command to the payout control board 100, and before the payout control board 100 receives the payout request command, a power failure occurs and the program on the payout control board 100 is stopped. Suppose you did. In this case, the main control board 50 does not receive either the input repeat command or the input non-repeated command, and after returning from the power failure, the output request command is transmitted to the payout control board 100 again. Therefore, commands can be reliably transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.

Further, the main control board 50 transmits an input request command to the payout control board 100, and the payout control board 100 receives the input request command, but before transmitting the input repeat command or the input non-issue command to the main control board 50, It is assumed that the power supply is cut off and the program on the payout control board 100 is stopped. In this case, after the power is restored, the payout control board 100 transmits an input repeat command or a non-input command to the main control board 50, so that the payout control board 50 and the payout control board 100 can be reliably connected to each other. You can send and receive commands.

When the power is turned on, that is, when the power is restored from the power failure, the main control board 50 sends a start confirmation command to the payout control board 100, and the payout control board 100 receives the start confirmation command as it is. It is sent back to the main control board 50. Then, when the transmitted start confirmation command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is, the main control board 50 determines that the communication between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 is normal. After that, the payout control board 100 transmits an input repeat command or an input non-issue command to the main control board 50. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power failure, the program on the payout control board 100 is started before the program on the main control board 50, but the main control board 50 surely receives the input repeat command or the input non-input command. be able to.

Further, after the main control board 50 sends an input request command to the payout control board 100, the payout control board 100 receives the input request command, and sends an input repeat command or a non-input command to the main control board 50, the power supply is supplied. It is assumed that a disconnection occurs and the program of the payout control board 100 is stopped. In this case, since the program on the main control board 50 is stopped after the program on the payout control board 100 is stopped, the main control board 50 receives the input repeat command or the input non-issue command transmitted by the payout control board 100. Therefore, commands can be reliably transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.

In FIG. 4, the payout request command is a command that requests the payout control board 100 to add the number of payouts to the number of credits, and is paid out from the main control board 50 when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off. This is a command transmitted to the control board 100.
Further, the subsequent command of the payout request command indicates the number of payouts (the number requested to be added to the number of credits based on the winning combination).

For example, at the time of winning a winning combination of 10 cards, the main control board 50 sets the number of payouts "10" to the number of credits as a payout request command to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off. Send "210AH" requesting addition.
Even when the winning combination is not won, the main control board 50 transmits a payout request command to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off. In this case, since the number of payouts is "0", the payout request command is "2100H".

Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the payout request command, whether or not the payout request can be accepted, specifically, the number of payouts (the number indicated by the subsequent command of the payout request command) is added to the number of credits. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the upper limit of the number of credits (“10000” in this embodiment) is exceeded.
Then, when it is determined that the payout request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the number of payouts is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of credits even if the number of payouts is added to the number of credits, the payout control board 100 pays out to the number of credits. The process of adding the number of sheets is executed, the process of updating the display of the credit number display LED 76 is executed, and the payout repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50 (the received payout request command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is (Fig.). ACK response of the payout request command shown in 5)).

For example, when the payout request command "210AH" (10 cards are paid out) is received when the number of credits is "50", the payout control board 100 has the number of credits "50" and a subsequent command of the payout request command "210AH". The process of adding the number of payouts "10" to be shown is executed, the display of the credit number display LED is changed from "50" to "60", and the payout repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout request cannot be accepted, that is, when the number of payouts is added to the number of credits, it is determined that the upper limit of the number of credits is exceeded (for example, when the number of credits is "9995". When the payout request command "210AH" (10 payouts) is received), the payout control board 100 transmits a payout not possible command to the main control board 50 without executing the process of adding the payout number to the number of credits. (NAK response of the payout request command shown in FIG. 5).

Further, when the payout repeat command is received (the sent payout request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that the request to add the number of payouts to the number of credits is permitted. Then, a process according to the payout of the electronic medal based on the winning of the winning combination (for example, a process of displaying the number of paid out electronic medals on the acquired number display LED 78) is executed.
On the other hand, when the non-payable command is received, the main control board 50 determines that the request to add the number of payouts to the number of credits is not permitted, and responds to the payout of the electronic medal based on the winning combination. Do not execute the process.

In this way, when the payout control board 100 is requested to add the number of payouts according to the winning combination to the number of credits, one round-trip command communication is performed between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
As a result, the process related to the payout of the electronic medal based on the winning of the winning combination is surely executed on both the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and the number of credits is managed accurately, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can be avoided.

In FIG. 4, the return request command is a command that requests the payout control board 100 to return the bet electronic medal to the credit, and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 when the cancel switch 46 is turned on. Command.
Further, the subsequent command of the return request command indicates the number of returned medals (the number requested to be added to the number of credits based on the return of the electronic medal).
For example, when the cancel switch 46 is operated with three electronic medals bet, the main control board 50 sets the number of credits to the payout control board 100 as a return request command when the cancel switch 46 is turned on. "2203H" requesting to add the number of returned sheets "3" is transmitted.

Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the return request command, whether or not the return request can be accepted, specifically, the number of returned cards (the number indicated by the subsequent command of the return request command) is added to the number of credits. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the upper limit of the number of credits (“10000” in this embodiment) is exceeded.
Then, when it is determined that the return request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the number of returned credits is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of credits even if the number of returned credits is added, the payout control board 100 returns the number of credits. The process of adding the number of sheets is executed, the process of updating the display of the credit number display LED 76 is executed, and the return repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50 (the received return request command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is (Fig.). ACK response of the return request command shown in 5)).

For example, when the return request command "2203H" is received when the credit number is "100", the payout control board 100 has the credit number "100" and the return number "3" indicated by the subsequent command of the return request command "2203H". Is executed, the display of the credit number display LED is changed from "100" to "103", and the return repeat command is transmitted to the main control board 50.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the return request cannot be accepted, that is, when the number of returned credits is added to the number of credits, it is determined that the upper limit of the number of credits is exceeded (for example, when the number of credits is "9999"). When the return request command "2203H" is received (there is a request to return three electronic medals), the payout control board 100 does not execute the process of adding the number of returned sheets to the number of credits, and the command cannot be returned. Is transmitted to the main control board 50 (NAK response of the return request command shown in FIG. 5).

Further, when the return repeat command is received (the transmitted return request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that the request to add the number of returned sheets to the number of credits is permitted. Then, a process corresponding to the return of the electronic medal (for example, a process of turning off the 1-bet display LED to the 3-bet display LED, and a process of disabling the operation of the start switch 41) is executed.
On the other hand, when the non-returnable command is received, the main control board 50 determines that the request to add the number of returned cards to the number of credits is not permitted, and does not execute the process corresponding to the return of the electronic medal.

In this way, when the payout control board 100 is requested to return the bet electronic medal to the credit, one round-trip command communication is performed between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
As a result, the process related to the return of the electronic medal is surely executed on both the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and the number of credits is managed accurately, so that the player is not disadvantaged. Can be done.

In FIG. 6, the lending request command is a command that requests the payout control board 100 to add the number of lending sheets to the number of credits, and the management device (CR unit) 200 sends the lending control board 100 to the payout control board 100 when the lending switch 202 is turned on. The command to be sent.
Further, the subsequent command of the lending request command indicates the number of lending (the number required to be added to the number of credits based on the lending of electronic medals).

For example, when a 1000-yen bill is inserted into the bill slot 201 of the management device 200 and the lending switch 202 is operated in a situation where the frequency "10" is displayed on the frequency display unit 204, the management device 200 causes the management device 200 to operate. When the lending switch 202 is turned on, "4032H" is transmitted to the payout control board 100 as a lending request command, which requests that the number of lending "50" be added to the number of credits.

Further, when the payout control board 100 receives the lending request command, whether or not the lending request can be accepted, specifically, the number of lending (the number indicated by the subsequent command of the lending request command) is added to the number of credits. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the upper limit of the number of credits (“10000” in this embodiment) is exceeded.
Then, when it is determined that the loan request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the number of credits is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of credits even if the number of loans is added, the payout control board 100 is attached to the management device 200. In response to this, a lending repeat command is transmitted (the received lending request command is sent back to the management device 200 as it is (ACK response of the lending request command shown in FIG. 7)).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the loan request cannot be accepted, that is, when the number of loans is added to the number of credits, it is determined that the upper limit of the number of credits is exceeded (for example, when the number of credits is "9955". When the lending request command "4032H" (lending number "50") is received), the payout control board 100 transmits an error command "E000H" to the management device 200 (NAK response at the time of abnormality shown in FIG. 7). ).

Further, when the lending repeat command is received (the transmitted lending request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the management device 200 instructs the payout control board 100 to execute the lending request. Is transmitted, and further, a process of updating the display of the frequency display unit 204 according to the number of loaned sheets is executed.

For example, the management device 200 transmits "4032H" (rental number "50") as a lending request command to the payout control board 100, and then the payout control board 100 sends "4032H" as a lending repeat command to the management device 200. (ACK response of the lending request command), the management device 200 instructs the payout control board 100 to add the number of lending "50" to the number of credits as a lending instruction command "4132H". To send. Further, the management device 200 executes a process of subtracting the frequency "10" according to the number of loaned sheets "50" from the numerical value displayed on the frequency display unit 204.

On the other hand, when the error command is received, the management device 200 controls to return to the standby state.
Further, upon receiving the lending instruction command, the payout control board 100 executes a process of adding the number of lending to the number of credits, and executes a process of updating the display of the credit number display LED 76.
For example, when the number of credits is "50" and the lending instruction command "4132H" (the number of lending "50") is received, the payout control board 100 follows the lending instruction command "4132H" to the number of credits "50". The process of adding the number of loans "50" indicated by the command is executed, and the display of the credit number display LED is changed from "50" to "100".

In this way, when the electronic medal is lent out from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10, one and a half round-trip command communication is performed between the management device 200 and the payout control board 100.
As a result, the processing related to the lending of the electronic medal is surely executed by both the management device 200 and the payout control board 100, and the number of credits is managed accurately, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged. can.

In FIG. 7, the lower count request command and the upper count request command are commands that request the management device (CR unit) 200 to refund the electronic medals, and the payout control board 100 is sent to the management device 200 when the count switch 47 is turned on. The command to be sent.
Further, the subsequent command of the lower count request command indicates the lower 8 bits when the number of refunds (number of credits) is represented by 16 bits (2 bytes).
Furthermore, the subsequent command of the higher count request command indicates the upper 8 bits when the number of refunds (number of credits) is represented by 16 bits.
That is, the number of refunds is specified from the subsequent command of the lower count request command and the subsequent command of the upper count request command.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is set to "10000 (D)". The upper limit of the number of credits, "10000 (D)", is "10011100010000 (B)" in binary and "2710 (H)" in hexadecimal. As described above, the upper limit of the number of credits "10000 (D)" cannot be represented by 8 bits (1 byte). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of refunds (number of credits) is specified by 16 bits (2 bytes) of the command following the lower count request command and the command following the higher count request command.

For example, it is assumed that the counting switch 47 is operated under the condition that 1000 electronic medals are credited to the payout control board 100 (the number of credits is "1000 (D)"). Here, the credit number "1000 (D)" is "1111101000 (B)" in binary and "03E8 (H)" in hexadecimal. In this case, the lower count request command is "50E8 (H)" and the upper count request command is "5103 (H)". Then, the payout control board 100 transmits "50E8 (H)" as a lower count request command to the management device 200 when the count switch 47 is turned on.

Further, upon receiving the lower count request command, the management device 200 determines whether or not the refund request can be accepted.
Then, when it is determined that the refund request can be accepted, the management device 200 transmits a lower count repeat command to the payout control board 100 (the received lower count request command is sent back to the payout control board 100 as it is (). ACK response of the lower count request command shown in FIG. 6)).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the refund request cannot be accepted, the management device 200 transmits an error command "E000H" to the payout control board 100 (NAK response at the time of abnormality shown in FIG. 6). In this case, the management device 200 controls to return to the standby state.

Further, when the lower count repeat command is received (the transmitted lower count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is), the payout control board 100 sends the management device 200 a "5103 (5103) as a higher count request command. H) ”is sent.
On the other hand, when the error command is received, the payout control board 100 controls to return to the standby state without transmitting the upper count request command.

Further, when the upper count request command is received, the management device 200 transmits a higher count repeat command to the payout control board 100 (the received upper count request command is sent back to the payout control board 100 as it is (upper order shown in FIG. 6). ACK response of the count request command)).
Furthermore, when the higher count repeat command is received (the transmitted higher count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is), the payout control board 100 sends a count instruction command to the management device 200, and further. , The process of clearing the number of credits (setting to "0") is executed, and the process of updating the display of the credit number display LED76 (setting to "0") is executed.

Further, upon receiving the counting instruction command, the management device 200 executes a process of reflecting the number of refunds specified from the lower counting request command and the upper counting request command in the number of electronic medals managed by the management device 200 side. To control.
After that, when the return switch 203 is operated, the management device 200 displays the number of electronic medals returned from the slot machine 10 (payout control board 100) to the management device 200 and the frequency display unit 204 by operating the counting switch 47. The number of electronic medals corresponding to the displayed frequency is stored in a card (magnetic card, IC card, etc.) as electronic data, and the card is ejected from the ejection port of the card reader / writer 205.

In this way, when the electronic medal is returned from the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 to the management device 200, a one-and-a-half round-trip command communication is performed between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.
As a result, the process related to the refund of the electronic medal is surely executed on both the payout control board 100 and the management device 200, and the number of credits is managed accurately, so that the player is not disadvantaged. can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the credit number management CPU 105 is set with a unique ID consisting of 4 bytes of data. In FIG. 7, the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU-specific ID are commands for transmitting the 1st to 4th bytes of the ID unique to the credit number management CPU 105 to the management device 200.
When the power is turned on, the payout control board 100 sequentially transmits the CPU-specific IDs 1st to 4th bytes to the management device 200.

Further, when the management device 200 receives the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU unique ID, it stores (saves) them in a predetermined storage area and sequentially transmits them to the hall computer 300.
Furthermore, when the hall computer 300 receives the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU unique ID, it stores (saves) these in a predetermined storage area.
Further, the management device 200 and the hall computer 300 can keep the stored CPU-specific IDs 1st to 4th bytes as a history.

For example, if the payout control board 100 is illegally replaced, the credit number management CPU 105 mounted on the payout control board 100 changes. The 1st to 4th bytes of the ID will also change.
Therefore, by checking whether the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU unique ID stored in the management device 200 and the hall computer 300 have not changed in the middle, whether or not the payout control board 100 has been illegally replaced. Can be determined.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a processing flow of the main routine on the payout control board 100.
In the main routine of the payout control board 100, when any signal is input to the input port 101 in step S101, the process proceeds to the next step S102, and the payout control board 100 receives the input signal as an ON signal of the counting switch 47. The process of determining whether or not is is executed.
Here, when it is determined that the count switch 47 is an ON signal, the process proceeds to the next step S103 and the process of turning on the count request flag is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S104.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the counting switch 47 is not an ON signal, step S103 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not the VL signal is on.
Here, if the VL signal (DC 18V signal) is supplied from the management device (CR unit) 200 to the payout control board 100, in step S104, it is determined that the VL signal is on, and the VL signal is paid out to the management device 200. It is determined that the control board 100 is normally connected, and the process proceeds to step S105 to execute the process of clearing the VL error flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S107.
On the other hand, if the VL signal is not supplied from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100, in step S104, it is determined that the VL signal is off, and the management device 200 and the payout control board 100 are normally connected. It is determined that this is not the case, and the process proceeds to step S106 to execute the process of setting the VL error flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S107.

In step S107, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not the signal input (received) to the input port 101 is a main control command.
Here, when it is determined that the input signal is the main control command, the process proceeds to the next step S108, and the payout control board 100 stores (saves) the input main control command in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 103. do. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S109.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the input signal is not the main control command, step S108 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S109.

In step S109, the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the stored command is the main control command.
Here, when it is determined that the stored command is the main control command, the process proceeds to the next step S110, and the payout control board 100 executes the main control command analysis process (FIGS. 9 and 10). The details of the main control command analysis process will be described later. Then, when the main control command analysis process is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S111.

In step S111, the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the counting process (FIG. 12) is being executed.
Here, the counting process is a process started when “Yes” is set in step S116 described later, and the details thereof will be described later. Further, it is possible to execute the main routine of the payout control board 100 in parallel with the counting process while the counting process is being executed. Therefore, in step S111 of the main routine of the payout control board 100, a process of determining whether or not the counting process is being executed is executed.
At the start of the counting process, the flag during the counting process is set, and at the end of the counting process, the flag during the counting process is cleared. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the counting process is being executed by checking the on / off of the counting process flag.

Then, when it is determined in step S111 that the counting process is being executed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without executing the process after step S113.
When it is determined in step S111 that the counting process is being executed, the counting process being executed is continued thereafter.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S111 that the counting process is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S113, and the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the lending process (FIG. 11) is being executed. do.

Here, the lending process is a process started when “Yes” is set in step S118 described later, and the details thereof will be described later. Further, it is possible to execute the main routine of the payout control board 100 in parallel with the lending process while the lending process is being executed. Therefore, in step S113 of the main routine of the payout control board 100, a process of determining whether or not the loan process is being executed is executed.
The lending processing flag is set at the start of the lending processing, and the lending processing flag is cleared at the end of the lending processing. Thereby, by checking the on / off of the lending processing flag, it is possible to determine whether or not the lending processing is being executed.

Then, when it is determined in step S113 that the lending process is being executed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without executing the process after step S115.
If it is determined in step S113 that the lending process is being executed, the lending process being executed is continued thereafter.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S113 that the lending process is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S115, and the payout control board 100 executes the process of determining whether or not the gaming machine command is being transmitted.

Here, the gaming machine command transmission process is a process executed when "No" is obtained in step S118 described later. Further, it is possible to execute the main routine of the payout control board 100 in parallel with the game machine command transmission process while the game machine command transmission process is being executed. Therefore, in step S115 of the main routine of the payout control board 100, a process of determining whether or not the game machine command transmission process is being executed is executed.
Then, when it is determined in step S115 that the game machine command transmission process is being executed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without executing the process after step S116.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S115 that the gaming machine command transmission process is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S116, and the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the counting request flag is on. ..

When it is determined in step S116 that the counting request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S117, and the payout control board 100 starts the counting process (FIG. 12). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S116 that the count request flag is off, the process proceeds to step S118, and the payout control board 100 determines whether the signal input (received) to the input port 101 is a lending request command. Executes the judgment process of whether or not.

Here, when it is determined that the input (received) signal is the lending request command, the process proceeds to step S119, and the payout control board 100 starts the lending process (FIG. 11). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the input signal is not a lending request command, the process proceeds to step S120, and the payout control board 100 executes the game machine command transmission process. This process is a process of transmitting a gaming machine command to the management device 200. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

As described above, it is determined in step S111 whether or not the counting process is being executed, and when it is determined that the counting process is being executed, the counting process is being executed without executing the process after step S113. When the processing is continued and it is determined that the counting process is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S113 to determine whether or not the lending process is being executed.
Further, in step S116, it is determined whether or not the counting request flag is on, and when it is determined that the counting request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S117 to start the counting process, and the counting request flag is off. When it is determined, the process proceeds to step S118 to determine whether or not the loan request command has been received.

In this way, the payout control board 100 can execute the counting process (process related to the refund of the electronic medal) and the lending process (process related to the lending of the electronic medal), and determines whether or not the counting process is being executed. The processing is performed before the processing for determining whether or not the lending processing is being executed, and the processing for determining whether or not the counting request flag is on is performed from the processing for determining whether or not the lending request command has been received. By performing it first, the counting process is set to be executed with priority over the lending process.
Here, when the counting switch 47 is operated, the payout control board 100 executes the counting process.
Further, when the lending switch 202 is operated and the lending request command is transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100, the payout control board 100 executes the lending process.

Furthermore, when the counting switch 47 and the lending switch 202 are operated at the same time, the payout control board 100 gives priority to the counting process, so that the counting process is executed and the lending process is not executed.
Once the lent electronic medal is refunded, if the electronic medal cannot be exchanged for money equivalently, it will be disadvantageous to the player, but the counting process is prioritized and the lending process is not executed. By executing the counting process, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, when the counting switch 47 is operated during the lending process, the payout control board 100 accepts the operation of the counting switch 47, continues the lending process being executed, and when the lending process is completed, the counting process is completed. To execute.
That is, the payout control board 100 can accept the operation of the counting switch 47 at any time including the execution of the lending process and the rotation of the reel 31, and by accepting the operation of the counting switch 47. , The counting process can be executed at an appropriate timing thereafter.
As a result, if the counting switch 47 is operated once, the electronic medal can be refunded without fail, and the re-operation of the counting switch 47 can be eliminated, so that the player does not feel annoyed. Can be done.

9 and 10 show a subroutine of the main control command analysis process in step S110 of FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart following FIG.
As described above, the commands transmitted from the main control board 50 to the payout control board 100 are collectively referred to as main control commands.
Further, as the main control command, eight types of commands described in the "contents" column in FIG. 4 can be mentioned.
Then, in the main control command analysis process, it is determined which of the eight types of commands is received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed.

Specifically, in the main control command analysis process, in step S131, a process of determining whether or not the error flag is on (whether an error has occurred) is executed.
Then, when it is determined that the error flag is on, the process proceeds to step S132, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting an error command to the main control board 50. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the error flag is off, the process proceeds to step S133.

In step S133, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not the received command is a start confirmation command.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is a start confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S134, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending the received start confirmation command back to the main control board 50 as it is (of the start confirmation command). ACK response).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is not a start confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S135.

Proceeding to step S135, the payout control board 100 determines whether or not the received command is either an input request command, a return request command, or a payout request command, that is, whether or not it is an operation request command. To execute.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is either an input request command, a return request command, or a payout request command, that is, when it is determined that the command is an operation request command, the process proceeds to step S138 in FIG.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is neither an input request command, a return request command, nor a payout request command, that is, when it is determined that the command is not an operation request command, the process proceeds to step S136.

Here, if the received command is a start confirmation command, it becomes "Yes" in step S133 and proceeds to step S134, and the received command is an operation request command (input request command, return request command, or payout request command). ), It becomes “Yes” in step S135, and the process proceeds to step S138 in FIG. Therefore, among the eight types of commands shown in the "contents" column of FIG. 4, the command that becomes "No" in step S135 and proceeds to step S136 is the setting change start command, the setting change end command, and the game start + RT state. When a command or a game end + game status command is received, that is, when a game information command is received.

Then, in step S136, the payout control board 100 puts the received game information command (setting change start command, setting change end command, game start + RT state command, or game end + game state command) into the management device transmission command buffer. The process of setting is executed, and in the next step S137, the process of sending the received game information command back to the main control board 50 as it is is executed (ACK response of the game information command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
When the process of setting the game information command in the management device transmission command buffer is executed in step S136, the game information command is stored in the management device transmission command buffer by the interrupt process on the payout control board 100 executed after this process. The game information command that has been executed will be transmitted to the management device 200.

Further, when the process proceeds to step S138 in FIG. 10, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not the received command is an input request command.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is an input request command, the process proceeds to step S139, and the payout control board 100 masks the subsequent command (lower 8 bits) of the input request command with "03H (00000011B)". To execute.
As described above, the subsequent command of the input request command indicates the number of bets. Further, the maximum value of the number of bets is set to "3", and when three cards are inserted, the subsequent command of the insertion request command is "03H (00000011B)". That is, the maximum value of the number of bets can be represented by bits D0 to D1 in the command following the input request command.

Therefore, in step S139, a process of masking the subsequent command of the input request command with "03H (00000011B)" is executed. That is, the subsequent command of the input request command and "03H (00000011B)" are ANDed.
As a result, the bits other than the D0 to D1 bits in the command following the input request command can be set to "0", and even if "1" is input to the D2 to D7 bits in the command following the input request command due to noise. Since this can be set to "0", it is possible to prevent accidentally subtracting a number exceeding "3" from the number of credits at the time of insertion.

Further, when the process of step S139 is executed, the process proceeds to step S140, and whether or not the payout control board 100 is "(number of credits-number of bets) <0", that is, whether or not the number of credits is less than the number of bets. Execute the judgment process.
Then, when it is determined that the number of credits is less than the number of bets, the process proceeds to step S141, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting a non-input command to the main control board 50 (NAK response of the input request command). .. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of credits is equal to or greater than the number of bets, the payout control board 100 proceeds to step S142, executes a process of subtracting the number of bets from the number of credits, and in the next step S143, the input repeat. The process of transmitting the command to the main control board 50 (sending the received input request command back to the main control board 50 as it is) is executed (ACK response of the input request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

If it is determined in step S138 that the received command is not an input request command, the process proceeds to step S144, and the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the received command is a payout request command.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is a payout request command, the process proceeds to step S145, and the payout control board 100 masks the subsequent command (lower 8 bits) of the payout request command with "0FH (000011111B)". To execute.
As described above, the subsequent command of the payout request command indicates the number of payouts. Further, the maximum value of the number of payouts is set to "15", and when 15 payouts are made, the subsequent command of the payout request command is "0EH (000001110B)". That is, the maximum value of the number of payouts can be represented by bits D0 to D3 in the command following the payout request command.

Therefore, in step S145, a process of masking the subsequent command of the payout request command with "0FH (000011111B)" is executed. That is, the subsequent command of the payout request command and "0FH (000011111B)" are ANDed. As a result, the bits other than the D0 to D3 bits in the command following the payout request command can be set to "0", and even if "1" is input to the D4 to D7 bits in the command following the payout request command due to noise. Since this can be set to "0", it is possible to prevent accidentally adding a number exceeding "15" to the number of credits at the time of payout.

Further, when the process of step S145 is executed, the process proceeds to step S146, and whether or not the payout control board 100 is "(number of credits + number of payouts)> upper limit value", that is, when the number of payouts is added to the number of credits, the number of credits is calculated. The process of determining whether or not the upper limit value (“10000” in the present embodiment) is exceeded is executed.
Then, when it is determined that the upper limit of the number of credits is exceeded when the number of payouts is added to the number of credits, the process proceeds to step S147, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting a non-payout command to the main control board 50 (). NAK response of the payout request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit of the number of credits is not exceeded even if the number of payouts is added to the number of credits, the payout control board 100 proceeds to step S148 and executes a process of adding the number of payouts to the number of credits. Then, in the next step S149, a process of transmitting the payout repeat command to the main control board 50 (sending the received payout request command back to the main control board 50 as it is) is executed (ACK response of the payout request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

If it is determined in step S144 that the received command is not a payout request command, the process proceeds to step S150, and the payout control board 100 executes a determination process of whether or not the received command is a return request command.
Then, when it is determined that the received command is a return request command, the process proceeds to step S151, and the payout control board 100 masks the subsequent command (lower 8 bits) of the return request command with "03H (00000011B)". To execute.
As described above, the subsequent command of the return request command indicates the number of returned sheets. Further, since the maximum value of the number of bets is "3", the maximum value of the number of returned sheets is also "3". When returning three cards, the command following the return request command is "03H (00000011B)". That is, the maximum value of the number of returned sheets can be represented by bits D0 to D1 in the subsequent command of the return request command, similarly to the maximum value of the number of bets.

Therefore, in step S151, a process of masking the subsequent command of the return request command with "03H (00000011B)" is executed. That is, the subsequent command of the return request command and "03H (00000011B)" are ANDed. As a result, the bits other than the D0 to D1 bits in the command following the return request command can be set to "0", and even if "1" is input to the D2 to D7 bits in the command following the return request command due to noise. Since this can be set to "0", it is possible to prevent accidentally adding a number exceeding "3" to the number of credits at the time of return.

Further, when the process of step S151 is executed, the process proceeds to step S152, and whether or not the payout control board 100 is "(number of credits + number of returned cards)> upper limit value", that is, when the number of returned cards is added to the number of credits, the number of credits is calculated. The process of determining whether or not the upper limit value (“10000” in the present embodiment) is exceeded is executed.
Then, when it is determined that the upper limit of the number of credits is exceeded when the number of returned cards is added to the number of credits, the process proceeds to step S153, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting a non-returnable command to the main control board 50 (the process of transmitting the non-returnable command to the main control board 50). NAK response of return request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit of the number of credits is not exceeded even if the number of returned credits is added to the number of credits, the payout control board 100 proceeds to step S154 and executes a process of adding the number of returned credits to the number of credits. Then, in the next step S155, a process of transmitting the return repeat command to the main control board 50 (sending the received return request command to the main control board 50 as it is) is executed (ACK response of the return request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
When the processing according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of step S111 shown in FIG.

FIG. 11 shows a subroutine of lending processing in step S119 of FIG. Note that the term "lending process 1" in FIG. 11 indicates that it is a part of the lending process in step S119 of FIG. The other part of the lending process is illustrated in FIG. 23 (referred to as “lending process 2”) described later.
If it is determined that the lending request command has been received in step S118 of FIG. 8, the process proceeds to step S119 of FIG. As a result, the lending process of FIG. 11 is started. Further, in the lending process, in step S161, the payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting a lending repeat command to the management device 200 (sending the received lending request command back to the management device 200 as it is) (ACK of the lending request command). response). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S162.

In step S162, the payout control board 100 repeatedly executes the process of determining whether or not the transmission of the lending repeat command is completed until it becomes "Yes", and when it becomes "Yes" in step S162, the process proceeds to step S163.
Proceeding to step S163, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not a management device command has been received. As described above, the management device command is a general term for commands transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100.
Then, when it is determined in step S163 that the management device command has been received, the process proceeds to step S164 to execute a process of determining whether or not the received management device command is a lending instruction command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S163 that the management device command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S168, and the payout control board 100 has timed out (a predetermined time has elapsed since the loan repeat command was transmitted). Executes the judgment process of whether or not.
Here, if it is determined in step S168 that the time-out has occurred, the process proceeds to step S169, and the payout control board 100 sets the error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S168 that the time-out has not occurred, the process of step S163 is executed again.

If it is determined in step S164 that the received management device command is a lending instruction command, the process proceeds to step S165, and the payout control board 100 is lent out (subsequent commands (lower 8 bits) of the lending request command). The process of determining whether or not the command following the instruction command (lower 8 bits) matches is executed.
Here, if it is determined in step S165 that they do not match, the process proceeds to the next step S166, and the payout control board 100 stores the subsequent command (lower 8 bits) of the lending instruction command as the number of payouts in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 103. Memorize (save). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S167.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S165 that they match, step S166 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S167.

Proceeding to step S167, the payout control board 100 executes a process of adding the number of loans to the number of credits. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
If it is determined in step S164 that the received management device command is not a lending instruction command, the process proceeds to step S169, and the payout control board 100 sets an error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
If the error flag is set in step S169, it is determined as "Yes" in step S131 of the main control command analysis process of FIG. 9 executed after this process, and the process proceeds to step S132. Then, an error command is transmitted to the main control board 50.

FIG. 12 shows a subroutine of counting processing in step S117 of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 12, "counting process 1" indicates that it is a part of the counting process in step S117 of FIG. The other part of the counting process is shown in FIG. 24 (referred to as “counting process 2”) described later.
If it is determined in step S116 of FIG. 8 that the count request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S117 of FIG. As a result, the counting process of FIG. 12 is started. Further, in the counting process, in step S181, the payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting a lower counting request command to the management device 200. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S182.

In step S182, the payout control board 100 repeatedly executes the determination process of whether or not the transmission of the lower count request command is completed until it becomes “Yes”, and when it becomes “Yes” in step S182, the process proceeds to step S183.
Proceeding to step S183, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not a management device command has been received.
Then, when it is determined in step S183 that the management device command has been received, the process proceeds to step S184 to execute a determination process of whether or not the received command and the transmitted command match. That is, the process of determining whether or not the transmitted lower count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is (the lower count repeat command is received) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S183 that the management device command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S192, and the payout control board 100 times out (a predetermined time has elapsed since the lower count request command was transmitted). Executes the process of determining whether or not.
Here, if it is determined in step S192 that the time-out has occurred, the process proceeds to step S194, and the payout control board 100 sets the error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S192 that the time-out has not occurred, the process of step S183 is executed again.

Further, in step S184, when it is determined that the received command and the transmitted command match (the transmitted lower count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is), the process proceeds to step S185, and the payout control board 100 advances. , The process of transmitting the upper count request command to the management device 200 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S186.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S184 that the received command and the transmitted command do not match, the process proceeds to step S194, and the payout control board 100 sets the error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S186, the payout control board 100 repeatedly executes the process of determining whether or not the transmission of the upper count request command is completed until it becomes "Yes", and when it becomes "Yes" in step S186, it goes to step S187. move on.
Proceeding to step S187, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not a management device command has been received.
Then, when it is determined in step S187 that the management device command has been received, the process proceeds to step S188 to execute a determination process of whether or not the received command and the transmitted command match. That is, the process of determining whether or not the transmitted high-ranking count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is (the high-ranking counting repeat command is received) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S187 that the management device command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S193, and the payout control board 100 times out (a predetermined time has elapsed since the upper count request command was transmitted). Executes the process of determining whether or not.
Here, if it is determined in step S193 that the time-out has occurred, the process proceeds to step S194, and the payout control board 100 sets the error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S193 that the time-out has not occurred, the process of step S187 is executed again.

Further, in step S188, when it is determined that the received command and the transmitted command match (the transmitted higher count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is), the process proceeds to step S189, and the payout control board 100 advances. , A process of transmitting a counting instruction command to the management device 200 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S190.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S188 that the received command and the transmitted command do not match, the process proceeds to step S194, and the payout control board 100 sets the error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S190, the payout control board 100 repeatedly executes the process of determining whether or not the transmission of the counting instruction command is completed until it becomes "Yes", and when it becomes "Yes" in step S190, it proceeds to step S191. ..
Proceeding to step S191, the payout control board 100 executes a process of clearing the number of credits (making it “0”). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
If the error flag is set in step S194, it is determined as "Yes" in step S131 of the main control command analysis process of FIG. 9 executed after this process, and the process proceeds to step S132. Then, an error command is transmitted to the main control board 50.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of the main routine on the main control board 50.
When the power is turned on in the main control board 50, the power-on process is performed in step S201. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S202.
Proceeding to step S202, a process of determining whether or not the setting key switch 12 is on is executed.

Here, when it is determined in step S202 that the setting key switch 12 is on, the process proceeds to step S203 to execute the setting change process. Then, when the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to step S211.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S202 that the setting key switch 12 is off, the process proceeds to step S204 to execute the game return process. Then, when the game return process is completed, the process proceeds to step S211.
Proceeding to step S211, the determination process of three-card bet or one-card bet is executed. Then, when it is determined that the bet is three, the process proceeds to step S205, and when it is determined that the bet is one, the process proceeds to step S206.

Proceeding to step S205, a three-card bet process (FIG. 16) is executed. This process is a process of betting three credited electronic medals based on the operation of the three-bet switch 40b. The details of the 3-card bet processing will be described later. Then, when the three-card bet processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S212.
Proceeding to step S206, a single bet process (FIG. 17) is executed. This process is a process of betting one credited electronic medal based on the operation of the one-bet switch 40a. The details of the single bet processing will be described later. Then, when the one-sheet bet processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S212.

Proceeding to step S212, the start or cancel determination process is executed. Then, when it is determined to start, the process proceeds to step S207, and when it is determined to cancel, the process proceeds to step S210.
Proceeding to step S207, the game start process (FIG. 18) is executed. This process is a process of starting the game based on the operation of the start switch 41. The details of the game start process will be described later. Then, when the game start process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S208.

In step S208, the game end process (FIG. 19) is executed. This process is a process of ending the game based on the fact that the stop switch 42 is operated and the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped. The details of the game end process will be described later. Then, when the game end process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S209, and the payout process (FIG. 20) is executed. This process is a process of paying out an electronic medal based on a winning combination. Then, when the payout process is completed, the process returns to step S211.
Proceeding to step S210, the return process (FIG. 21) is executed. This process is a process of returning the bet electronic medal to the credit based on the operation of the cancel switch 46. Then, when the return process is completed, the process returns to step S211.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the flow of power-on processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 14, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the power-on process in the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the power-on process 1 in the payout control board 100. Note that "power-on processing 1" is shown in FIG. 14 as a part of the power-on processing on the payout control board 100. The other part of the power-on process is shown in FIG. 22 (referred to as “power-on process 2”) described later. Further, in FIG. 14, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the power-on process.
14 and 15 to 21 described later show the command transmission / reception status between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
Further, FIGS. 23 to 25, which will be described later, show a command transmission / reception status between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, electric power is supplied from the power supply board 150 to the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100. Then, at the same time as the program on the main control board 50 is started, the program on the payout control board 100 is started. At this time, the power-on process is executed on the main control board 50, and the power-on process 1 is executed on the payout control board 100.

First, the power-on process in the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 14 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 14 shows a subroutine of power-on processing in step S201 of FIG.
In step S301, the main control board 50 executes an initialization process. Then, when the initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S302.
Proceeding to step S302, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a start confirmation command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S303.
In step S303, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for an ACK response of a start confirmation command by the payout control board 100.

Then, when the transmitted start confirmation command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is (there is an ACK response), the process according to this flowchart ends. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S202 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, there is no ACK response of the startup confirmation command (timeout occurs) even after a predetermined time has passed since the activation confirmation command was transmitted, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (NAK response is sent). Then, the process proceeds to step S304, and the main control board 50 executes a process of subtracting the retransmission counter.
The retransmission counter is a counter for counting the number of retransmissions of the activation confirmation command, and "2" is set as an initial value at the first transmission of the activation confirmation command.
The initial value of the retransmission counter is not limited to "2", and may be, for example, "3".

When the subtraction process of the retransmission counter is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S305, and the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not the retransmission counter is “0”.
Here, when it is determined that the retransmission counter is "0", the process proceeds to the next step S306, and the main control board 50 executes error processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the retransmission counter is not "0", step S302 is executed again.

Next, the power-on process 1 in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 14 will be described.
In step S401, the payout control board 100 executes the initialization process. Then, when the initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S402.
In step S402, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a start confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the start confirmation command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S403, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending the received start confirmation command back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the start confirmation command). Then, when the received start confirmation command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 15, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the setting change process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the setting change process on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 15, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the setting change process.

First, the setting change process in the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 15 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 15 shows a subroutine of the setting change process in step S203 of FIG.
If the setting key switch 12 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control board 50 executes the setting change process. In this setting change process, in step S311 a process of transmitting a setting change start command to the payout control board 100 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S312.
In step S312, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for an ACK response of a setting change start command by the payout control board 100.
Here, when the transmitted setting change start command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is, the main control board 50 determines that the ACK response of the setting change start command by the payout control board 100 has been received, and changes the set value in step S203. Proceed to intermediate processing. In this process, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the display of the set value is switched from "1" → "2" → ... → "6" → "1" → ..., and the start switch 41 When is operated, it is a process to confirm with the set value being displayed. Then, when the process of changing the set value is completed, the process proceeds to step S313.

On the other hand, there is no ACK response (timeout) of the setting change start command even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting change start command is transmitted, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (NAK). (There is a response), the process returns to step S311, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the setting change start command to the payout control board 100.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S313, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a setting change end command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S314.

In step S314, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for an ACK response of a setting change end command by the payout control board 100.
Here, when the transmitted setting change end command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is, the main control board 50 determines that the ACK response of the setting change end command by the payout control board 100 has been received, and ends the process according to this flowchart. do. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S211 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, there is no ACK response (timeout) of the setting change end command even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting change end command is transmitted, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (NAK). (There is a response), the process returns to step S313, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the setting change end command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the flow of the setting change process in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 15 will be described.
In step S411, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a setting change start command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the setting change start command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S412, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending the received setting change start command back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the setting change start command). .. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S413.

Proceeding to step S413, the payout control board 100 executes the command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a setting change end command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the setting change end command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S414, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending the received setting change end command back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response of the setting change end command). .. Then, when the received setting change end command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the flow of the three-sheet bet processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 16, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the three-sheet bet processing on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the three-sheet bet processing on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 16, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the three-sheet bet processing.

Further, FIG. 16 shows an example in which a one-card insertion request command (“2001H”) requesting that the number of bets “1” is subtracted from the number of credits is transmitted three times as an insertion request command at the time of processing three bets. ing.
It should be noted that the three-card insertion request command (“2003H”) that requests the subtraction of the bet number “3” from the number of credits is not limited to the transmission of the one-card insertion request command three times during the three-card insertion request processing. You may send it once.

First, the three-sheet betting process on the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 16 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 16 shows the subroutine of the three-sheet bet processing in step S205 of FIG.
In step S321, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not a predetermined number of electronic medals have been bet. Then, when it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have been bet, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have not been bet, if the operation (ON) of the 3-bet switch 40b is detected in the next step S322, the process proceeds to the next step S323.
In step S323, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a single sheet loading request command to the payout control board 100 as a loading request command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S324.

In step S324, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the one-sheet insertion repeat command to be transmitted from the payout control board 100 (ACK response of the one-sheet insertion request command).
Then, when the one-sheet insertion repeat command is received (the transmitted one-sheet insertion request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 receives an ACK response of the one-sheet insertion request command by the payout control board 100. It is determined that there was, and the process proceeds to step S325.

On the other hand, the one-sheet insertion repeat command is not received (time-out occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one-sheet insertion request command was transmitted in step S323, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100. (There is a NAK response), the process returns to step S323, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the one-sheet input request command to the payout control board 100.
After that, the main control board 50 executes the same processing as in steps S323 and S324 in steps S325 and S326, and steps S327 and S328. That is, the same processing as in steps S323 and S324 is repeatedly executed three times. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S212 shown in FIG.

Next, a three-sheet bet process on the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 16 will be described.
In step S421, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a single sheet insertion request command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, upon receiving the one-sheet insertion request command, the process proceeds to the next step S422, and the payout control board 100 transmits the one-sheet insertion repeat command to the main control board 50 (the received one-sheet insertion request command is directly transmitted to the main control board). (Send back to 50) Executes the process (ACK response of the one-sheet insertion request command). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S423.
After that, the payout control board 100 executes the same processing as in steps S421 and S422 in steps S423 and S424, and steps S425 and S426. That is, the same processing as in steps S421 and S422 is repeatedly executed three times. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the flow of single bet processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 17, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the single bet process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the single bet process on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 17, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the single bet processing.

First, a single bet process on the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 17 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 17 shows a subroutine of single bet processing in step S206 of FIG.
In step S331, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not a predetermined number of electronic medals have been bet. Then, when it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have been bet, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have not been bet, if the operation (ON) of the 1-bet switch 40a is detected in the next step S332, the process proceeds to the next step S333.
In step S333, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a single sheet loading request command to the payout control board 100 as a loading request command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S334.

In step S334, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the one-sheet insertion repeat command to be transmitted from the payout control board 100 (ACK response of the one-sheet insertion request command).
Then, when the one-sheet insertion repeat command is received (the transmitted one-sheet insertion request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 receives an ACK response of the one-sheet insertion request command by the payout control board 100. It is determined that there was, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S212 shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the one-sheet insertion repeat command is not received (time-out occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one-sheet insertion request command was transmitted in step S333, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100. (There is a NAK response), the process returns to step S333, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the one-sheet input request command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the single bet processing in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 17 will be described.
In step S431, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a single sheet insertion request command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, upon receiving the one-sheet insertion request command, the process proceeds to the next step S432, and the payout control board 100 transmits the one-sheet insertion repeat command to the main control board 50 (the received one-sheet insertion request command is directly transmitted to the main control board). (Send back to 50) Executes the process (ACK response of the one-sheet insertion request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the flow of the game start process in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 18, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the game start process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the game start process on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 18, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the game start process.

First, the game start processing in the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 18 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 18 shows a subroutine of the game start process in step S207 of FIG.
In step S351, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not a predetermined number of electronic medals have been bet. Then, when it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have not been bet, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specified number of electronic medals have been bet, if the operation (ON) of the start switch 41 is detected in the next step S352, the process proceeds to the next step S353.
In step S353, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a game start + RT state command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S354.
In step S354, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the game start + RT state command to be sent back (ACK response) from the payout control board 100.

Then, the transmitted game start + RT state command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that there is an ACK response by the payout control board 100, and ends the process according to this flowchart. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S208 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, there is no ACK response (timeout occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the game start + RT status command was transmitted in step S353, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (NAK response). Then, the process returns to step S353, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the game start + RT state command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the game start processing in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 18 will be described.
In step S451, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving the game start + RT state command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the game start + RT state command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S452, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending the received game start + RT state command back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a flow of game end processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 19, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the game end process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the game end process on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 19, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of the command transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 at the time of the game end processing.

First, the game end processing in the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 19 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 19 shows a subroutine of the game end processing in step S208 of FIG.
In step S361, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last) has been turned from on to off. Then, when it is determined that the third stop switch 42 is not turned off, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the third stop switch 42 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S362.
Proceeding to step S362, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a game end + game state command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S363.
In step S363, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the game end + game state command to be sent back (ACK response) from the payout control board 100.

Then, the transmitted game end + game state command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that there is an ACK response by the payout control board 100, and ends the process according to this flowchart. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S209 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, there is no ACK response (timeout occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the game end + game status command was transmitted in step S362, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (NAK). (There is a response), the process returns to step S362, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the game end + game state command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the game end processing in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 19 will be described.
In step S461, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving the game end + game state command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the game end + game state command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S462, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of sending the received game end + game state command back to the main control board 50 as it is (ACK response). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of payout processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 20, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the payout process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the payout process on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 20, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the payout process.

First, the payout process in the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 20 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 20 shows the subroutine of the payout process in step S209 of FIG.
In step S371, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a payout request command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S372.
In step S372, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the payout repeat command to be transmitted from the payout control board 100 (ACK response of the payout request command).

Then, when the payout repeat command is received (the transmitted payout request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that the payout request command has been ACK-responded by the payout control board 100. End the processing by the flowchart. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process returns to the process of step S211 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, the payout repeat command is not received (timeout occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the payout request command was sent in step S371, or the payout control board 100 sends an error command (NAK response). Then, the process returns to step S371, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the payout request command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the payout process in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 20 will be described.
In step S471, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a payout request command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, when the payout request command is received, the process proceeds to the next step S472, and the payout control board 100 transmits a payout repeat command to the main control board 50 (the received payout request command is sent back to the main control board 50 as it is). Execute (ACK response of payout request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the flow of return processing in the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100.
In FIG. 21, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the return process on the main control board 50, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the return process on the payout control board 100. Further, in FIG. 21, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 during the return process.

First, the return process in the main control board 50 shown on the left side in FIG. 21 will be described. The flowchart shown on the left side in FIG. 20 shows a subroutine of return processing in step S210 of FIG.
In step S341, the main control board 50 executes a process of determining whether or not there is an electronic medal bet. Then, when it is determined that there is no electronic medal bet, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an electronic medal bet, if the operation (ON) of the cancel switch 46 is detected in the next step S342, the process proceeds to the next step S343.
In step S343, the main control board 50 executes a process of transmitting a return request command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S344.
In step S344, the main control board 50 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the return repeat command to be transmitted from the payout control board 100 (ACK response of the return request command).

Then, when the return repeat command is received (the transmitted return request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the main control board 50 determines that the payout control board 100 has received an ACK response to the return request command. End the processing by the flowchart. When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process returns to the process of step S211 shown in FIG.
On the other hand, the return repeat command is not received (timeout occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the return request command was transmitted in step S343, or an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (NAK response). Then, the process returns to step S343, and the main control board 50 again executes a process of transmitting the return request command to the payout control board 100.

Next, the return process in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 21 will be described.
In step S441, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a return request command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, upon receiving the return request command, the process proceeds to the next step S442, and the payout control board 100 performs a process of transmitting a return repeat command to the main control board 50 (sending the received return request command to the main control board 50 as it is). Execute (ACK response of return request command). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the flow of power-on processing in the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.
In FIG. 22, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the power-on process 2 in the payout control board 100, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the power-on process in the management device 200. Further, in FIG. 22, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 during the power-on process.
When the power of the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 is turned on, the program on the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 is started, and the program on the management device 200 is started. At this time, the power-on process is executed on the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10, and the power-on process is executed on the management device 200.

Here, the power-on process 1 in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 14 and the power-on process 2 in the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIG. 22 are both performed on the payout control board 100 at the time of power-on. It is a process to be executed, and some processes are duplicated. Then, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents.
However, in the power-on process 1 in the payout control board 100 shown on the right side in FIG. 14, the processes necessary for explaining the transmission / reception of commands between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100 are extracted and illustrated. , The illustration of other processes is omitted.
On the other hand, in the power-on process 2 of the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIG. 22, the processes necessary for explaining the transmission / reception of commands between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 are extracted and shown in the figure. It is shown, and the illustration of other processes is omitted.

First, the power-on process 2 in the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIG. 22 will be described.
In step S401, the payout control board 100 executes the initialization process. Then, when the initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S502. Note that step S401 in FIG. 22 and step S401 in FIG. 14 are processes having the same contents.
Proceeding to step S502, the payout control board 100 executes a process of sequentially transmitting the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU unique ID to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S503.
In step S503, the main control board 50 executes a determination process of whether or not the transmission of the fourth byte of the CPU-specific ID is completed. Then, when it is determined that the transmission of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID is completed, the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transmission of the 4th byte of the CPU-specific ID has not been completed, the process returns to step S502, and the payout control board 100 again transfers the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU-specific ID to the payout control board 100. Executes the process of sequentially transmitting.

Next, the power-on process in the management device 200 shown on the right side in FIG. 22 will be described.
In step S601, the management device 200 executes the initialization process. Then, when the initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S602.
In step S602, the management device 200 executes the command reception process. This process is a process of receiving the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU unique ID transmitted from the payout control board 100. Then, when the CPU-specific ID 1st to 4th bytes are received, the process proceeds to the next step S603, and the management device 200 executes a process of determining whether or not the received command is the CPU-specific ID.

Here, when it is determined in step S603 that the received command is the CPU-specific ID, the process proceeds to the next step S604, and the management device 200 stores the first to fourth bytes of the received CPU-specific ID in a predetermined storage area. Executes the process of storing (saving) in. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S605.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S603 that the received command is not a CPU-specific ID, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Proceeding to step S605, the management device 200 executes a determination process of whether or not the reception of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID is completed.
Then, when it is determined in step S605 that the reception of the 4th byte of the CPU unique ID is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S606, and the management device 200 transmits the 1st to 4th bytes of the CPU unique ID to the hall computer 300. Execute the process. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S605 that the reception of the fourth byte of the CPU unique ID has not been completed, step S606 is skipped and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the flow of lending processing in the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.
In FIG. 23, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of the lending process 2 in the payout control board 100, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of the lending process in the management device 200. Further, in FIG. 23, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 during the lending process.

Here, the lending process 1 in the payout control board 100 shown in FIG. 11 and the lending process 2 in the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIG. 23 both show a subroutine of the lending process in step S119 of FIG. Therefore, some processes are duplicated. Then, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents.
However, in the lending process 1 in the payout control board 100 shown in FIG. 11, the process at the time of the lending process is illustrated in detail.
On the other hand, in the lending process 2 in the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIG. 23, the processes necessary for explaining the transmission / reception of commands between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 are extracted and illustrated. , The illustration of other processes is omitted.

First, the lending process in the management device 200 shown on the right side in FIG. 23 will be described.
When the operation (ON) of the lending switch 202 is detected in step S611, the process proceeds to the next step S612, and the management device 200 invalidates (cannot accept) the process of turning off the lending possible LED and the operation of the lending switch 202. And the process of invalidating (not accepting) the operation of the return switch 203 are executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S613.
The lending possible LED is an LED indicating whether or not the electronic medal can be rented, and indicates that the electronic medal can be rented when it is lit, and the electronic medal cannot be rented when it is turned off. Is shown.

Proceeding to step S613, the management device 200 transmits a lending request command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S614.
In step S614, the management device 200 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the lending repeat command to be transmitted from the payout control board 100 (ACK response of the lending request command).

Then, when the lending repeat command is received (the transmitted lending request command is sent back from the payout control board 100 as it is), the management device 200 determines that the lending request command has been ACK-responded by the payout control board 100, and next The process proceeds to step S615.
Further, when an error command is transmitted from the payout control board 100 (there is a NAK response), the process proceeds to step S617.
Furthermore, if the lending repeat command is not received (time-out occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the lending request command was transmitted in step S613, the process proceeds to step S618, and the management device 200 executes error processing.

When the process proceeds to step S615, the management device 200 transmits a lending instruction command to the payout control board 100. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 616.
In step S616, the management device 200 executes a process of subtracting the number of loaned sheets. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S617.
Proceeding to step S617, the management device 200 performs a process of turning on the lending enable LED, a process of enabling (accepting) the operation of the lending switch 202, and a process of enabling (accepting) the operation of the return switch 203. Run. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Next, the lending process 2 in the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIG. 23 will be described.
In step S511, the payout control board 100 executes a command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a lending request command transmitted from the management device 200. Then, upon receiving the lending request command, the process proceeds to step S118.

Proceeding to step S118, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not the received command is a lending request command. Note that step S118 in FIG. 23 and step S118 in FIG. 8 are processes having the same contents.
Here, when it is determined that the received command is a lending request command, the process proceeds to step S513, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of storing (storing) the received lending request command in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 103. do. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S514.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not a lending request command, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Proceeding to step S514, the payout control board 100 credits by adding the number of loans (the number indicated by the subsequent command of the loan request command) to the number of credits, whether or not the loan request can be accepted. Executes the process of determining whether or not the upper limit of the number is exceeded.
Here, when it is determined in step S514 that the loan request can be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the number of loans is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of credits even if the number of loans is added, the process proceeds to step S161. The payout control board 100 executes a process of transmitting a lending repeat command to the management device 200 (sending the received lending request command back to the management device 200 as it is) (ACK response of the lending request command). Then, the process proceeds to step S164.

On the other hand, in step S514, when it is determined that the loan request cannot be accepted, that is, when it is determined that adding the number of loans to the number of credits exceeds the upper limit of the number of credits, the process proceeds to step S515 and the payout control is performed. The board 100 transmits an error command to the management device 200 (NAK response). Then, the process proceeds to step S169, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of setting an error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Proceeding to step S164, the payout control board 100 executes a process of determining whether or not a lending instruction command has been received.
Here, when it is determined in step S164 that the lending instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step S167, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of adding the number of lending to the number of credits. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S164 that the lending instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S169, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of setting an error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
It should be noted that steps S161, S164, S167 and S169 in FIG. 23 and steps S161, S164, S167 and S169 in FIG. 11 have the same processing.

24 and 25 are flowcharts showing the flow of counting processing in the payout control board 100 and the management device 200. FIG. 25 is a flowchart following FIG. 24.
In FIGS. 24 and 25, the flowchart on the left side shows the flow of counting processing in the payout control board 100, and the flowchart on the right side shows the flow of counting processing in the management device 200. Further, in FIGS. 24 and 25, the arrows between the left and right flowcharts indicate the transmission direction of commands transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 during the counting process.

Here, the counting process 1 in the payout control board 100 shown in FIG. 12 and the counting process 2 in the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIGS. 24 and 25 are both subroutines of the counting process in step S117 of FIG. Is shown, and some processes are duplicated. Then, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents.
However, in the counting process 1 in the payout control board 100 shown in FIG. 12, the processing at the time of the counting process is shown in detail.
On the other hand, in the counting process 2 in the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIGS. 24 and 25, the processes necessary for explaining the transmission / reception of commands between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 are extracted. It is shown in the figure, and the illustration of other processes is omitted.

First, the counting process in the payout control board 100 shown on the left side in FIGS. 24 and 25 will be described.
In step S181, the payout control board 100 transmits a lower count request command to the management device 200. Then, the process proceeds to step S533.
In step S533, the payout control board 100 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the lower count repeat command to be transmitted from the management device 200 (ACK response of the lower count request command).

Then, when the lower count repeat command is received (the transmitted lower count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is), the payout control board 100 determines that the management device 200 has ACKed the lower count request command. The process proceeds to step S185.
Further, when an error command is transmitted from the management device 200 (there is a NAK response), the process according to this flowchart ends.
Furthermore, if the lower count repeat command is not received (timeout occurs) even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the lower count request command was transmitted in step S181, the process proceeds to step S194, and the payout control board 100 sets an error flag. Execute the process to set. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

When the process proceeds to step S185, the payout control board 100 transmits a higher count request command to the management device 200. Then, the process proceeds to step S535 of FIG.
In step S535, the payout control board 100 executes the response standby process. This process is a process of waiting for the upper count repeat command to be transmitted from the management device 200 (ACK response of the upper count request command).

Then, when the higher count repeat command is received (the transmitted higher count request command is sent back from the management device 200 as it is), the payout control board 100 determines that the management device 200 has ACKed the upper count request command. The process proceeds to step S189.
On the other hand, the error command is transmitted from the management device 200 (there is a NAK response), or the upper count repeat command is issued even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the upper count request command was transmitted in step S185 of FIG. If no command is received (timeout occurs), the process proceeds to step S194, and the payout control board 100 executes a process of setting an error flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
The error processing in step S538 in FIG. 24 and the error processing in step S538 in FIG. 25 are the same processing.

When the process proceeds to step S189, the payout control board 100 transmits a counting instruction command to the management device 200, and proceeds to step S191.
In step S191, a process of clearing the number of credits (making it "0") is executed. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
It should be noted that steps S181, S185, S189, S191 and S194 in FIGS. 24 and 25 and steps S181, S185, S189, S191 and S194 in FIG. 12 have the same processing.

Next, the counting process in the management device 200 shown on the right side in FIGS. 24 and 25 will be described.
In step S631, the management device 200 executes the command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a lower count request command transmitted from the payout control board 100. Then, upon receiving the lower count request command, the process proceeds to the next step S632.

Proceeding to step S632, the management device 200 executes a determination process of whether or not the received command is a lower count request command.
Here, when it is determined in step S632 that the received command is a lower count request command, the process proceeds to the next step S633, and the management device 200 stores (saves) the received lower count request command in a predetermined storage area. ) Execute the process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S634.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S632 that the received command is not a lower count request command, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Proceeding to step S634, the management device 200 executes a determination process of whether or not the counting (refund) request can be accepted.
Here, when it is determined in step S634 that the counting (refund) request can be accepted, the process proceeds to step S636, and the management device 200 invalidates (accepts) the process of turning off the lending possible LED and the operation of the lending switch 202. The process of disabling) and the process of disabling (not accepting) the operation of the return switch 203 are executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S637.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S634 that the counting (refund) request cannot be accepted, the process proceeds to step S635, and the management device 200 transmits an error command to the payout control board 100 (NAK response). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

When the process proceeds to step S637, the management device 200 executes a process of transmitting the lower count repeat command to the payout control board 100 (sending the received lower count request command back to the payout control board 100 as it is) (ACK of the lower count request command). response). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S638.
In step S638, the management device 200 executes the command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a higher count request command transmitted from the payout control board 100. Then, upon receiving the higher count request command, the process proceeds to step S639 of FIG.

Proceeding to step S639, the management device 200 executes a determination process of whether or not the received command is a higher count request command.
Here, if it is determined in step S639 that the received command is a higher count request command, the process proceeds to step S641, and the management device 200 stores (saves) the received higher count request command in a predetermined storage area. Execute the process. Then, the process proceeds to step S642.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S639 that the received command is not a higher count request command, the process proceeds to step S640, and the management device 200 transmits an error command to the payout control board 100 (NAK response). Then, the process proceeds to step S647, and the management device 200 executes error processing.

Proceeding to step S642, the management device 200 executes a process of transmitting the higher count repeat command to the payout control board 100 (sending the received higher count request command back to the payout control board 100 as it is) (ACK response). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S643.
In step S643, the management device 200 executes the command reception process. This process is a process of receiving a counting instruction command transmitted from the payout control board 100. Then, upon receiving the counting instruction command, the process proceeds to the next step S644.

Proceeding to step S644, the management device 200 executes a determination process of whether or not the received command is a counting instruction command.
Here, when it is determined that the received command is a counting instruction command, the process proceeds to the next step S645, and the management device 200 determines the number of refunds specified from the lower counting request command and the upper counting request command. Execute the process to reflect on the number of electronic medals managed by the side. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S646.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not a counting instruction command, the process proceeds to step S647, and the management device 200 executes error processing.

Proceeding to step S646, the management device 200 performs a process of turning on the lending enable LED, a process of enabling (accepting) the operation of the lending switch 202, and a process of enabling (accepting) the operation of the return switch 203. Run. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing waveforms of data signals and strobe signals for serial communication between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200.
In FIGS. 23 to 25, a lending request command, a lower count request command, a higher count request command, and the like are shown as commands transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200, and these commands are described above. As described above, it is composed of a preceding command (upper 8 bits) and a succeeding command (lower 8 bits).

In FIG. 26, the waveforms of the data signal and the strobe signal are shown with the preceding command and the succeeding command constituting these commands as one unit.
As shown in FIG. 26, a data signal is transmitted bit by bit from the D0 bit (DB0) to the D7 bit (DB7) between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200, and the timing at which the strobe signal is turned on is transmitted. I am trying to read one bit at a time.

FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing on / off of each signal at the time of lending an electronic medal.
FIG. 23 shows commands transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 when the electronic medals are rented, while FIG. 27 shows the signals of the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 when the electronic medals are rented. Indicates the on / off timing.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the power of the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 is turned on, the operation of the return switch 203 of the management device 200 can be accepted thereafter.
After that, the data signals of the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 of the slot machine 10 become "0", and the strobe signals of the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 of the slot machine 10 are turned off.
After that, the operation of the rental switch 202 of the management device 200 becomes acceptable, and the operating state changes from the standby state to the normal state. The normal state means a state in which the management device 200 can lend an electronic medal and the slot machine 10 can advance the game.

Then, when the operation (ON) of the rental switch 202 of the management device 200 is detected, the operation of the rental switch 202 and the return switch 203 of the management device 200 becomes unacceptable, and then the slot machine 10 from the management device 200. The preceding command and the succeeding command of the lending request command are sequentially transmitted to the payout control board 100.
After that, the preceding command and the succeeding command of the lending / repeating command are sequentially transmitted from the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 to the management device 200.
After that, the preceding command and the succeeding command of the lending instruction command are sequentially transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10.
Then, when the transmission of the lending instruction command is completed, the operations of the lending switch 202 and the return switch 203 of the management device 200 can be accepted.

FIG. 28 is a timing chart showing on / off of each signal at the time of electronic medal counting (refund).
24 and 25 show commands transmitted and received between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 at the time of counting electronic medals, but FIG. 28 shows the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 at the time of counting electronic medals. The on / off timing of each signal is shown.

As shown in FIG. 28, when the power of the slot machine 10 and the management device 200 is turned on, the operation of the return switch 203 of the management device 200 can be accepted thereafter.
After that, the data signals of the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 of the slot machine 10 become "0", and the strobe signals of the payout control board 100 and the management device 200 of the slot machine 10 are turned off.
After that, the operation of the rental switch 202 of the management device 200 becomes acceptable, and the operating state changes from the standby state to the normal state. Up to this point, it is the same as in FIG. 27.

When the operation (ON) of the counting switch 47 of the slot machine 10 is detected, the operation of the lending switch 202 and the return switch 203 of the management device 200 becomes unacceptable, and then the payout control board of the slot machine 10 becomes unacceptable. The preceding command and the succeeding command of the lower count request command are sequentially transmitted from 100 to the management device 200.
After that, the preceding command and the succeeding command of the lower count repeat command are sequentially transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10.

After that, the preceding command and the succeeding command of the upper count request command are sequentially transmitted from the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 to the management device 200.
After that, the preceding command and the succeeding command of the upper count repeat command are sequentially transmitted from the management device 200 to the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10.
After that, the preceding command and the succeeding command of the counting instruction command are sequentially transmitted from the payout control board 100 of the slot machine 10 to the management device 200.
Then, when the transmission of the counting instruction command is completed, the operation of the lending switch 202 and the return switch 203 of the management device 200 can be accepted.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the present embodiment, the various commands shown in FIGS. 4 to 7 are composed of 16-bit data consisting of a preceding command (upper 8 bits) and a succeeding command (lower 8 bits). Not limited to this, for example, it may be 8 bits or 32 bits.

(2) In the present embodiment, commands are transmitted and received by serial communication between the main control board 50 and the payout control board 100, and between the payout control board 100 and the management device 200, but the present invention is limited to this. However, parallel communication may be used, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.
(3) In the present embodiment, the main control board 50 has shown an example in which the one-sheet insertion request command is transmitted to the payout control board 100 three times when the 3-bet switch 40b is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. The three-sheet insertion request command may be transmitted once.

(4) In the present embodiment, the main control board 50 transmits a payout request command to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off, but the payout request command is not limited to this, and all reels are not limited to this. 31 At the time of stoppage, a payout request command may be sent.
(5) In the present embodiment, the number of payouts of the main control board 50 is "0" with respect to the payout control board 100 when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off even when the winning combination is not won. The payout request command is sent, but the payout request command is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to send the payout request command when the winning combination is not won.

(6) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example as one of the gaming machines, but the slot machine 10 is a "rotating drum type gaming machine" installed in the No. 4 branch office to which the Fuei Law is applied. It is not limited to (so-called "pachislot gaming machine"), and can be applied to, for example, a casino machine. Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine.
(7) All the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Second Embodiment>
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is a medalless gaming machine that does not use a medal as a tangible object, as in the first embodiment.
Here, "medalless" in the name of "medalless gaming machine" means that a medal as a tangible object is not used.
Therefore, even in the case of a "medalless gaming machine", the use of a gaming medium (game value) used for gaming is the same as that of a conventional gaming machine, and the gaming medium used for gaming in a medalless gaming machine is also used. Sometimes referred to simply as a "medal."
Therefore, the term "medal" is not limited to a medal as a tangible object, but may also refer to a medal as an intangible object (for example, electronic data).
Further, the medal as an intangible object may be referred to as a game medium, a game value, a score (or simply "point"), an electronic medal, electronic data, electronic information, an electronic game medium, an electronic game value, or the like. In the following description of the second embodiment, the "medal" as an intangible object used in the gaming machine 10 (medalless gaming machine) is referred to as a "game medium".

The “rental” means that the gaming medium necessary for the game is transmitted from the rental unit 200 to the gaming machine 10.
"Credit" means storing (storing, crediting) a gaming medium in the gaming machine 10. The "credited game medium" corresponds to the data stored in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100.
"Bet" means betting a game medium in order to play a game. When the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a or 3 bet switch 40b) is operated, a predetermined number of game media are bet from the game media corresponding to the data stored in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100.
A "bet" is also referred to as a "throw". Note that "insertion" does not only mean inserting an actual medal into the game machine from the medal insertion slot, but also includes betting a game medium (electronic medal) by operating the bet switch 40.

"Settlement" means returning the bet game medium to the RWM 103 (credit) of the game medium number control board 100, and is performed by operating the settlement switch 46. "Settlement" may be referred to as "return" or "cancellation". Therefore, the "payment switch 46" may be referred to as a "return switch 46" or a "cancel switch 46".
When the bet switch 40 is operated while the game medium is stored (credited) as data in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100, a predetermined number of game media are bet (added as the number of bets). , The data (number of credits) of the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 is subtracted by the number bet. On the other hand, when the settlement switch 46 is operated while the game medium is bet, the number of bets up to that point (the number of game media) becomes "0" and the number of bets up to that point is controlled by the number of game media. It is added to the RWM 103 of the board 100 (returned to credit).

"Granting" means adding the number of gaming media corresponding to the winning combination dividend to the number of credits stored in the gaming machine 10 based on the winning combination.
"Grant" is also referred to as "payout". Note that "payout" does not only mean ejecting the actual medal from the medal return port, but also refers to the number of game media stored in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 at the time of winning a small winning combination. The process of adding the number of game media corresponding to the winning of a small winning combination is also included in the "payout (processing)".
In the second embodiment, the "payout means 67" in the first embodiment is referred to as "granting number control means 67".
"Counting" means returning the (credited) gaming medium stored in the gaming machine 10 (RWM103 of the gaming medium number control board 100) to the rental unit 200, and is performed by operating the counting switch 47. Will be. When the counting switch 47 is operated, a predetermined number of gaming media stored in the gaming machine 10 are subtracted, and the subtracted gaming media are added to the lending unit 300 side.

The "return" of the game medium from the rental unit 200 means that the number of game media stored in the rental unit 200 is stored in the game medium number storage medium (magnetic card, IC card, IC coin, etc.) and externally (returned). It means to discharge to the player). A reader / writer is used when the number of game media stored in the lending unit 200 is stored in the game medium number storage medium (the lending unit 200 has a built-in reader / writer).
As described above, it has been explained that "payment" may be referred to as "return", but when "return" is used in the second embodiment, the number of game media stored in the lending unit 200 is used as the game medium. Number of media It means to store in a storage medium and discharge it to the outside (player).

Each digit of the LED such as the set value display means 73 and the role ratio monitor 113 used in the second embodiment is composed of 7 segments. The "7-segment" has a DP (decimal point) segment in addition to the seven-segment elements.

"Notification" corresponds to transmitting (outputting) a telegram from the gaming machine 10 to the lending unit 200 or from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10, and is synonymous with "transmission" and "output". be.
In the following, for example, the gaming machine information notification may be referred to as "transmitting", or the gaming machine information may be referred to as "notifying", for example.

At least a part of the storage area of the RWM or ROM may be referred to as a "storage area" or a "storage means", both of which are synonymous.
Further, the control board (main, sub, etc.) may be referred to as "control means". Further, the CPU may be referred to as a "control means".

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a block diagram of the gaming machine 10 (slot machine) in the second embodiment. In the first embodiment, it is referred to as "slot machine 10", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "game machine 10".
Further, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as "main control board 50", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "main control board 50". Similarly, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as "sub-control board 80", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "sub-control board 80". However, the main control board may be referred to as a main control board, and the sub control board may be referred to as a sub control board (both have the same meaning).
Further, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as "payout control board 100", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "game medium number control board 100". However, the game medium number control board may be referred to as a payout control board, and both have the same meaning.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as "credit number display LED76", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "game medium number display unit 121". Both have the same function and are composed of, for example, a 5-digit LED.
Further, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as "acquired number display LED 78", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "granted number display unit 78". Both have the same function and are composed of, for example, two-digit LEDs.

When the main control board 50 is regarded as one of the main control boards, the game medium number control board 100 is the other one of the main control boards. Therefore, the RWM 53, ROM 54, and CPU 55 of the main control board 50 may be referred to as the first main control RWM 53, the first main control ROM 54, and the first main control CPU 55, respectively.
Further, the RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105 of the game medium number control board 100 may be referred to as a second main control RWM 103, a second main control ROM 14, and a second main control CPU 105, respectively.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, it is referred to as "management device (CR unit) 200", but in the second embodiment, it is referred to as "rental unit 200". Both have the same function. Further, the rental unit 200 may be referred to as a "dedicated unit 200".
One rental unit 200 is provided for one gaming machine 10. In other words, one lending unit 200 is a device dedicated to one gaming machine 10.
On the other hand, the hall computer 300 electrically connected to the rental unit 200 may be provided for each rental unit 200, or even if one hall computer 300 is provided for each of the plurality of rental units 200. good.
Similarly, the management computer 400 electrically connected to the lending unit 200 may be provided for each lending unit 200 (the lending unit 200 and the management computer 400 may have a one-to-one connection). Alternatively, one management computer 400 may be provided for each of the plurality of rental units 200.

The hall computer 300 is a computer for collecting data for hall sales. For example, the number of games played on the day, the number of in (input), the number of out (grant), MY (difference, difference number), the number of operation of the accessory, the number of lending, etc. are totaled.
The management computer 400 is a computer for transmitting information to the outside (for example, an external center outside the hall). The management computer 400 is also installed in the hall in the same manner as the hall computer 300.
In FIG. 29, the hall computer 300 and the management computer 400 are separately provided, but they may be combined into one computer.

In the main control board 50, a bet number storage means 53a and a grant number storage means 53b are provided as a part of the storage area of the RWM 53.
The bet number storage means 53a stores the number of bets at the present time.
On the other hand, the bet number display unit 77 is connected to the main control board 50. The bet number display unit 77 is a device that displays the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a, and is composed of, for example, a two-digit LED.
Further, the grant number storage means 53b stores the number of grants of the game media when a predetermined number of game media are granted based on the winning of the small winning combination.
On the other hand, the assigned number display unit 78 is connected to the main control board 50. The grant number display unit 78 is a device for displaying the grant number stored in the grant number storage means 53b, and is composed of, for example, a two-digit LED.

Furthermore, although not shown in the first embodiment (FIG. 1), the set value display means 73 is mounted on the main control board 50. The set value display means 73 is composed of, for example, a one-digit LED, and can display the current set value in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. On the other hand, the role ratio monitor 113, which will be described later, is mounted not on the main control board 50 but on the game medium number control board 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the role ratio monitor 113 may be mounted on the main control board 50.

The game medium number control board 100 includes a second main control board (means), a payout control board (means), a medal number control board (means), a medal number display control board (means), or a game medium number display control board (means). ) Etc. Like the main control board 50, the game medium number control board 100 is required to have security for fraud prevention. Therefore, the board case is opened by being housed in the board case and sealed by caulking (sealing member). (Access to the game medium number control board 100) is configured to be difficult.

The game medium number control board 100 includes an independent RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105, similarly to the main control board 50. These RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105 may be built in one chip. The game medium number control board 100 controls the display of the game medium number display unit 121, transmits information to the rental unit 200 via the connection terminal board 130, and information from the rental unit 200 via the connection terminal board 130. Is configured to be receivable. Further, it is configured so that information can be transmitted to the main control board 50 and information can be received from the main control board 50. In FIG. 29, the direction of the arrow between the boards indicates the information transmission / reception direction. Therefore, the main control board 50 and the game medium number control board 100 are configured to enable bidirectional communication.

In FIG. 29, the main control board 50 and the game medium number control board 100 are configured as separate bodies, but it is also possible to configure the main control board from one main control board. However, also in this case, the first main control RWM53, the first main control ROM 54, the first main control CPU 55, the second main control RWM103, the second main control ROM 104, and the second main control CPU 105 are provided on one board. become.

The RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 includes a game medium number storage means 103a (also referred to as a “game medium number storage area (_NB_MEDAL)”) for storing the number of game media (credits). When the game medium is given by winning a small winning combination, the number of game media (data) of the game medium number storage means 103a is updated (added).
Further, when the game medium is bet to start the game, the game medium (data) of the game medium number storage means 103a is updated (subtracted) by the number of game media corresponding to the number of bets.

Further, the game medium number display board 120 is electrically connected to the game medium number control board 100. A game medium number display unit 121 is mounted on the game medium number display board 120. The game medium number display unit 121 displays the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, and is composed of, for example, a 5-digit LED.
For example, it is assumed that "100" is stored as the number of game media in the game medium number storage means 103a. In this case, "100" is displayed on the game medium number display unit 121.

When the 3-bet switch 40b is operated to start the game, the bet operation signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game medium number control board 100. The game medium number control board 100 determines whether or not the bet is possible based on the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, and when it is determined that the bet is possible, the main control A bet signal is transmitted to the board 50. Upon receiving the bet signal, the main control board 50 executes the bet process and stores the bet number in the bet number storage means 53a. When the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is updated from "0" to "3", the display (last digit) of the bet number display unit 77 is also updated from "0" to "3".

Further, when the bet signal is transmitted to the main control board 50 as described above, the game medium number control board 100 updates the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. In this example, the number of game media is updated from "100" to "97". When the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated from "100" to "97", the display of the game medium number display unit 121 is also updated from "100" to "97".

A checkout switch 46 is connected to the main control board 50. The settlement switch 46 is a switch that is operated when the bet game medium is returned (in other words, the number of bets is set to "0").
In a situation where the bet number is stored in the bet number storage means 53a and the bet number is displayed on the bet number display unit 77, the settlement switch 46 is operated before the start switch 41 is operated (before the game is started). If so, the number of bets will be returned (returned).
For example, as in the above example, when the settlement switch 46 is operated in a situation where "3" is stored in the bet number storage means 53a and "97" is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. The number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is updated from "3" to "0". As a result, the display of the bet number display unit 77 is updated from "3" to "0".

Further, based on the operation of the settlement switch 46, a settlement signal (a signal corresponding to returning the bet number "3") is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game medium number control board 100. Upon receiving this settlement signal, the game medium number control board 100 updates the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a from "97" to "100". As a result, the display of the game medium number display unit 121 is updated from "97" to "100".

In this way, the settlement switch 46 is used to return the bet game medium (to set the number of bets to "0"). Therefore, even if the settlement switch 46 is operated, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is not subtracted.
Further, even if the settlement switch 46 is operated in a situation where the bet number is not stored in the bet number storage means 53a, the bet number stored in the bet number storage means 53a remains "0" and the game is played. The number of game media stored in the medium number storage means 103a remains the same.
In order to start such a settlement process, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 46 is operated, and if the settlement switch 46 is not operated, the settlement process is not started and the settlement switch 46 is operated. In this case, it is determined whether or not the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is “0”. Further, if the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is "0", the settlement process is not started, and if the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is not "0", the settlement process is not started. Is configured to start.
As a result, when comparing the situation where the settlement switch 46 is operated and the situation where the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is "0", the situation where the settlement switch 46 is operated Is relatively small, so it is possible to reduce the processing load by first determining whether or not the settlement switch 46 is being operated.

When the start switch 41 is operated while the number of bets is "3", the number of bets in the game is fixed and the game is started (the rotation of the reel 31 starts). In this case, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a may be cleared when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), or may be cleared when all the reels 31 are stopped. When the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is cleared, the display of the bet number display unit 77 is also updated to "0".

In the game, for example, when a small winning combination with a grant number of "8" wins, the main control board 50 stores "8" in the grant number storage means 53b. When the value stored in the grant number storage means 53b is updated to "8", the display (last digit) of the grant number display unit 78 is also updated from "0" to "8".
Further, when the game medium is added, the addition (payout) signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game medium number control board 100. When the game medium number control board 100 receives the given signal, the game medium number control board 100 adds the number of game media corresponding to the given signal to the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. In this example, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated from "97" to "105". When the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated from "97" to "105", the display of the game medium number display unit 121 is also updated from "97" to "105".

Further, after the grant number is stored in the grant number storage means 53b, the grant number storage means is used when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated (at the start of the game), when all the reels 31 of the next game are stopped, and the like. Clear the number of grants stored in 53b. When the number of grants stored in the number of grants storage means 53b is cleared, the display of the number of grants display unit 78 is also updated to "0".

It should be noted that the game medium number display unit 121 is configured to display error information corresponding to the error that has occurred.
In this case, the error information may be displayed instead of the number of game media displayed on the game medium number display unit 121, but the number of game media and the error information may be displayed alternately. For example, the number of game media may be displayed in "3" seconds → the error information may be displayed in "3" seconds → the number of game media may be displayed in "3" seconds → ... When the game medium number display unit 121 is composed of a 5-digit LED and the error information to be displayed is, for example, "E1", "000E1", "--E1", "E1000", " It is possible to display "E1---" or the like.

Here, when the error information corresponding to the error that has occurred is not displayed on the game medium number display unit 121, the error information corresponding to the error that has occurred may be displayed on the grant number display unit 78. In this case, the error information may be displayed on the granting number display unit 78 after displaying the number of granted gaming media. For example, as described above, when the number of grants is "8", "00"-> "01"-> "02"-> ... "07"-> "08" is displayed (counted) on the number of grants display unit 78. After (up), an aspect of displaying "E1" (an example of an error code) can be mentioned.

The counting switch 47 is electrically connected to the game medium number control board 100. Although not shown, the counting switch 47 is provided on the control panel of the gaming machine 10 or the like, like the bet switch 40 or the like, for example.
When the counting switch 47 is operated, the game medium (information) stored in the game medium number storage means 103a can be transmitted to the rental unit 200 via the connection terminal board 130. For example, when the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where the number of gaming media "200" is stored in the gaming medium number storage means 103a, the information "200" is transmitted to the connection terminal board 130 as the counting value. After that, the information "200" can be transmitted to the lending unit 200 as a counting value. Then, after the counting switch 47 is operated and the counting value is transmitted, "0" is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a.

Further, under the situation where "200" is displayed on the game medium number display unit 121 before the counting switch 47 is operated, the counting switch 47 is operated and the lending unit 200 is informed that the counting value is "200". Is transmitted, the display of the game medium number display unit 121 is updated to "0".

The game medium number control board 100 is provided with a total game medium number clear switch 112. When the total number of game media number clear switch 112 is operated, the (total) number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100 can be cleared (“0” is stored). .. When the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is cleared, the number of game media displayed on the game medium number display unit 121 is also updated to "0".
The information cleared by the operation of the total number of game media number clear switch 112 is only the total number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, and other information is not cleared.

For example, when the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is "3" and the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "1000", the total number of game media number clear switch. When 112 is operated, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a remains "3", but the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a becomes "0". In other words, the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is not cleared by operating the total number of game media number clear switch 112.
Similarly, "50" is stored as the number of rentable game media in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200, and the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is ". When the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated at the time of "1000", the number of rentable game media stored in the rentable game media number storage means 206 remains "50", but the game media The number of game media stored in the number storage means 103a is "0". In other words, the number of rentable game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 is not cleared by operating the total number of game media number clear switch 112.

The operation method of the total number of game media clear switch 112 may be pressed once, long-pressed for a predetermined time, or the power may be turned on while the switch is pressed. The total number of gaming media clear switch 112 is arranged at a position that the player cannot operate, for example, on the number of gaming media control board 100, inside the housing of the gaming machine 10, the back of the front door of the gaming machine 10, and the like. ing.
When the total number of game media is cleared by operating the total number of game media clear switch 112, the total number of game media clear status is turned on, and the total number of game media clear status is kept on until one game is completed. , Turn off the total number of game media clear status after the end of the one game.
Information on the total number of game media clear status may be transmitted to the rental unit 200. When the lending unit 200 receives the information that the total number of gaming media clear status is ON, the total number of gaming media stored in the lending unit 200 is cleared. Further, when the rental game medium is given from the rental unit 200 while the total number of game media clear status is ON in the game machine 10, the total number of game media clear status remains ON and a new game medium number storage means is used. The number of rental gaming media is added to 103a.

Further, the total number of game media clear switch 112 is invalid even if it is operated during the game, and is effective when the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated during the game standby (before the start of the game or after the end of the game). Become. In this case, the game medium number control board 100 determines whether or not the game is in progress based on the game start information and the game end information transmitted from the main control board 50, and the total game medium when the game is in progress. The operation of the number clear switch 112 is invalidated.

However, the total number of game media clear switch 112 may be enabled by an operation during the game. In this case, the total number of game media clear status is turned from on to off based on the end of the next game of the game in which the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated. In other words, at the end of the game in which the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated, the total number of game media clear status is kept on, and when the next game is finished, the total number of game media clear status is turned off. As a result, even at the timing when the total number of game media clear status is turned on for a short time (the timing when the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated immediately before the end of the game), the total number of game media clear status is set to the next game. Since it can be kept on, it is possible to suppress fraud such as clearing the total number of game media.

The total number of game media clear status may be turned off after the game in which the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated is completed. In this case, the program for updating the total number of game media clear status may be standardized. Capacity can be reduced.

The combination ratio monitor 113 displays a predetermined ratio, and is composed of, for example, a 4-digit LED (7 segments (with DP segment)). In the second embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the game medium number control board 100 is set to "1" ms. The interrupt period of the main control board 50 is "2.235" ms.
Then, four interrupts become one cycle, and the four-digit LED of the role ratio monitor 113 is dynamically lit. Specifically, for example, an LED display counter is provided, and for each interrupt,
"00000001 (B)"
"00000010 (B)"
"0000100 (B)"
"00001000 (B)"
Is configured to circulate.

When the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)", the LED in the first place of the role ratio monitor 113 can be turned on (the other LEDs are turned off), and when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", the LED is turned on. The tens LED of the role ratio monitor 113 can be turned on (other LEDs are off), and when the LED display counter is "00000100 (B)", the hundreds place LED of the role ratio monitor 113 can be turned on (others). LED is turned off), and when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)", the LED of the thousandth place of the role ratio monitor 113 can be turned on (the other LEDs are turned off).

Of the four LEDs constituting the role ratio monitor 113, the two LEDs on the left side (thousands and hundreds) are referred to as "identification segments" and display the information type. Further, the two LEDs on the right side (tens and ones place) are referred to as "ratio segment" and display the calculated ratio.
Then, in the second embodiment, the information of the following six items (1) to (6) is repeatedly displayed on the combination ratio monitor 113 as a ratio at predetermined time intervals.
(1) Instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) Or advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.)
(2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
(3) Character ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
(4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
(5) Character ratio (cumulative) (7A.)
(6) Status ratio of accessories, etc. (cumulative) (5H.)

When displaying either ratio by the identification segment or the ratio segment, the DP segment at the first place of the identification segment is turned on to clarify the boundary between the identification segment and the ratio segment. At this time, each DP segment of the tens digit of the identification segment, the tens digit of the ratio segment, and the ones digit is not lit.
In the above notation, for example, "P." means that "P" is displayed by the 7-segment of the first digit of the identification segment and the DP segment of the 7-segment is turned on.

For example, in the case of displaying the indicated accessory ratio (cumulative), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7P." Indicating the indicated included accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the identification segment. "50" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative" refers to the sum of the numerical values that have been continuously counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, the numbers are counted until at least "175,000" games are played.
Even after the number of games is "175000" or more, the addition is continued until a value (upper limit value) that can be stored in the storage area of the predetermined address of the RWM 103 is reached.
Further, "6000 games" is the number of games in which one set is "400" and the total number of 15 sets is the total number of games.

The ratio of the above six items will be described below.
(1) Ratio of instructed accessories (cumulative)
The "instructed bonus ratio (cumulative)" is the cumulative number of grants (the "grant number" refers to the number of game media granted; the same shall apply hereinafter) as the denominator of the bonus (RB, CB, SB). It is a ratio with the sum of the cumulative number of bonuses given at the time of operation and the cumulative number of instructions given by the operation of the instruction function as the numerator.
In addition, the above-mentioned "total" is first, when the storage area for storing the number of grants at the time of operation of the accessory and the storage area for storing the number of designated grants are separately provided, both storage areas. Corresponds to the total value of the values stored in. Secondly, one storage area (instruction-included accessory) for storing both the number of grants when the accessory is activated and the number of grants when the instruction function is activated (hereinafter referred to as "number of instruction-included accessories"). When a counter) is provided, it corresponds to the value of the one storage area.

For example, if the number of games played is "175,000" or more, the cumulative number of grants is "200,000", and the cumulative number of bonuses with instructions is "100,000", the ratio of bonuses with instructions is calculated as "50". Will be done. The "cumulative" does not necessarily mean the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of grants reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "16772115"), or if the total number of games is added to the number of games played this time and the upper limit is exceeded. In the subsequent games, the total number of grants, the total number of grants when the bonus is activated, and the total number of instructions granted are not updated.

Further, the "operation of the instruction function" is to obtain an advantageous game result in the game in which the lottery result of the winning combination (winning number) in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is obtained. This corresponds to a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified (instructed). For example, it corresponds to a game in which the correct push order is notified when the so-called push order bell is won.
In the gaming machine 10 not equipped with the accessory, the "instruction-included accessory ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the cumulative number of instructions given by the operation of the instruction function by the total number of grants.

Regarding the "number of grants in the game in which the instruction function is activated", for example, the number of grants "15" is small based on the fact that the stop switch 42 is operated in the displayed pressing order in the game in which the instruction function is activated. When the winning combination is won, "15" is added to the number of designated winning combination and the total number of grants.
On the other hand, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the displayed pressing order. Add "3" to the number of grants and the total number of grants.
In addition, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, when the winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won) because the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the displayed pressing order, an instruction-included accessory is given. The number and the total number of grants will be the same as the previous game.

In the game in which the instruction function is activated, the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the displayed pressing order. By executing the process of adding "", the value of both grant numbers (counters) may be set to the same value as the previous game.

(2) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative)
The "advantageous section ratio (cumulative)" is a ratio with the cumulative number of games played as the denominator and the cumulative number of advantageous section games as the numerator. For example, when the cumulative number of games played is "20000" and the cumulative number of advantageous section games is "18000", the advantageous section ratio is calculated as "90".
The "cumulative" does not necessarily mean the cumulative total of all games. For example, when the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "65535"), the cumulative number of games and the number of advantageous section games are not updated in the subsequent games. There is.
Either of the above-mentioned "instructed bonus ratio (cumulative)" or "advantageous section ratio (cumulative)" is displayed according to the specifications of the gaming machine 10. Specifically, in a gaming machine equipped with an instruction function, the "instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed, and the "advantageous section ratio (cumulative)" does not need to be displayed. On the other hand, in a gaming machine not equipped with an instruction function, the "advantageous section ratio (cumulative)" is displayed, and the "instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative)" is not displayed.

(3) Continuous character ratio (6000 games), continuous character ratio (cumulative)
"Continuous bonus ratio (6000 games)" is a ratio with the number of grants in the number of games "6000" as the denominator and the number of grants when the continuous bonus (RB) is activated in the number of games "6000" as the numerator. be.
Further, the "continuous bonus ratio (cumulative)" is a ratio in which the number of grants in the cumulative number of games is the denominator and the number of grants in the cumulative number of games is the numerator. For example, when the cumulative number of games played is a predetermined number of times (for example, 17,500 times) or more, the total number of games granted is "20,000", and the total number of games granted when the continuous bonus is activated is "10000". , The continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) is calculated as "50".
The "cumulative" does not necessarily mean the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of grants reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "65535"), or if the total number of grants is added to the number of grants for this game and the upper limit is exceeded. In the subsequent games, the cumulative number of grants and the cumulative number of grants of the game medium when the continuous bonus is operated are not updated.

(4) Character ratio (6000 games), character ratio (cumulative)
The "feature ratio (6000 games)" is the number of grants in the number of games "6000" as the denominator, and the number of grants when the bonus (RB, CB, SB) is activated in the number of games "6000" as the numerator. It is a ratio.
In addition, the "role ratio (cumulative)" is a ratio with the number of grants in the cumulative number of games as the denominator and the number of grants when the bonus (RB, CB, SB) is activated as the numerator in the total number of games. be. For example, if the cumulative number of games played is a predetermined number (for example, 17,500) or more, the cumulative number of grants is "20,000", and the cumulative number of grants when the bonus is activated is "10000", the bonus ratio. (Cumulative) is calculated as "50".
The "cumulative" does not necessarily mean the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of grants reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "65535"), or if the total number of grants is added to the number of grants for this game and the upper limit is exceeded. In the subsequent games, the cumulative number of grants and the cumulative number of grants of the game medium when the accessory is activated are not updated.

(5) Status ratio of accessories (cumulative)
"Characteristic state ratio (cumulative)" is the total number of games played as the denominator, and the number of games in which the bonuses (RB, CB, SB) are operating, or the continuous bonuses (1BB, 2BB) are activated. It is a ratio with the number of games played as a numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of games played is "20000" and the cumulative number of games played during the cumulative bonus operation or continuous bonus operation is "5000", the bonus status ratio (cumulative) is calculated as "25". To.
The cumulative total is not necessarily the cumulative total of all games. For example, when the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "175000"), in the subsequent games, the cumulative number of games and the games during the operation of the accessory and the operation of the continuous accessory are performed. The number of times is configured not to be updated.

Further, in the above 6 items, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as "---" in the gaming machine that does not have the function corresponding to the item.
For example, if "RB (Type 1 special bonus)" is not provided, there is no continuous bonus ratio, so "continuous bonus ratio (6000 games)" and "continuous bonus ratio (cumulative)". When is displayed, the ratio segment is lit up as "---".

Furthermore, as a result of calculating the ratio, if there is a decimal point, the decimal point is rounded down and displayed. For example, when the result of calculating the ratio is "49.99", it is displayed as "49".
Further, when the result of calculating the ratio is "100", it is displayed as "99".
If the ratio is less than "10" as a result of calculation, "0" is displayed in the tens place. Specifically, when the result of calculating the ratio is "9"%, it is displayed as "09".

The identification seg and the ratio seg of the role ratio monitor 113 may be displayed blinking.
First, when the ratio is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the ratio segment is blinked and displayed.
The threshold value (%) of each ratio is as follows.
(1) Instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) or advantageous section ratio (cumulative): 70
(2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games): 60
(3) Character ratio (6000 games): 70
(4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative): 60
(5) Character ratio (cumulative): 70
(6) Status ratio of accessories, etc. (cumulative): 50
Therefore, for example, when the indicated accessory ratio (cumulative) is "69", the ratio segment "69" is lit when the indicated accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed, but when it is "70", it is displayed. Flashes.

Secondly, when the cumulative number of games is less than the standard number of games, the identification segment is blinked and displayed.
The standard number of games for each ratio is as follows.
(1) Instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) or advantageous section ratio (cumulative): 175000
(2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games): 6000
(3) Character ratio (6000 games): 6000
(4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative): 17500
(5) Character ratio (cumulative): 17500
(6) Status ratio of accessories, etc. (cumulative): 175000

Therefore, for example, when the cumulative number of games is "6000", the identification segment (6y.) Is lit and displayed when the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) is displayed. On the other hand, for example, when the cumulative number of games is "5999", the identification segment (6y.) Is displayed blinking when the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) is displayed.
If the cumulative number of games is less than the number of games "400" per set of aggregation units, "00" is displayed in the ratio segment.

Furthermore, when blinking the identification segment or ratio segment, one blinking cycle consisting of a lighting time of "0.3" seconds and an extinguishing time of "0.3" seconds is set to "0.6" seconds, and the tolerance is set. It is preferably ± 10%.
In the second embodiment, switching between lighting and extinguishing in the blinking display is managed (controlled) as follows.
First, the RWM 103 is provided with a "blinking switching time (_TM_CHG_FLS)" (2 bytes) as a timer area for managing the blinking switching time.

The blinking switching time is initialized when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (“0” is stored), and “1” is added for each interrupt. As described above, one interrupt time is "1" ms. Further, the blinking switching time is configured to circulate from "0" to "299".
Further, the RWM 103 is provided with a "blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS)" (1 byte) as a flag for determining whether the light is on or off.
The blinking switching flag is initialized when the power is turned on (“0” is stored), and then “0” and “1” are switched every “300” ms. "0" indicates lighting, and "1" indicates "off".

In updating the blinking switching time, a process of subtracting "299" from the current timer value is performed. Specifically, it is as follows.
Example 1) If the update process is performed when the initial value is "0", it becomes "0-299 = 298". At this time, the carry flag is set to "1" because a carry occurs.
Example 2) If the update process is performed when the blinking switching time is "298", it becomes "298-299 = 1". At this time, the carry flag is set to "1" because a carry occurs.
Example 3) If the update process is performed when the blinking switching time is "299", it becomes "299-299 = 0". At this time, the carry flag is set to "0" because the carry flag does not occur.

Then, as a result of updating the blinking switching time, when the carry flag is "1", the blinking switching flag is not updated, and when the carry flag is "0", the blinking switching flag is updated. As a result, the blinking switching flag is switched every "300" ms. Specifically, it is as follows.
Example 1) When the blinking switching flag is "0" (lights up), it becomes "1" (lights off) when the update process is performed.
Example 2) When the blinking switching flag is "1" (lights off), it becomes "0" (lights up) when the update process is performed.

Furthermore, the combination monitor 113 displays a test pattern so that it can be confirmed whether or not the segment element of each LED operates normally.
The test pattern is "8.8." Until the number of times the above carry flag becomes "0" becomes "16" after the power is turned on, that is, until "300 ms x 16 times = 4800 ms" elapses. 8.8. ”(All segment elements of all LEDs (including segment DP)) is displayed.
Since each of the four-digit LEDs of the role ratio monitor 113 is dynamically lit every interrupt (1 ms), strictly speaking, not all four LEDs are lit at the same time.

After displaying the test pattern for "4800" ms, the display shifts to the above-mentioned (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) or indicated accessory ratio (cumulative) to (6) accessory state ratio (cumulative). , (1) to (6) are displayed for "4800" ms, respectively, and this is repeated.
Therefore,
Power on ↓
(0) Test pattern display (4800 ms)
↓
(1) Display of designated accessory ratio (cumulative) or advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (4800ms)
↓
(2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games) display (4800ms)
↓
(3) Character ratio (6000 games) display (4800ms)
↓
(4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative) display (4800ms)
↓
(5) Character ratio (cumulative) display (4800ms)
↓
(6) Display of status ratio (cumulative) of accessories (4800ms)
↓
(1) Display of designated accessory ratio (cumulative) or advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (4800ms)
↓
:
Will be.
As with the test pattern, each of the ratios (1) to (6) is displayed until the number of times the carry flag becomes "0" becomes "16" (300 ms x 16 times = 4800 ms). ..

Here, as described above, when the identification segment or the ratio segment is blinking and displayed, the lighting of “300” ms and the extinguishing of “300” ms are repeated (1 cycle “600” ms).
Then, when the lighting or extinguishing time is T1 and the display time of the test pattern or ratio is T2,
T2 = T1 × 2 × n (n is a natural number)
If set to, the switching timing between lighting and extinguishing can be matched with the switching timing of the test pattern display or the ratio display, and a good-looking display can be performed. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it may be out of order.
In the above, when "T1" is set to "300" ms, "T2" is a multiple of "600" ms, but in order to set each ratio display time to "5000 ms ± 10%", "T2" May be set to "4800" ms.

For example, if you want to blink the advantageous section ratio after blinking the test pattern,
Test pattern (lights up for 300ms. Cumulative 300ms.)
↓
Test pattern (lights off for 300 ms. Cumulative 600 ms.)
↓
:
↓
Test pattern (lights up for 300 ms. Cumulative 4500 ms.)
↓
Test pattern (lights off for 300 ms. Cumulative 4800 ms. Test pattern display ends.)
↓
Advantageous section ratio (lights up for 300 ms)
↓
Advantageous section ratio (lights off for 300 ms)
↓
:
Will be.

By doing so, when displaying the lighting of some information, the lighting state can be maintained for "300" ms. In other words, it is possible to prevent the information from being turned off before the lapse of "300" ms after the lighting display of some information is started. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the information from disappearing immediately after the lighting display of some information is started (misidentifying that the information may be out of order).

The explanation is returned to the block diagram of FIG.
Since the sub-control board 80 is the same as the sub-control board 80 of the first embodiment (FIG. 1), the description thereof will be omitted. However, the RWM83, ROM84, and CPU85 of the sub-control board 80 may be referred to as sub-control RWM83, sub-control ROM84, and sub-control CPU85, respectively.
The effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The connection terminal board (also referred to as “game ball rental device connection terminal board”) 130 has a role as a relay board for bidirectional communication between the game machine 10 and the rental unit 200.

The rental unit 200 corresponds to the management device 200 in the first embodiment (FIG. 1). Similar to the first embodiment, the lending switch 202, the return switch 203, and the like are provided.
Further, the rentable game medium number display unit 204 corresponds to the frequency display unit 204 in the first embodiment, and displays the maximum value of the number of game media that can be rented from the rental unit 200 to the game machine 10. For example, it is composed of a 3-digit LED.

Furthermore, the rentable game medium number storage means 206 stores the maximum value of the number of game media that can be rented from the rent unit 200 to the game machine 10, and is provided inside the rent unit 200, for example. It is composed of RWM. The number of rentable game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 is displayed on the rentable game medium number display unit 204.

The lending switch 202 is operated under the condition that the number of lending game media "400" is stored in the storage means 206 for the number of game media that can be rented, and the number of game media "50" is lent by one operation of the lending switch 202. In the case of the specification of renting out from the unit 200 to the game machine 10, "50" is added to the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a after the rental notification is transmitted. On the other hand, the number of rentable game media of the rentable game medium number storage means 206 is updated from "400" to "350".

Further, when the return switch 203 is operated, the number of game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the rental unit 200 is stored in the game medium number storage medium (magnetic card, IC card, IC coin, etc.). It is stored, and the game medium number storage medium is discharged from the rental unit 200.
The number of game media exceeding "0" is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100, and the number of game media is stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the rental unit 200. Under the situation where it is not stored, the game medium number storage medium is not ejected even if the return switch 203 is operated. In other words, even when the number of game media is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100, the number of game media is stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the rental unit 200. If not, even if the return switch 203 is operated, the game medium number storage medium is not ejected.

Therefore, in the above case, by operating the counting switch 47, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is transmitted to the lending unit 200, and the number of game media is transmitted to the lending available game medium number storage means 206. Remember. After that, when the return switch 203 is operated, the number of game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 is stored in the game medium number storage medium and discharged from the rental unit 200. When the number of game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 is stored in the game medium number storage medium, the number of rentable game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 is updated to "0". Will be done.

FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a telegram used for communication between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200.
As shown in FIG. 30, the types of telegrams are as shown in FIG.
1. 1. Notification of gaming machine information 2. Counting notification 3. Lending notice 4. A loan receipt result response is provided.
Among these telegrams, the gaming machine information notification, the counting notification, and the loan receipt result response are the telegrams transmitted from the gaming machine 10 to the lending unit 200.
On the other hand, the lending notice is a telegram transmitted from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10.

In addition, each telegram is composed of the following five data.
(1) Telegram length (2) Command (3) Serial number, counting serial number, or lending serial number (4) Data unit (5) Checksum The data group consisting of the above five is called "telegram" and is transmitted by one transmission. Will be done. That is, the divided transmission is not performed.

(1) Telegram length "Telegram length" indicates the length of the data consisting of the telegram length, command, serial number (serial number, counting serial number, or rental serial number), data part, and checksum. It is composed of 1-byte data. For example, if the message length is 1 byte, the command is 1 byte, the serial number is 1 byte, the data part is 14 bytes, and the checksum is 1 byte, the message is 18 bytes and the message length is 18 bytes of data (12h). It becomes.

(2) Command The "command" is data for notifying the type of the telegram among the gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, and lending receipt result response, and is composed of 1-byte data. To.
For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the game machine information notification command is set to "01h", the counting notification command is set to "02h", the lending notification command is set to "13h", and the lending receipt result response command is set to "03h". Has been done.
The receiving side of the telegram can identify the type of the telegram by determining the value of the command.

(3) Serial number The "serial number" is data indicating a number included in a gaming machine information notification, a counting notification, a loan notification, and a loan receipt result response. The serial number included in the gaming machine information notification is "serial number", the serial number included in the counting notification is "counting serial number", the serial number included in the loan notification is "rental serial number", and the serial number included in the loan receipt result response is "rental serial number". It is called. These various serial numbers are numerical values in the range of "0" to "FFh" and are composed of 1-byte data.
The serial number is controlled so as to notify "00h" when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on.
In addition, after the power is turned on, the serial number is updated (+1) each time a notification is made.
The next value whose serial number is "FFh" is updated to "01h" (+1 is repeated twice) (it does not become "0").

(4) Data unit The "data unit" corresponds to data corresponding to gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, and lending receipt result response. The details of the data part of each telegram will be described later.
(5) Checksum The “checksum” is a value indicating the lower 1 byte of the total by adding the data consisting of the telegram length, the command, the serial number, the data part, and the checksum. Using this checksum, the receiving side can grasp the damage of data during communication, for example, the gaming machine 10 or the lending unit 200 counts the number of telegrams whose checksums do not match, and communicates. You can check the status of problems. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the number of telegrams whose checksums do not match is displayed in the image display device 23 in a predetermined situation (in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed). It may be possible to display by such as.

Next, each data unit of the gaming machine information notification, the counting notification, the lending notification, and the lending receipt result response will be described.
1. 1. Data unit for game machine information notification As shown in FIG. 30, the data unit for game machine information notification is composed of a game machine type, a game machine information type, and game machine information.
a) Game machine type The "game machine type" is information for identifying the type and the like of the game machine 10. This information is data for notifying, for example, a management medium, a group classification, a gaming machine type, and the like.

b) Gaming machine information type The "gaming machine information type" is whether the gaming machine information of the gaming machine information notification to be notified this time is the gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, or the hall computer / fraud monitoring information. Information for identifying. "00h" is notified when the gaming machine performance information is notified, "01h" is notified when the gaming machine installation information is notified, and "02h" is notified when the hall computer / fraud monitoring information is notified.

c) Pachinko machine information "Pachinko machine information" is composed of game machine performance information, game machine installation information, and hall control / fraud monitoring information. As the gaming machine information, any one of the gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, and the hall control / fraud monitoring information is transmitted.
Here, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is transmitted every "300" ms (every transmission of the gaming machine information notification) in principle.
Further, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted every "60" seconds.
Furthermore, the gaming machine performance information is transmitted every "180" seconds in principle.
In the above, "in principle" means that when the transmission timings of a plurality of gaming machine information overlap, the gaming machine information having the higher priority is transmitted. In other words, when the transmission timings of the gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, and the hall computer / fraud monitoring information overlap, one of them is transmitted according to the priority. As shown in FIG. 30, the gaming machine installation information transmitted every "60" seconds has the first priority, and the gaming machine performance information transmitted every "180" seconds has the second priority.

Further, the “300” ms, which is the transmission cycle of the hall control / fraud monitoring information, may be within the range of “300” to “310” ms.
Similarly, the “60” seconds, which is the transmission cycle of the gaming machine installation information, may be within the range of “60” to “62” seconds.
Furthermore, similarly, the "180" seconds, which is the transmission cycle of the gaming machine performance information, may be within the range of "180" to "186" seconds.
However, the range of the transmission cycle described above does not take a random value every time, and transmission is performed with a predetermined value.

FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a specific configuration of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control / fraud monitoring information, which are gaming machine information of the gaming machine information notification.
(A) Gaming machine performance information Gaming machine performance information consists of the following information such as the total number of inputs.
a) Total input number The "total input number" is the cumulative number of game media input since the power was turned on. When the power is turned off and then turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of turns. For example, in a cumulative total of "1000" games, if the cumulative number of input of the game medium is "2000", the total number of inputs is "2000", and "2000" can be output as the total number of inputs. Then, when the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of turns. If the replay is won by the combination lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of bets for the next game of that game is not included in the total number of inputs.

b) Total number of grants The "total number of grants" is the cumulative number of game media granted since the power was turned on. When the power is turned off and then turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of grants. For example, if the cumulative number of game media granted is "2000" in a cumulative total of "1000" games, the total number of grants will be "2000" and "2000" may be output as the total number of grants. .. Then, when the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of grants.
If the game medium with the number of bets in the game is automatically bet based on the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay, the automatically bet game medium is not included in the "number of grants". ..

c) MY (difference number)
"MY" is also referred to as "difference number" or "difference number".
The “MY” is information on the maximum difference number that can be calculated from the number of game media provided and the number of game media turned on after the power is turned on. When the power is cut off and then turned on, "0" may be output as MY. Specifically, based on the time when the number of game media when the result of the game is obtained is the smallest, the number of increase in the number of game media from the standard (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of inputs from the total number of grants). A certain maximum difference is referred to as "MY". For example, in the cumulative total of "1000" games, the "100" game has the smallest difference in the number of game media, the number of game media at that time is "-200", and the "800" game from that point. When the game has the largest difference in the number of game media and the number of game media at that time is "+800", the MY becomes "+1000" and "1000" can be output as the MY. Then, when the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as MY.

d) Total number of bonuses granted The "total number of bonuses granted" is given by the operation of the bonuses (single bonus (SB), regular bonus (RB), and challenge bonus (CB)) after the power is turned on. It is the total number (cumulative number) of the game media played. When the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of accessories. For example, in the cumulative total of "1000" games, if the total number of game media obtained by the operation of the bonus is "100", the total number of bonuses granted is "100", and the total number of bonuses granted is "100". Can be output as "100". Then, when the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of accessories.

e) Total number of continuous bonuses granted The "total number of continuous bonuses granted" is the number of consecutive bonuses granted by the operation of continuous bonuses (first-class special bonuses, also referred to as regular bonus (RB)) after the power is turned on. It is the total number (cumulative number) of the game media played. When the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of continuous accessories. For example, in a cumulative total of "1000" games, if the total number of game media obtained by operating the continuous bonus is "100", the total number of continuous bonuses granted is "100", and the continuous bonus is given. "100" can be output as the total number of grants. Then, when the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, "0" may be output as the total number of continuous accessories.
In addition, the number of game media granted by the operation of the first-class special bonus by the operation of the first-class special bonus continuous operation device (also referred to as "class 1 BB") is also the total number of continuous bonuses granted. Accumulated.

f) Character ratio As described above, it is a value of the character ratio (cumulative) displayed by the character ratio monitor 113. When the total number of games played is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 17,500 times), "FFh" is output as the bonus ratio (cumulative).
g) Continuous bonus ratio As described above, it is the value of the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) displayed by the role ratio monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17,500), "FFh" is output as the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative).

h) Advantageous section ratio As described above, it is the value of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) displayed by the combination ratio monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 175,000 times), "FFh" is output as an advantageous section ratio. Further, even a gaming machine that does not have an advantageous section is configured to output "FFh".
i) Instructed bonus ratio As described above, this is the value of the indicated bonus ratio (cumulative) displayed by the role ratio monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 175,000 times), "FFh" is output as the designated accessory ratio. Further, even a gaming machine that does not have an accessory or an instruction function is configured to output "FFh".

j) Characters and the like state ratio As described above, it is a value of the character and the like state ratio (cumulative) displayed by the role ratio monitor 113. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 175,000 times), "FFh" is output as the state ratio of the accessory or the like. Further, even in a gaming machine equipped with no accessory, it is configured to output "FFh".
k) Number of games The “number of games” is the cumulative number of games since the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. It is cleared when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (“0” is stored).
l) Other information other than the above includes a plurality of types of information such as information used in the lending unit 200, but the description thereof is omitted in the present embodiment.

(B) Gaming machine installation information The gaming machine installation information is composed of the following information such as the main control chip ID number.
a) Main control chip ID number The "main control chip ID number" is information including a chip individual number for identifying the main control chip in which the CPU 55, RWM 53, and ROM 54 provided on the main control board 50 are integrated. Therefore, even if the same model is used, the information will be different for each gaming machine 10.
b) Main control chip maker code The "main control chip maker code" is information indicating the gaming machine maker stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.

c) Main control chip product code The "main control chip product code" is information indicating the model name of the gaming machine 10 stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.
The above-mentioned main control chip ID number, main control chip maker code, and main control chip product code are transferred from the main control board 50 to the game medium number control board 100 in the power-on process when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is configured to be sent. The RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 is configured to store the main control chip ID number, the main control chip maker code, and the main control chip product code, respectively.

d) Game medium number control chip ID number The "game medium number control chip ID number" identifies a game medium number control chip in which the CPU 105, RWM 103, and ROM 104 provided on the game medium number control board 100 are integrated. This is information including the individual chip number for the game, and even if the same model is used, the information is different for each game machine 10.
In the case of a gaming machine on which the gaming medium number control board 100 is not mounted, "000000000000000000h" can be output to the rental unit 200 as the gaming medium number control chip ID number.

e) Game medium number control chip maker code The "game medium number control chip maker code" is information indicating the game machine maker stored in the built-in memory (ROM 54) of the game medium number control chip.
In the case of a gaming machine on which the gaming medium number control board 100 is not mounted, "000000h" can be output to the rental unit 200 as the gaming medium number control chip maker code.
f) Game medium number control chip product code The “game medium number control chip product code” is information indicating the model name of the game machine 10 stored in the built-in memory (ROM 54) of the main control chip.
In the case of a gaming machine on which the gaming medium number control board 100 is not mounted, "0000000000000000h" as a game medium number control chip product code can be output to the rental unit.

(C) Hallcon / fraud monitoring information Hallcon / fraud monitoring information is composed of the following information such as the number of game media.
a) Number of game media The "number of game media" is information indicating the current number of game media (total number) stored in the game medium number control board 100, which is reduced by the input (bet) of the game media and is small. It is added by granting a game medium based on the winning of the role. The current number of game media is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, and is displayed on the game medium number display unit 121. When, for example, "2000" is stored as the number of game media, "0007D0h" can be output to the rental unit 200 as the number of game media. The upper limit of the number of game media that can be stored in the game medium number control board 100 is "16383 (D)".
By transmitting the current number of game media to the rental unit 200 (every "300" ms), the number of game media can be managed on the rental unit 200 side as well. This makes it possible to further enhance security.

b) Number of inputs The "number of inputs" is information indicating the number of game media inserted (bet). For example, when the number of game media "3" is inserted (bet), "03h" can be output to the rental unit 200. Further, when the input number "3" is returned to the game medium number control board 100 by operating the settlement switch 46 before starting the game from the situation where "3" is input (before the start switch 41 is operated). , "FDh" corresponding to "-3" can be output to the rental unit 200. In other words, the information of "-3" (FDh) to +3 (03h) can be output to the rental unit 200.

c) Number of grants The "number of grants" is information indicating the number of game media (dividends) granted according to the mode of the symbol combination stopped (winning) on the effective line after all reels 31 have stopped. .. For example, when the number of game media "8" is given, the information of "08h" can be output, and when "15" is given, "0Fh" can be output to the rental unit 200.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can detect an abnormality in the number of gaming media on the lending unit 200 side by transmitting the above-mentioned "number of gaming media", "number of inputs", and "number of grants" to the lending unit 200. It has become.

d) Main control state 1
The "main control state 1" is information indicating a state related to the gaming state. Specifically, among the 1-byte data, which gaming state is assigned to each bit. For example, when the D0 bit is "1", it indicates that it is in the RB state, and when, for example, the D1 bit is "1", it indicates that it is in the BB state, and further, for example, when the D2 bit is "1". Indicates that it is in the AT state. Then, the gaming machine 10 can output such information to the rental unit 200.

The D3 to D6 bits correspond to the gaming machine status signals 1 to 4. The game machine status signals 1 to 4 can be used or not used depending on the type of the game machine 10. For example, every time the number of gaming media assigned by AT reaches "100", the gaming machine status signal 1 can be output. The D7 bit is unused and is configured so that "0" can be output regardless of the type of the gaming machine 10. With this configuration, for example, when notifying that the AT state is in effect, "00000100B" can be output to the lending unit 200.

e) Main control state 2
The "main control state 2" is information indicating a state related to the gaming state, as in the main control state 1. The D0 bit to the D2 bit correspond to the gaming machine status signals 5 to 7. The game status signals 5 to 7 can be used or not used depending on the type of the game machine 10. For example, when the state shifts to a specific RT state (re-game probability fluctuation (high probability) state), the game state signal 5 may be output. The D3 to D7 bits are unused and are configured so that "0" can be output regardless of the type of the gaming machine 10. With this configuration, for example, when a specific RT state is entered, "00000001B" can be output to the rental unit 200.

f) Game machine error state The "game machine error state" is information including an error code or the like indicating an error occurring in the game machine 10.
Specifically, the error code is indicated by bits D0 to D5. Whether the D6 bit is an error in the game medium number control board 100 (in this case, the D6 bit is "0") or an error in the main control board 50 (in this case, the D6 bit is "1"). Is shown. Only the error notification is performed by the lending unit 200 with the D7 bit (in this case, the D7 bit is "0"), or the error notification is performed by the lending unit 200 and the hall computer 300 is notified through the lending unit 200. Also indicates whether the error code is notified (in this case, the D7 bit is "1").

For example, it is assumed that the gaming machine 10 can detect a random number abnormality error and a radio wave abnormality error as the types of errors. At this time, as the error code, the random number abnormality error is set to "00001B", the radio wave abnormality error is set to "000010B", and the information including this error code can be output. Specifically, the random number abnormality error is an error of the main control board 50, and when only the error notification is performed by the lending unit 200, "0100001B" can be output to the lending unit 200. Further, the radio wave abnormality error is an error of the game medium number control board 100, and when the error notification is performed by the rental unit 200 and the error code is also notified to the hall computer 300, "10000010B" is used as the rental unit 200. It is possible to output to. If no error has occurred or if the gaming machine does not have an error code, "0000000000B" can be output to the rental unit 200.

g) Pachinko machine fraud 1 (main control)
"Game machine fraud 1 (main control)" is information regarding detection of fraud related to the main control board 50 and a state related to the main control board 50. The signal of the gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) is treated as a signal for the hall computer 300. In other words, each signal of the gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) output from the gaming machine 10 is output to the hall computer 300 through the lending unit 200.

Each signal constituting the gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) is as follows.
First, a setting changing signal is assigned to the D0 bit. When the D0 bit is "1", it indicates that the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode) and that the setting has been changed. The D0 bit of the setting changing signal is "1" from the setting change to the end of one game after the setting change (for example, when all reels 31 are stopped and the game medium addition process is completed). The D0 bit is set to "0" in situations other than the time when the setting is being changed to the end of one game after the setting is changed.
A setting confirmation signal is assigned to the D1 bit. When the setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation mode), the D1 bit is set to "1", and when the setting is not being confirmed, the D1 bit is set to "0".

A fraud detection signal 1 is assigned to the D2 bit, a fraud detection signal 2 is assigned to the D3 bit, and a fraud detection signal 3 is assigned to the D4 bit. For example, in the gaming machine 10 in which the random number abnormality is invalid, when the detection of the random number abnormality is assigned to the fraud detection signal 1, the D2 bit becomes "1" when the random number abnormality is detected, and the random number abnormality is detected. If not, the D2 bit becomes "0".
A security signal is assigned to the D5 bit. Specifically, the D5 bit becomes "1" under any of the following conditions: when the fraud detection signal is being output, when the setting changing signal is being output, or when the setting confirmation signal is being output. In other situations, the D5 bit is "0".
The D6 and D7 bits are unused and become "0".

h) Gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or number of gaming media)
"Game machine fraud 2 (main control or game medium number control)" refers to the detection of fraud related to the main control board 50 or the game medium number control board 100 and the state related to the main control board 50 or the game medium number control board 100. Information to show. The signal of the game machine fraud 2 (main control or game medium number control) is treated as a signal for the hall computer 300. In other words, each signal of the game machine fraud 2 (main control or game medium number control) output from the game machine 10 is output to the hall computer 300 through the lending unit 200.

Each signal constituting the game machine fraud 2 (main control or game medium number control) is as follows.
A setting door open signal is assigned to the D0 bit. The "setting door open signal" is a signal indicating whether or not the setting key switch cover covering the setting key switch 12 for changing the setting is open. When the setting key switch cover is open, the D0 bit becomes "1", and when the setting key switch cover is closed, the D0 bit becomes "0". In a gaming machine that does not have a setting key switch cover or a gaming machine that does not have a function of detecting the opening of the setting key switch cover, the D0 bit is set to "0".

A door open signal is assigned to the D1 bit. The "door open signal" is information indicating whether or not the door (also referred to as "front door" or "front door") of the gaming machine 10 is open. When the door of the gaming machine 10 is open, the D1 bit becomes "1", and when the door of the gaming machine 10 is closed, the D1 bit becomes "0".
The D2 bit is unused and is "0".
A game medium number clear detection is assigned to the D3 bit. The "game medium number clear detection" is a detection that the total game medium number clear switch 112 provided on the game medium number control board 100 is operated (the total number of game media number is cleared).
When the operation of the total number of game media clear switch 112 is detected, the D3 bit becomes "1", and when the operation of the total number of game media clear switch 112 is not detected, the D3 bit becomes "0". In the case of a gaming machine that does not have the total number of gaming media clear switch 112, the D3 bit is "0".
The D4 to D7 bits are unused, and these bits are "0".

i) Gaming machine fraud 3 (main control or number of gaming media)
The “game machine fraud 3” is provided as a spare and indicates the detection of fraud related to the main control board 50 or the game medium number control board 100 and the information on the state related to the main control board 50 or the game medium number control board 100. ..
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming machine fraud 3 (main control or game medium number control) is unused, and the D0 to D7 bits are "0".
Further, although not shown in FIG. 31, other information is provided as hall control / fraud monitoring information, but the description thereof is omitted in the present embodiment.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
2. 2. Data unit of counting notification The data unit of counting notification is composed of the number of counting game media and the number of cumulative counting game media.
a) Number of counting game media The "number of counting game media" is the number of gaming media transmitted (returned) from the game machine 10 to the rental unit 200 based on the operation of the counting switch 47. The number of counting game media ranges from "0x00h" to "0x32h", and a maximum of "50 (D)" can be transmitted to the lending unit 200 in one counting notification. Further, when the number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 is "50" or more, the data of "0x32h" indicating "50" is transmitted, but the game medium number control board 100 stores it. When the number of game media being played is less than "50", data corresponding to the current number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 is transmitted. For example, when the number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 is "30 (D)", the data of "0x1Eh" is transmitted.

The above-mentioned example of the number of counting game media is an example in which "50" is notified when the operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted only once (hereinafter, may be referred to as "short press operation"). However, when the short press operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted, "1" is notified as the number of counting game media, and when the long pressing operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted, "50" is notified as the number of counting game media. May be.
Here, "accepting the short press operation of the counting switch 47" means, for example, the period (interrupt processing) in which the level data regarding the acceptance of the operation of the counting switch 47 is set to the value of the game medium number control board 100. The period in which the operation reception of the counting switch 47 is a value indicating ON) is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than "1" seconds). That is, when the operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted in a time less than the predetermined period, it is determined that the short pressing operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted, and the number of counting game media is set to "1".

If the number of game media "50" is uniformly counted when the counting switch 47 is operated once, it becomes impossible for the player to take out less than the number of game media "50", for example, the number of game media "1". .. Therefore, if the minimum unit number of game media "1" can be taken out by, for example, a short press operation of the counting switch 47, it is in line with the purpose of the counting switch 47 that "it has the ability to freely take out the game medium". It becomes a thing.

On the other hand, "accepting the long press operation of the counting switch 47" means, for example, the period (counting by interrupt processing) in which the level data regarding the acceptance of the operation of the counting switch 47 is set to the value of the game medium number control board 100. There is a case where the operation reception of the switch 47 is a value indicating ON) is a predetermined period or more (for example, “1” second or more). That is, when the operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted for a time equal to or longer than a predetermined period, it is assumed that the long press operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted, and the number of counting game media is set to "50".

If the counting switch 47 is still pressed and held at the timing of transmitting the counting notification next time after the counting game medium number "50" is transmitted to the lending unit 200 in the counting notification, the counting game media number is counted as the counting notification. "50" is transmitted to the lending unit 200. That is, after the long press determination is made once, the number of counting game media "50" is lent out in the counting notification until the counting switch 47 is no longer operated (until the level data related to the operation acceptance of the counting switch 47 becomes a value indicating off). Continue to send to 200. In this case, counting is not performed until it is determined that the counting switch 47 is being pressed for a long time (for example, for "1" seconds).

b) Number of counting cumulative gaming media The "counting cumulative number of gaming media" is the cumulative value of the number of counting gaming media since the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. The cumulative number of counting game media is in the range of "0x0000h" to "0xFFFFh", and the number of counting game media is added each time counting is performed. If the cumulative number of game media for counting exceeds "0xFFFFh", the value next to "0xFFFFh" is set to "0x0000h". When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the cumulative number of counting gaming media is cleared (set to "0").

3. 3. Data unit of lending notification The "number of lending gaming media", which is the data unit of lending notification, is the number of gaming media related to lending transmitted from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10 by operating the lending switch 202 of the lending unit 200. Is. The number of rented gaming media ranges from "0x00h" to "0x32h", and a maximum of "50 (D)" can be transmitted to the gaming machine 10 in one lending notification. When the number of rentable gaming media stored in the lending unit 200 is "50" or more, the data of "0x32h" indicating "50" is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. On the other hand, when the number of lending game media stored in the lending unit 200 side is less than "50", the data corresponding to the current number of lending game media stored in the lending unit 200 side is transmitted. Will be done. For example, when the number of rentable game media is "20", the data of "0x14h" indicating "20" is transmitted.

4. The data unit of the loan receipt result response The "rental game medium number receipt result", which is the data unit of the loan receipt result response, is based on the reception of the data of the number of loan game media transmitted from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10. , Data transmitted from the gaming machine 10 to the rental unit 200. When the data received from the lending unit 200 is normal, it is "0x00h", and when it is abnormal, it is "0x01h".
For example, if it becomes abnormal,
a) If the lending serial numbers notified by the lending unit 200 are not consecutive
b) When the gaming machine 10 side cannot be rented due to an abnormality in the RWM 103 of the gaming medium number control board 100, etc.
c) Number of game media The value obtained by adding the total number of game media stored in the control board 100 and the number of rental game media exceeds the upper limit of the number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100. Be done.
Further, when the value is other than "0x00h" and "0x01h" due to other factors, the lending unit 200 is determined to be abnormal.

Subsequently, the communication between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a time chart showing a basic communication sequence between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200.
The gaming machine 10 transmits a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit 200 every "300" ms from the time when the activation of the gaming machine 10 is completed. In the example of FIG. 32, the gaming machine information notification of the serial number “n” is transmitted, and then the gaming machine information notification of the serial number “n + 1” is transmitted after “300” ms has elapsed.
In the gaming machine information of the gaming machine information notification, as shown in FIG. 30, the gaming machine performance information is transmitted every "180" seconds, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted every "60" seconds, and the hall controller is transmitted. -Fraud monitoring information is transmitted every "300" ms, which will be described later.

Further, the gaming machine 10 transmits the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit 200, and then transmits the counting notification after "100" ms.
Further, the lending unit 200 transmits the lending notice to the gaming machine 10 within "170" ms after receiving the counting notification. Then, after receiving the lending notification, the gaming machine 10 transmits a lending receipt result response to the lending unit 200 within "10" ms.
Since the gaming machine 10 transmits the next gaming machine information notification "300" ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, from the transmission of the loan receipt result response to the transmission of the next gaming machine information notification. The interval is "20" ms or more.

FIG. 33 is a time chart illustrating Example 1 of the activation sequence of the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200, and shows a case where the gaming machine 10 is activated first.
When both the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 are turned off (synonymous with "power off"; the same applies hereinafter), the VL signal and the PSI signal between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 are turned off. ing.
The VL signal is a signal that is turned on when the game machine 10 becomes playable (a game medium can be bet), and is a signal that is turned off until the rental unit 200 is activated.
The PSI signal is a connection signal between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200, and is a signal that is off until the rental unit 200 is activated.

After the power is turned on, when the start of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the start of the rental unit 200 has not been completed yet.
Under this circumstance, the gaming machine 10 transmits the first telegram, that is, the gaming machine information notification, to the rental unit 200 according to the program of the telegram notification, and further, as described above, "100" ms from the transmission of the gaming machine information notification. Send a count notification later. However, at the time of transmitting the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification, the lending unit 200 cannot receive the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification because the activation of the lending unit 200 has not been completed yet. In the figure, the “?” Mark indicates that the gaming machine 10 has transmitted the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification, but the lending unit 200 cannot receive these notifications.
Further, since the lending unit 200 has not been activated yet and the counting notification has not been received, the lending unit 200 does not send the lending notification to the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 does not transmit the loan receipt result response.

After the activation of the gaming machine 10 is completed, "0x00h" is transmitted as the serial number of the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number of the counting notification to be transmitted first. Further, since the serial number and the counting serial number are updated regardless of whether or not the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 are connected, the next transmission timing (the first transmitted game after the activation of the gaming machine 10 is completed). At the timing of transmission after "300" ms of the machine information notification), "0x01h" is transmitted as the serial number and the counting serial number.

After that, when the activation of the rental unit 200 is completed, the VL signal and the PSI signal are turned on, and the operation of the bet switch 40 and the operation of the counting switch 47 of the gaming machine 10 become effective. Further, the lending unit 200 can receive the information transmitted from the gaming machine 10. After the lending unit 200 is activated, the lending unit 200 can transmit the lending notification to the gaming machine 10 based on the reception of the counting notification. In the example of FIG. 33, the gaming machine 10 transmits the counting notification of the counting serial number “m” to the lending unit 200, and when the lending unit 200 receives the notification, the lending notification of the lending serial number “k” is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. An example is shown.
Further, the gaming machine 10 can transmit a loan receipt result response to the lending unit 200 based on the received lending notification. In the example of FIG. 33, the gaming machine 10 shows an example in which the lending receipt result response of the lending serial number “k” is transmitted to the lending unit 200 based on the receipt of the lending notification of the lending serial number “k”.

As described above, since the gaming machine 10 transmits the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification regardless of whether or not the lending unit 200 is activated, the lending unit 200 has the lending unit 200 after the activation of the lending unit 200 is completed. It is managed from the serial number of the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the gaming machine 10 and the counting serial number of the counting notification. With this configuration, the gaming machine 10 can transmit a telegram without determining the status of the rental unit 200, so that the program capacity for determining the status of the rental unit 200 can be reduced.

FIG. 34 is a time chart illustrating Example 2 of the activation sequence of the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200, and shows a case where the rental unit 200 is activated first.
If only the power of the rental unit 200 is turned on while the power of the gaming machine 10 is off, only the rental unit 200 starts to start. While the lending unit 200 is running, the VL signal and the PSI signal are off.
Then, when the activation of the lending unit 200 is completed, the VL signal and the PSI signal of the lending unit 200 are turned on.

FIG. 34 shows an example in which the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on after the VL signal and the PSI signal of the rental unit 200 are turned on.
When the activation of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the VL signals and the PSI signals of both the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 are turned on, and the operation of the bet switch 40 and the operation of the counting switch 47 of the gaming machine 10 become effective.

Then, as in the example of FIG. 33, the gaming machine 10 transmits the first telegram, that is, the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit 200 according to the telegram notification program, and further, “100” from the transmission of the gaming machine information notification. A count notification is sent after ms. Since the activation of the lending unit 200 is completed at this point, the lending unit 200 can receive the first gaming machine information notification and the counting notification.
When the lending unit 200 receives the counting notification, it transmits the lending notification to the gaming machine 10 within "170" ms. Further, when the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notification, the gaming machine 10 transmits a lending receipt result response to the lending unit 200 within "10" ms.
As described above, when the activation of the rental unit 200 has already been completed when the activation of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the rental unit 200 is the first telegram (game with the serial number "0") transmitted from the gaming machine 10. It can be received from the machine information notification).

FIG. 35 is a time chart illustrating a basic sequence of gaming machine information notification.
In FIG. 35, after the activation of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the first gaming machine information notification is referred to as "A0", and the subsequent gaming machine information notifications are referred to as "A1", "A2", ....
Similarly, the counting notification is referred to as "B0", "B1", "B2", ..., The lending notification is referred to as "C0", "C1", "C2", ... It is referred to as "D0", "D1", "D2", ...
As shown in FIG. 32, the gaming machine 10 transmits a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit 200 every "300" ms.
Here, as shown in FIG.
(1) Pachinko machine performance information: Every 180 seconds (second priority)
(2) Pachinko machine installation information: Every 60 seconds (first priority)
(3) Hall computer / fraud monitoring information: A gaming machine information notification including any gaming machine information is transmitted every 300 ms.

In principle, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is transmitted every "300" ms, but it overlaps with the transmission cycle of the gaming machine installation information transmitted every "60" seconds, and the gaming machine performance is transmitted every "180" seconds. If it does not overlap with the information transmission cycle, the gaming machine installation information is preferentially transmitted at the transmission timing, and the hall controller is transmitted at the next transmission timing (after "300" ms) after the gaming machine installation information is transmitted. -Send fraud monitoring information.
In FIG. 35, after the gaming machine 10 is started, the "200"th gaming machine information notification ("A199" in the figure) is transmitted "60" seconds after the first gaming machine information notification is transmitted. (300 ms x 200 = 60,000 ms).
Therefore, at the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification of "A199", the gaming machine information notification including the gaming machine installation information is transmitted with priority over the hall computer / fraud monitoring information. Then, at the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification of "A200""300" ms after the transmission, the gaming machine information notification including the hall computer / fraud monitoring information is transmitted.

Further, if it overlaps with the transmission cycle of the gaming machine installation information having a cycle of "60" seconds and overlaps with the transmission cycle of the gaming machine performance information having a cycle of "180" seconds, the gaming machine installation information is given as the first priority. The gaming machine performance information is transmitted as the second priority in the next transmission cycle ("300" ms after the transmission of the gaming machine installation information). Further, in the next transmission cycle ("300" ms after the transmission of the gaming machine performance information), the hall controller / fraud monitoring information is transmitted.
In FIG. 35, the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification of “A599” is “60” seconds and “180” seconds after the first transmission of the gaming machine information notification (300 ms × 600 = 180000 ms). .. It should be noted that the elapse of "180" seconds always corresponds to the elapse of "60" seconds.

Therefore, at the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification of "A599", the gaming machine installation information is transmitted as the first priority. Further, at the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification of "A600" after "300" ms has elapsed from that time, the gaming machine performance information is transmitted as the second priority. Further, at the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification of "A601" after "300" ms has elapsed from that time, the hall computer / fraud monitoring information is transmitted.

When transmitting the gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information (hole control / fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information) is acquired (read from RWM, ROM, etc.), stored in the transmission register, and stored. Send from the specified output port.
Therefore, the latest information immediately before transmission is transmitted for all of the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information.
Of the game machine information notifications, the game machine installation information is the main control chip ID number and the like, so it is not information that changes with the passage of time (progress of the game) but fixed information.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is information including the number of game media, the number of inputs, the number of grants, and the like, and is therefore information that changes depending on the progress of the game (elapsed time).

When the transmission cycles of the gaming machine installation information, the gaming machine performance information, and the hall control / fraud monitoring information all overlap, they are transmitted in the order of priority of the gaming machine installation information, the gaming machine performance information, and the hall control / fraud monitoring information. Therefore, from the time when the transmission cycle of the gaming machine information notification (“300” ms) arrives, the transmission of the hall computer / fraud monitoring information is delayed by “600” ms at the longest.

In this case, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is acquired at the time of transmission of the gaming machine installation information, and after "600" ms has elapsed from the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information (after the transmission of the gaming machine installation information and the game). If the pachinko / fraud monitoring information is transmitted (after the machine performance information is transmitted), the pachinko / fraud monitoring information "600" ms before will be transmitted.
Therefore, when transmitting the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is acquired and stored in the transmission register immediately before the actual transmission.

The above is the same when the transmission cycles of the gaming machine installation information and the hall computer / fraud monitoring information overlap. In this case, the hall computer / fraud monitoring information is transmitted after "300" ms from the time when the transmission cycle ("300" ms) of the gaming machine information notification has arrived.
Here, if the pachinko / fraud monitoring information is acquired at the time of transmission of the gaming machine installation information and the pachinko / fraud monitoring information is transmitted after "300" ms have elapsed from the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information, " The pachinko / fraud monitoring information before 300 "ms will be transmitted.
Therefore, when transmitting the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is acquired and stored in the transmission register immediately before the actual transmission.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31, the gaming machine performance information includes the total number of inputs, the total number of grants, MY, and the like, and therefore changes depending on the progress of the game (elapsed time).
When the transmission cycles of the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information overlap, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted with priority over the gaming machine performance information, so that the transmission cycle of the gaming machine information notification (“300”). The gaming machine performance information is transmitted after "300" ms have elapsed from the time when "ms) arrives.
In this case, if the gaming machine performance information is acquired at the time of transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information is transmitted after "300" ms have elapsed from the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information, "300" ms before. The performance information of the pachinko and pachislot machine will be transmitted.
Therefore, when the gaming machine performance information is transmitted, the gaming machine performance information is acquired immediately before the actual transmission and stored in the transmission register.
In other words, at the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification every "300" ms, the gaming machine information (hole control / fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, or gaming machine performance) of the gaming machine information notification transmitted by this interrupt processing is performed. Only one of the information) is stored in the transmission register.

FIG. 36 is a time chart illustrating a counting notification sequence.
When the counting switch 47 is operated, such as when the player finishes the game, a process of transmitting (returning or returning) the game medium on the game machine 10 side to the rental unit 200 is executed.
The counting process does not actually transmit or transfer the game medium data on the game machine 10 side to the rental unit 200, but the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game machine 10. The subtraction process is executed, and the addition process of the number of game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200 is executed.
In the example of FIG. 36, the (total) number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 (game medium number storage means 103a) is "200" as a situation before accepting the operation of the counting switch 47. It is assumed that the number of game media that can be rented stored in the lending unit 200 is "20".

Information on the first gaming machine after detecting the operation (ON) of the counting switch 47 in a situation where the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 have been started and communication between the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 is possible. At the timing of transmitting the notification to the lending unit 200, the serial number of the gaming machine information notification is assumed to be "n". Further, since the number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 at this point is "200", the number of game media "200" is transmitted to the rental unit 200.
Further, the gaming machine 10 updates the counting notification to the lending unit 200. It is assumed that the counting serial number of the counting notification at this time is "m". Further, the number of counting game media in the counting notification at this time is "50". In this example, when the operation of the counting switch 47 is detected, it is assumed that the counting game medium number "50" is transmitted by transmitting the counting notification once.

Further, assuming that the processing related to the counting is the processing related to the counting for the first time after the start of the gaming machine 10 is completed, the total number of counting gaming media "50" is transmitted as a counting notification. The gaming machine 10 subtracts the number of counting gaming media from the number of gaming media before executing the process of transmitting the counting notification. Therefore, the number of game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 is updated from "200" to "150" before the process of transmitting the count notification is executed. When the lending unit 200 receives the counting notification, the lending unit 200 adds the counting game medium to the number of lending game media stored in the lending available game medium number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 36, the number of rentable game media is updated from "20" to "70".
Subsequently, the lending unit 200 transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine 10. The lending serial number of this lending notice shall be "k". In addition, the number of rental game media in this loan notification is "0". Here, the reason why the number of rental game media "0" is transmitted is that the rental switch 202 is not operated.

Further, when the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notice from the lending unit 200, the gaming machine 10 checks the consistency between the information indicated by the lending notice and the information indicated by the previous lending notice.
Then, as a result of checking the consistency between the information indicated by the lending notice and the information indicated by the previous lending notice, when it is determined that the information is normal, the gaming machine 10 sets the lending serial number to "k" and sets the lending point receipt result. A loan receipt result response that is considered to be "normal" is transmitted to the loan unit 200.

When transmitting the next game machine information notification of the serial number "n + 1", the serial number "n + 1" and the number of gaming media "150" are transmitted.
FIG. 36 shows the counting switch 47 when the gaming machine information notification of the serial number “n” is transmitted, and then “300” ms has elapsed, and when the next gaming machine information notification of the serial number “n + 1” is transmitted. This is an example in which the on state of is maintained (the counting switch 47 is held down). Therefore, as the counting notification, the counting serial number "m + 1", the counting game medium number "50", and the counting cumulative game medium number "100" are transmitted. As a result, on the lending unit 200 side, the number of lending game media is updated to "120".
Further, the lending unit 200 transmits the lending serial number “k + 1” and the number of lending game media “0” to the gaming machine 10 as a lending notification to the gaming machine 10. Further, when the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notification, it transmits the lending serial number “k + 1” and the lending point receipt result “normal” to the lending unit 200 as a lending receipt result response.

In this way, under the condition that the gaming medium is stored in the gaming machine 10, the period from the detection of the on of the counting switch 47 to the detection of the off (while the counting switch 47 is held down) is Every "300" ms, the gaming machine 10 continues to transmit the counting notification including the predetermined number of counting game media to the rental unit 200. With this configuration, it is possible to send a fixed amount (“50” in this example) of counting game media to the rental unit 200 every “300” ms without causing complicated operations (just press and hold). Therefore, the burden of counting operations can be reduced.
Since the counting switch 47 is connected to the game medium number control board 100, the input port 101 is checked for each interrupt process of the game medium number control board 100, and the input port 101 indicating the counting switch 47 is turned on. If the information has been input, the operation of the counting switch 47 is accepted. After that, when the information indicating off is input to the input port 101 indicating the counting switch 47, the operation acceptance of the counting switch 47 is terminated.

The example of FIG. 36 shows an example in which the off of the counting switch 47 is detected after the gaming machine information notification of the serial number “n + 1” is transmitted and before the gaming machine information notification of the serial number “n + 2” is transmitted. ..
In this case, the gaming machine 10 transmits the number of gaming media "100" when transmitting the gaming machine information notification of the serial number "n + 2".
Further, as the counting notification, the counting serial number "m + 2", the counting game medium number "0", and the counting cumulative game medium number "100" are transmitted. Furthermore, the lending unit 200 transmits the lending serial number “k + 2” and the number of lending gaming media “0” to the gaming machine 10 as a lending notification to the gaming machine 10. Further, the gaming machine 10 transmits the lending serial number “k + 2” and the lending point receipt result “normal” as a lending receipt result response to the lending unit 200.

The counting notification is transmitted "100" ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification. In other words, the count notification is sent every "300" ms. Therefore, even when the counting switch 47 is not operated, a counting notification in which the number of counting game media is "0" is transmitted every "300" ms.
Further, in a situation where the game medium is not stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game machine 10, even if the counting switch 47 is operated, the counting notification that the number of counting game media is "0" is "300" ms. Sent every time.

Next, the counting process will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the counting process in the second embodiment.
Although not shown in FIG. 29, the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 includes the following storage areas.
The counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) is a storage area for storing data indicating whether or not counting is in progress.
The counting value storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) is a storage area for storing the counting value (number of counting game media) transmitted at the time of counting notification.
The count cumulative value storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL) is a storage area for storing the count cumulative value (count cumulative game medium number).
The counting serial number storage area (_NB_CAL_NUM) is a storage area for storing the counting serial number.
In the case of a gaming machine that does not include the gaming medium number control board 100, the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 may be provided with each of the above storage areas.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not it is the counting notification timing. Here, the "counting notification timing" refers to a timing that is "100" ms after the game machine information notification is transmitted. It should be noted that after the elapse of "100" ms, it may be within the range of "90" ms to "100" ms.
When it is determined that it is the counting notification timing, the process proceeds to step S702, and when it is determined that it is not the counting notification timing, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

When it is determined that it is the counting notification timing and the process proceeds to step S702, the game medium number control board 100 clears the counting flag (to "0"). Next, the process proceeds to step S703, and it is determined whether or not to execute the counting. Here, it is determined whether or not the counting switch 47 has been operated.
When the counting switch 47 is operated, the counting switch signal is turned on and input to the input port 101 of the game medium number control board 100. Then, when the counting switch signal is turned on and input to the input port 101, information indicating that the counting switch signal is turned on and input (when the counting switch 47 is operated) is input (when operated). Is stored in a predetermined storage area in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100. The signal input to the input port 101 is stored in the RWM 103 by timer interrupt processing every 1 ms.
When it is determined in step S703 that the counting switch 47 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S704, and when it is determined that the counting switch 47 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S712.

In step S704, it is determined whether or not the (total) number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100 is “0”. If it is determined that the number of game media is not "0", the process proceeds to step S705, and if it is determined that the number is "0", the process proceeds to step S712.
In this way, it is determined whether or not the counting switch 47 has been operated first, and if the counting switch 47 is not operated, the counting process is not started, and if the counting switch 47 is operated, the game medium. It is determined whether or not the number of (total) game media stored in the number storage means 103a is "0". Then, when the (total) number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "0", the counting process is not started, and when the number of (total) game media is not "0", the counting process is started. It is configured to do.
As a result, when the situation in which the counting switch 47 is operated is compared with the situation in which the (total) number of gaming media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "0", the counting switch 47 is operated. Since the number of situations is relatively small, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the counting process by first determining whether or not the counting switch 47 is operated.

In step S705, "50" is set as the counting value (number of counting game media).
Next, the process proceeds to step S706, and an arithmetic process (a subtractive arithmetic process) for comparing the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a with the count value “50” is executed. As a result of this arithmetic processing, when it is determined that the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is equal to or greater than the count value, the process proceeds to step S708, and the total number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is totaled. If it is determined that the value is less than the numerical value, the process proceeds to step S707.
In step S707, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is acquired.
In the next step S708, the count value is saved. When this process is determined to be "Yes" in step S706 (it is determined that the number of game media is equal to or greater than the count value), the count value "50" set in step S705 is stored in the count value storage area. .. On the other hand, when it is determined as "No" in step S706 (when the number of game media is less than the count value), the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a acquired in step S707 is used as the count value. Save in the count value storage area.

In the next step S709, the (total) number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated. This process is a process of subtracting the count value stored in the count value storage area from the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. Therefore, when it is determined that the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "50" or more and "50" is stored in the count value storage area, it is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. "50" is subtracted from the number of game media that have been played, and the number of game media is updated. On the other hand, when the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is less than "50" and the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is stored in the count value storage area, The number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated to "0".
Next, the process proceeds to step S710, the count value stored in the count value storage area is added to the count cumulative value storage area, and the value stored in the count cumulative value storage area is updated.
Next, the process proceeds to step S711, and since it has been decided to perform counting, the counting flag is set (“FFh” is stored).

Then, the process proceeds to step S712 to output a counting notification. Specifically, "0x07h" is output as the message length, "0x02h" is output as a command, the counting serial number stored in the counting serial number storage area is output as the counting serial number, and the counting value is stored as the counting value. The count value stored in the area is output, the count cumulative value stored in the count cumulative value storage area is output as the count cumulative value, and the checksum value (1 byte) of the output various data is output.
After that, the process proceeds to step S713, and the count value stored in the count value storage area is cleared. The value stored in the cumulative count value storage area is not cleared at the timing when the count notification is output.

Next, the process proceeds to step S714, and a process of updating the counting serial number (a process of setting “+1”) is executed. Since the result of performing "+1" when the counting serial number is "255 (D)" is "0", if it becomes "0", the process of updating the counting serial number again ("+1"). ”Process) is executed. In other words, when the counting serial number is "255", the counting serial number is updated to "1" by executing the process of updating the counting serial number twice. Further, when the counting serial number is a value less than "255" (for example, "10"), the result of executing the process of updating the counting serial number (the process of "+1") is not "0", so the counting serial number is updated. The process to be performed is executed only once. In the above example, the counting serial number is updated to "11".

Further, the information based on the counting flag is transmitted to the main control board 50. As a result, the main control board 50 can determine that counting is in progress. Further, for example, by transmitting information indicating that counting is being performed from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, the sub control board 80 can perform an effect corresponding to the counting.

In this embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is possible even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
However, when the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where the game medium can be bet, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is executed, but the counting switch 47 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When it is operated, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 may not be executed. This configuration is because there is a high possibility that the hall clerk is counting when the counting switch 47 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (possibly not a player). (Because of its high nature).

On the other hand, when the counting switch 47 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the dedicated screen in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the image display device 23 or the sound is output. You may. In this way, the necessary information can be provided to the hall clerk. Further, while displaying a dedicated screen in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, displaying "counting in progress" on the screen) may be performed. The notification in this case is configured to be different from the above-mentioned effect during counting (to the player). Attention can be issued by such notification.

Further, in the present embodiment, counting can be performed based on the operation of the counting switch 47 even during an error (a predetermined (predetermined) error may be performed or all errors may be performed).
However, when the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where the game medium can be bet, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is executed, but when the counting switch 47 is operated during the error, the counting switch 47 is operated. The effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that if the counting switch 47 is operated during an error, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed.
The errors include an unrecoverable error (for example, an error that requires resetting of set values (including power on / off) such as an RWM error and a random number update error) and a recoverable error (for example,). (For example, a door open error of the front door), but depending on the type of error, a situation in which counting processing is impossible and a situation in which counting processing is possible may be provided. For example, it is possible to make counting processing impossible while a recoverable error is occurring and to enable counting processing while a recoverable error is occurring.

On the other hand, when the counting switch 47 is operated during the error, the dedicated screen during the error may be displayed on the image display device 23 or the sound may be output. In this way, the necessary information can be provided to the hall clerk. Further, a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, displaying "counting in progress" on the screen) may be performed while displaying a dedicated screen during an error. The notification in this case is configured to be different from the above-mentioned effect during counting (to the player). Attention can be issued by such notification. At this time, the number of bets may not be returned by the settlement switch 46.

Further, in the present embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is possible even during the game (for example, in a situation where the reel 31 is rotating).
However, when the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where the game medium can be bet, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is executed, but when the counting switch 47 is operated during the game, the counting switch 47 is operated. The effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that if the counting switch 47 is operated during the game, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed.

FIG. 38 is a time chart illustrating a lending notification sequence between the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200.
In the example of FIG. 38, as a situation before detecting the on of the rental switch 202 (before accepting the operation of the rental switch 202), the number of game media “10” is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100. Is stored, and it is assumed that the number of rentable game media "120" is stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the rental unit 200. Since the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100 is less than "50", "10" is counted when the counting switch 47 is operated.

After the activation of the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200 is completed and the lending switch 202 of the lending unit 200 is detected in a situation where the gaming machine 10 and the lending unit 200 can communicate with each other (the operation is accepted). Later) shows an example in which the gaming machine information notification of the serial number "n" and the number of gaming media "10" is transmitted from the gaming machine 10 as the gaming machine information notification.
Next, as a counting notification, the counting serial number "m" and the number of counting game media "0" are transmitted. After receiving this counting notification, the rental serial number "k" and the number of rental game media "50" are transmitted as the rental notification. After transmitting the number of rental game media "50", the rental unit 200 updates the number of rental game media to "120-50 = 70". The timing at which the lending unit 200 updates the number of lending game media may be the timing at which the lending receipt result response is received.

Upon receiving the lending notice, the gaming machine 10 checks the consistency between the information indicated by the lending notice and the information indicated by the previous lending notice, and if the check result is normal (assumed to be normal in this example). ), The lending serial number "k" and the lending point receipt result "normal" are transmitted to the lending unit 200 as a response to the lending receipt result.
Next, the gaming machine 10 updates the number of gaming media to "10 + 50 = 60" between the time when the loan notification is received and the time when the loan receipt result response is transmitted.
At the timing when the gaming machine 10 next transmits the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit 200, the serial number "n + 1" and the number of gaming media "60" are transmitted to the lending unit 200 as the gaming machine information notification. Further, as the counting notification, the counting serial number "m + 1", the counting game medium number "0", and the counting cumulative game medium number "0" are transmitted.

At this point, when it is continuously detected that the lending switch 202 of the lending unit 200 is turned on, the lending unit 200 uses the lending serial number "k + 1" and the number of lending game media "50" as a lending notification to the gaming machine 10. It is transmitted to the machine 10 (“* 1” in the figure). Then, the number of rentable game media is updated to "70-50 = 20". Further, the gaming machine 10 transmits the lending serial number “k + 1” and the lending point receipt result “normal” (assuming that the check result is normal) as a lending receipt result response to the lending unit 200. Further, the gaming machine 10 updates the number of gaming media to "60 + 50 = 110" between the time when the loan notification is received and the time when the loan receipt result response is transmitted.
On the other hand, when the lending switch 202 is detected to be off at the timing when the lending unit 200 transmits the lending notification of the lending serial number “k + 1” to the gaming machine 10, the lending notification of the number of lending game media “0” is sent. It is transmitted to the game machine 10 (“* 2” in the figure). In this case, the number of game media that can be rented remains "70". Further, the number of gaming media of the gaming machine 10 is still "60".

The lending unit 200 turns on / off the level data of the lending switch 202 every time a lending notification is transmitted (that is, every "300" ms) as a method of detecting that the lending switch 202 is turned from off to on. May be judged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on / off of the rising data of the lending switch 202 is determined every time the lending notification is transmitted. Therefore, in this case, even when the lending switch 202 is continuously turned on, the lending operation is accepted only at the timing of the first operation, so that the lending switch 202 is continuously turned on. Even so, at the timing of transmitting the second and subsequent loan notifications, the number of loaned game media is set to "0". Therefore, in the example of FIG. 38, even if the lending switch 202 is continuously detected to be turned on at the timing when the lending notification of the lending serial number “k + 1” is transmitted, the number of lending gaming media “0” is lent. The notification is transmitted to the gaming machine 10.

Further, when the number of counting game media is "1" or more (that is, both the lending switch 202 and the counting switch 47 are operated) as a counting notification transmitted from the game machine 10 when the lending switch 202 is detected to be turned on. When), the lending unit 200 sets the number of lending game media of the lending notification to be transmitted immediately after the counting notification to "0". The lending switch 202 received at this time may be invalidated, or the lending unit 200 stores the operation acceptance flag of the lending switch 202 and transmits it after the number of counting game media of the counting notification becomes "0". The number of loaned game media may be set to "50" in the loan notification.
Furthermore, when the lending unit 200 stores the operation acceptance flag of the lending switch 202, when the lending switch 202 is operated again while the flag related to the operation acceptance of the lending switch 202 is stored, the lending switch 202 is operated twice. It may be rewritten as a flag, or the second and subsequent operations may be invalidated.

Further, when the lending unit 200 transmits the lending notification to the gaming machine 10 and the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notification, the lending notification information is stored in the lending notification information storage area provided in the RWM 103 of the gaming medium number control board 100. Memorize everything. Thereby, when the gaming machine 10 transmits the loan receipt result response, it is possible to determine whether the information of the loan point receipt result is "normal" or "abnormal".
Specifically, "k" is stored as the lending serial number in the lending notification information storage area, and "k" is stored when the lending serial number of the lending notification transmitted from the lending unit 200 is "k + 1". Is incremented to generate "k + 1" and compared with the received lending serial number "k + 1". In this case, since the generated lending serial number and the received lending serial number match, the received lending serial number "k + 1" is stored in the lending notification information storage area.

Further, when "k" is stored as the lending serial number in the lending notification information storage area and the lending serial number of the lending notification transmitted from the lending unit 200 is "k + 2", the stored "k" is incremented. Generates "k + 1" and compares it with the received lending serial number "k + 2". In this case, since the generated lending serial number and the received lending serial number do not match, the received lending serial number "k + 2" is not stored (the lending serial number in the lending notification information storage area remains "k").
Further, since the upper limit of the lending serial number is "255", if the lending serial number is incremented in the situation of "255", the lending serial number becomes "0". However, since the lending serial number "0" is a lending serial number that can be transmitted to the gaming machine 10 only immediately after the lending unit 200 is activated, the lending serial number is incremented again to be "1". In other words, when updating the lending serial number in the situation where the lending serial number is "255", the next lending serial number is set to "1" by performing the increment twice.

In the above example, as a method of comparing the lending serial number stored in the gaming machine 10 with the lending serial number of the received lending notification, the lending serial number stored in the gaming machine 10 is incremented and then the lending unit 200 is used. It was judged whether or not it matches the received loan serial number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to decrement the lending serial number received from the lending unit 200 and then compare whether or not it matches the lending serial number stored in the gaming machine 10.
Further, the lending serial number stored in the gaming machine 10 may be subtracted from the lending serial number received from the lending unit 200, and it may be determined whether or not the result is "1".

Subsequently, a timer for transmitting the gaming machine information notification (hereinafter, referred to as “game machine information notification timer”) will be described.
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a game machine information notification timer and a game machine information notification request flag.
The gaming machine information notification timer includes a gaming machine information notification timer A (_TM_INF_CTL_A), a gaming machine information notification timer B (_TM_INF_CTL_B), and a gaming machine information notification timer C (_TM_INF_CTL_C).
The gaming machine information notification timer A is a timer for determining the timing at which the hall controller / fraud monitoring information is transmitted every "300" ms.
The gaming machine information notification timer B is a timer for determining the timing at which the gaming machine installation information is transmitted every "60" seconds.
The gaming machine information notification timer C is a timer for determining the timing at which the gaming machine performance information is transmitted every "180" seconds.

The RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 is provided with storage areas of the game machine information notification timers A to C, and timer values are stored in each storage area.
The storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer A is composed of "2" bytes, and the gaming machine information notification timers B and C are composed of "1" bytes.
Each storage area of the gaming machine information notification timers A to C is initialized (cleared, "0" is stored) when the power is turned on.
As described above, the blinking switching cycle of the role ratio monitor 113 is "300" ms, and the RWM 103 is provided with a "blinking switching time (_TM_CHG_FLS)" as a timer area for managing the blinking switching time, and is further lit. The RWM 103 is provided with a "blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS)" as a flag for determining whether the light is off or off.
On the other hand, the gaming machine information notification timer A measures "300" ms, which is the same as the blinking switching cycle, but is in a timer area separate from the blinking switching time.

In the following description, the storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer A, the storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer B, and the storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer C are simply referred to as the gaming machine information notification timer A and the gaming machine information notification timer, respectively. B, abbreviated as gaming machine information notification timer C.
Further, the value stored in the storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer A, the value stored in the storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer B, and the value stored in the storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer C are simply stored. It is abbreviated as the value of the game machine information notification timer A, the value of the game machine information notification timer B, and the value of the game machine information notification timer C.

In the second embodiment, the CPU 105 of the game medium number control board 100 executes timer interrupt processing every "1" ms. Then, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated every time this timer interrupt is performed (every "1" ms).
The gaming machine information notification timer A is a decrement timer, and as described above, “0” is stored as its value when the power is turned on. The value of the gaming machine information notification timer A circulates in the range of "0" to "300 (D)".
Therefore, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to "0" when the power is turned on, updated to "300" when the first timer interrupt is executed, and "300" when the next timer interrupt is executed. It will be updated to "299".
Furthermore, if "1" is subtracted in the interrupt processing under the condition that the value before the update is "0" such as when the power is turned on, the value is updated to "300", and if the value is subtracted by "1" in the next interrupt processing. Updated to "299".
On the other hand, in interrupt processing where the value before update is "1", when "1" is subtracted, the subtraction result becomes "0", but in this case, "300" is immediately stored in the interrupt processing. Will be done.
therefore,
"0"->"300"->"299"->...->"2"->"1"->("0"->)"300"->"299"-> ...
It will be updated like.

The gaming machine information notification timer B is an increment timer, and as described above, “0” is stored as its value when the power is turned on. The value of the gaming machine information notification timer B circulates in the range of "0" to "199 (D)".
therefore,
"0"->"1"->"2"->...->"198"->"199"->"0"->"1"-> ...
It will be updated like.
The value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is "+1" when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A becomes "300". However, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is initialized when the power is turned on, "0" is stored, and the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A becomes "300" in the first timer interrupt processing. , The value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is not updated and remains "0". This control will be described later.

The gaming machine information notification timer C is an increment timer, and as described above, “0” is stored as its value when the power is turned on. The value of the gaming machine information notification timer C circulates in the range of "0" to "2 (D)".
therefore,
"0"->"1"->"2"->"0"->"1"-> ...
It will be updated like.
The value of the gaming machine information notification timer C is "+1" when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "0". However, when "0" is stored because the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is initialized when the power is turned on, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C also remains the initialized "0". Yes, it is not updated to "1" at this point.

The gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is the timing for notifying the gaming machine performance information (timing every 180 seconds) and the timing for notifying the gaming machine installation information (timing every 60 seconds). It is a flag indicating whether or not it exists, and is provided as a 1-byte storage area in the RWM 103 of the gaming medium number control board 100.
The initial value (all bits "0") of the gaming machine information notification request flag is stored by the initialization process when the power is turned on.
The gaming machine information notification request flag includes a gaming machine performance information notification request flag and a gaming machine installation information notification request flag.

The gaming machine performance information notification request flag is a flag that changes from "0" to "1" when the cycle (timing) for transmitting the gaming machine performance information of the gaming machine information notification arrives, and is a gaming machine information notification request. Use the "D0" bit of the flag. When the "D0" bit is "1", it indicates that the cycle for transmitting the gaming machine performance information has arrived, and when it is "0", the cycle for transmitting the gaming machine performance information has not arrived. Is shown. Further, when the gaming machine performance information notification is transmitted, it is updated from "1" to "0".
Further, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is a flag that changes from "0" to "1" when the cycle (timing) for transmitting the gaming machine installation information comes in the gaming machine information notification, and the gaming machine information. Use the "D1" bit of the notification request flag. When the "D0" bit is "1", it indicates that the cycle for transmitting the gaming machine installation information has arrived, and when it is "0", the cycle for transmitting the gaming machine installation information has not arrived. Is shown. Further, when the notification of the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, it is updated from "1" to "0".
It is also possible to set the gaming machine performance information notification request flag as a 1-byte storage area and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag as another 1-byte storage area. However, as in the present embodiment, the game machine information notification request flag is provided as a 1-byte storage area, and the game machine performance information notification request flag and the game machine installation information notification request flag are assigned to the bits of this 1-byte storage area. For example, the storage capacity can be reduced.

FIG. 40 is a time chart showing an update sequence of each value of the gaming machine information notification timers A, B, and C.
In FIG. 40, the gaming machine information notification including the hall control / fraud monitoring information based on the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is referred to as “notification A”, and includes the gaming machine installation information based on the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B. The gaming machine information notification is referred to as "notification B", and the gaming machine information notification including the gaming machine performance information based on the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C is referred to as "notification C".
First, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the initialization process of the RWM 103 of the gaming medium number control board 100 is executed, whereby the values of the gaming machine information notification timers A, B, and C are cleared (). "0" is stored).

The CPU 105 of the game medium number control board 100 includes a flag register (F register). The flag register includes a carry flag (CY) and a zero flag (Z). The flag register also includes flags other than these flags, but the description thereof will be omitted in the present embodiment.
The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when it becomes less than "0" as a result of arithmetic processing, in other words, when a carry occurs.
Further, the zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when it becomes "0" as a result of arithmetic processing.

Specific examples of the carry flag and the zero flag are as follows.
Example 1) If the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is subtracted by "1" when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "10", the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated to "9". At this time, the zero flag and the carry flag do not change (remain at "0").
Example 2) If the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is subtracted by "1" when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "1", the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated to "0". As a result, the zero flag becomes "1". On the other hand, the carry flag does not change (remains "0"). Here, in the arithmetic processing of the present embodiment, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" and the zero flag becomes "1", immediately after that ("1" is set. As a result of the subtraction, it is updated to "300" (during the interrupt processing updated to "0").

Example 3) If the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is subtracted by "1" when the value is "0", the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated to "300". At this time, the zero flag does not change (it remains "0"). On the other hand, the carry flag is "1".
The value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before subtraction is "0" only when it is initialized after the power is turned on. Therefore, the carry flag becomes "1" when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "0" to "300" in the first interrupt processing after the power is turned on.

When either the carry flag or the zero flag becomes "1" as a result of updating the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A, it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can transmit the notification A to the rental unit 200. In FIG. 40, after the gaming machine information notification timer A is initialized to "0" by turning on the power, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "0" to "300" by the first interrupt processing. It is shown that the notification A is transmitted when the carry flag (CY) becomes "1" ("* 1" in the figure).

Next, an interrupt is executed every "1" ms, and the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated to "299", "298", ..., But either the carry flag or the zero flag is " If it does not become 1 ”, it is not determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived, so that the notification A is not transmitted. Since "60" seconds and "180" seconds are also multiples of "300" ms, naturally, notification B and notification C are not transmitted either.
As described above, the carry flag is set to "1" by updating the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A only in the first interrupt processing after the power is turned on, but after that, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set. The carry flag will not be set to "1" by updating.

When the number of interrupts reaches "300" (that is, after "300" ms) from the time when the first notification A is transmitted ("* 1" in the figure), the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is , "1" is updated to "0" (further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1". Therefore, it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived. As a result, the gaming machine 10 transmits the notification A to the lending unit 200 (“* 2” in the figure).

Next, when the number of interrupts reaches "6000" from the time of transmission of the first notification A ("* 1" in the figure), that is, when "60" seconds have elapsed, the timer value or the like is updated as follows. ..
First, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" (further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1"("*3" in the figure. "). Therefore, it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived.
Second, the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated from "199" to "0". When the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated to "0", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification B has arrived, and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is "1". Will be updated to.

At this point, the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived, and the transmission timing of the notification B has arrived. Therefore, since the notification B is transmitted with priority over the notification A, the notification B is transmitted at this timing (“* 4” in the figure). When the notification B is transmitted, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is updated to "0".
Then, after "300" ms has elapsed from that timing, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated again from "1" to "0" (further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) is set to "1". become. Based on the fact that the zero flag (Z) becomes "1", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived, and the notification A is transmitted ("* 5" in the figure).

As described above, when the transmission of the notification B is prioritized at the transmission timing of "* 3" in the figure, the notification A is not transmitted at that timing, and "* 5" after "300" ms has elapsed from that timing. Notification A is transmitted at the timing of.
Here, when the notification A is transmitted at the timing of "* 5" in the figure, the hall control / fraud monitoring information acquired immediately before the transmission is stored in a predetermined transmission register, and the hall control / fraud monitoring is stored. A gaming machine information notification containing information is transmitted.
In other words, after the hall control / fraud monitoring information is acquired at the transmission timing of "* 3" in the figure and stored in the predetermined transmission register, the hall control / fraud monitoring is performed at the timing of "* 5" in the figure. No information is sent.

When it is determined that the notification A is not transmitted at the transmission timing of "* 3" in the figure, the hall controller / fraud monitoring information at that time may be configured not to be stored in the predetermined transmission register. However, due to the simplification of processing, when the transmission timing of the notification A arrives, the hall control / fraud monitoring information at that time is uniformly stored in the predetermined transmission register. Then, every "300" ms, in other words, every time the zero flag (Z) becomes "1", the hall controller / fraud monitoring information at that time may be stored (overwritten) in a predetermined transmission register.

Next, when the number of interrupts reaches "18000" from the time of transmission of the first notification A ("* 1" in the figure), that is, when "180" seconds have elapsed, the timer value or the like is updated as follows. ..
First, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" (further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1"("*6" in the figure). ). Based on the fact that the zero flag (Z) becomes "1", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived.

Second, the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated from "199" to "0". When the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated to "0", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification B has arrived, and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is "1". Is updated to ("* 7" in the figure).
Third, the gaming machine information notification timer C is updated from "2" to "0". When the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C is updated to "0", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification C has arrived, and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) is "1". Is updated to ("* 8" in the figure).

At this point, the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived, the transmission timing of the notification B has arrived, and the transmission timing of the notification C has arrived. Therefore, the transmission timings of the notification A, the notification B, and the notification C all overlap. In this case, since the notification B is transmitted with the first priority, the notification B is transmitted at this timing (“* 7” in the figure). In other words, notification A and notification C are not transmitted at that timing. When the notification B is transmitted, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is updated to "0". Since the notification C has not been transmitted at this point, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) remains “1”.

When "300" ms elapses from this timing and the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification arrives, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" (further updated to "300"). , The zero flag (Z) becomes "1"("*9" in the figure). Based on the fact that the zero flag (Z) becomes "1", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived.
Further, at this timing, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) is set to "1". Therefore, the transmission timing of the notification C has arrived. Then, when the transmission timings of the notification A and the notification C overlap, the transmission of the notification C has priority, so that the notification C is transmitted (“* 10” in the figure). In other words, the notification A is not transmitted at that timing. When the notification C is transmitted, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) is updated to "0".

When "300" ms has elapsed from this point, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated from "1" to "0" (further updated to "300"), and the zero flag (Z) becomes "1". ("* 11" in the figure). Based on the fact that the zero flag (Z) becomes "1", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived. Further, at this point, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) are both "0", so that it is not the transmission timing of the notification B and the notification is made. It is not the transmission timing of C. Therefore, at this timing, the notification A is transmitted (“* 11” in the figure).

When the notification A is transmitted at the timing of "* 11" in the figure, the pachinko / fraud monitoring information acquired immediately before the transmission is stored in a predetermined transmission register, and includes the pachinko / fraud monitoring information. A gaming machine information notification is sent. In other words, it is not the hall control / fraud monitoring information acquired at the timing of "* 6" or "* 9" in the figure.

As described above, when either the carry flag or the zero flag becomes "1", it is determined that the transmission timing of the notification A has arrived.
Therefore, in the above-mentioned combination monitor 113, the control for switching between lighting and extinguishing when the carry flag becomes “0” as a result of updating the blinking switching time is different.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing game machine information management.
Here, the "game machine information management" is a control process for transmitting the game machine information notification from the game machine 10 to the rental unit 200. The process of FIG. 41 is one subroutine in the timer interrupt process executed by the game medium number control board 100. In other words, the gaming machine information management is executed every time the timer interrupt processing is executed (at a cycle of "1" ms).
First, in step S721, "1" is subtracted from the gaming machine information notification timer A (the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated). Next, the process proceeds to step S722, and it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is “0”. When the carry flag becomes "1" in the subtraction process of step S721, it is determined that the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "0". Since the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update was "0", the carry flag is set to "1" because the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to "0" when the power is turned on. Corresponds to the case where "1" is subtracted after (initialized). If it is determined that the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "0", the process proceeds to step S733, and if it is determined that the timer A is not "0", the process proceeds to step S723.

In step S723, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is “1”. In other words, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A has become "0" due to the update, and in other words, whether or not the zero flag has become "1" due to the update. When it is determined that the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "1", the process proceeds to step S724, and when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
When the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "1", it means that it is the timing of the "300" ms cycle, that is, the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification including the hall computer / fraud monitoring information. ..

On the other hand, when it is not the transmission timing of the notification A, it is not the timing of the "300" ms cycle, so it is neither the transmission timing of the "60" second cycle nor the transmission timing of the "180" second cycle. In other words, it is neither the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification including the gaming machine installation information nor the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information including the gaming machine performance information. Therefore, when it is determined that it is not the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information including the hall control / fraud monitoring information, whether or not it is the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification including the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information are included. The game machine information management is terminated without determining whether or not it is the transmission timing of the game machine installation information. As a result, the program processing can be simplified and the game machine information management can be speeded up.

In step S724, the initial value is saved in the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A. Here, the initial value is "300 (D)". Since the timer interrupt cycle of the gaming medium number control board 100 in the present embodiment is "1" ms, by storing "300 (D)" as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A, "300" ms Counting is possible. Therefore, when the calculation result becomes "0" by the subtraction in step S721, "300" is immediately stored in step S724.
For example, when the timer interrupt cycle of the gaming medium number control board 100 is "2" ms, "150 (D)" may be stored in the gaming machine information notification timer A.
Further, for example, when the timer interrupt cycle of the gaming medium number control board 100 is set to "2.235" ms, a value in the range of "135" to "138" should be stored in the gaming machine information notification timer A. Just do it. In this way, when the "transmission cycle of the gaming machine information notification / timer interrupt cycle" does not become an integer (when it is not divisible), the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification is between "300" ms and "310" ms. Any value can be set as the initial value.

As the operation instruction in step S721 described above, a DCPWLD instruction can be mentioned. The DCPWLD instruction is an instruction to store a predetermined value when the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtracting "1". The predetermined value in this embodiment is "300". Therefore, after the game machine information notification timer A is initialized to "0" after the power is turned on, when "1" is subtracted in step S721 in the game machine information management process in the first interrupt process, the carry The flag becomes "1" and a predetermined value "300" is stored.
In this way, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to "0" by the initialization process at the time of turning on the power, but other than that, except for the period after the process of step S721 and before the process of step S724. The value of the gaming machine information notification timer A never becomes "0" (except when an abnormality occurs).

In the next step S725, a process of adding "1" to the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is executed. A special addition instruction is used for the addition process here. Specifically, when a value less than "199" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B, "1" is added to the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B, and the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is set. When it is not less than "199" (that is, when "199" is stored under normal operating conditions), it is an arithmetic process for storing "0" in the gaming machine information notification timer B.

Specific examples are as follows.
Example 1) When "0" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B, when the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" is performed, the result becomes "1".
Example 2) When "100" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B and the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "101". Become.
Example 3) When "199" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B and the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" is performed, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "200". It becomes "0" instead of "". For example, in FIG. 40 described above, it corresponds to the calculation at the timing of “* 4”.

In this way, when the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer B is performed, "0" to "199" can be circulated as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B. can.
Further, the situation in which "1" is added when "199" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B means that the opportunity for the gaming machine information notification timer A to become "0" has arrived "200" times. Corresponds to the situation. In other words, since the gaming machine information notification timer B is incremented by "1" every time the interrupt processing is executed "300" times, the interrupt processing of "300 times x 200 times = 60,000 times" is executed ( "60" seconds have passed).

Originally, a storage area of "2" bytes must be provided in order to measure whether or not "60,000" interrupt processes have been executed. However, by updating the gaming machine information notification timer B based on the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A, the storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer B can be set to "1" bytes, and the storage capacity of the RWM 103 can be increased. Can be reduced.
Further, as an operation instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer B, an ICPLD instruction can be mentioned.
In the above example, the instruction to add "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer B is executed, but the instruction to subtract "1" may be used. In the case of a subtraction command, "200" may be stored as an initial value in the gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and then "200" may be stored when the value becomes "0". Alternatively, "199" may be stored as an initial value in the gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and then "200" may be stored when the carry flag becomes "1".

Further, since the update of the game machine information notification timer B is used as the addition command, the process of setting the initial value can be omitted as compared with the case of the subtraction command (the initial value is "0" due to the initialization process at the time of turning on the power). Therefore, the processing speed can be improved and the program capacity can be reduced.

In step S726, it is determined whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed. Here, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes “0” by adding “1”, it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed. On the other hand, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B does not become "0" due to the addition of "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has not elapsed.
When it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S727, and when it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S731.
In step S727, a process of adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C is executed.
A special addition instruction is used for the addition process here. Specifically, when a value less than "2" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B, "1" is added to the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C, and the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C is set. When it is not less than "2" (that is, when "3" is stored under normal operating conditions), it is an arithmetic process for storing "0" in the gaming machine information notification timer C.

Specific examples are as follows.
Example 1) When "0" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer C and the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" is performed, the result becomes "1".
Example 2) When "1" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer C and the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "2". Become.
Example 3) When "2" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer C and the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" is performed, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "3". It becomes "0" instead of "". For example, in FIG. 40 described above, it corresponds to the calculation at the timing of “* 8”.

In this way, when the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C is performed, "0" to "2" can be circulated as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C. can.
Further, in the situation where "1" is added when "2" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer C, the opportunity for the gaming machine information notification timer B to become "0" has arrived "3" times. Corresponds to the situation. In other words, the gaming machine information notification timer B is added by "1" every time the interrupt processing is executed "300" times, and the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated every "200" times. Since "1" is added to C, the interrupt processing of "300 times x 200 times x 3 times = 180,000 times" is executed ("180" seconds have elapsed).

Originally, in order to measure whether or not "180000" interrupt processing has been executed, a storage area of "3" bytes must be provided, but based on the value of the game machine information notification timer A. Since the value of the game machine information notification timer B is updated and the value of the game machine information notification timer C is updated based on the value of the game machine information notification timer B, the storage area of the game machine information notification timer C is set to "1". It can be a byte, and the storage capacity of the RWM 103 can be reduced.
Further, as an operation instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C, the above-mentioned ICPLD instruction can be mentioned.
In the above example, the instruction to add "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C is executed, but it may be a subtraction instruction. In the case of the subtraction command, the initial value "3" may be stored as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, and then "3" may be stored when the value becomes "0". Alternatively, the initial value "2" may be stored as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, and then "3" may be stored when the carry flag becomes "1".

However, if the update of the game machine information notification timer C is used as an addition command as in the present embodiment, the process of setting the initial value can be omitted as compared with the case of using the subtraction command (initialization process at power-on). Therefore, the initial value becomes "0"), so that the processing speed can be improved and the program capacity can be reduced.

In step S728, it is determined whether or not the time of the game machine information notification timer C has elapsed. Here, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "0" by adding "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed. On the other hand, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C does not become "0" due to the addition of "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has not elapsed.
When it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S729, and when it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S730.

It should be noted that the process of step S727 is executed only when it is determined as "Yes" in step S726. This is because the timing for updating the gaming machine information notification timer C is limited to when the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes “0”. Further, in the next step S728, it is determined whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed only when it is determined as "Yes" in step S726. Whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed depends on whether or not the cycle of "180" seconds has arrived, and the cycle of "180" seconds always arrives in the cycle of "60" seconds. Is coming (the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed).

In step S729, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag. In the next step S730, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag.
That is, when it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed, it means that the cycle of "180" seconds has arrived, and the cycle of "180" seconds includes the cycle of "60" seconds. Therefore, the timing for notifying the gaming machine performance information has arrived, and the timing for notifying the gaming machine installation information has arrived. Therefore, both the "D0" and "D1" bits of the gaming machine information notification request flag are set to "1".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S726 that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed and the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has not elapsed, the cycle is "60" seconds. (Timing to notify the gaming machine installation information) has arrived, but the cycle of "180" seconds (timing to notify the gaming machine performance information) has not arrived. Therefore, in this case, the process of step S729 is not executed, only the process of step S730 is executed, and only the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is set to "1".

In this way, in order to manage the timing of transmitting the gaming machine installation information and the timing of transmitting the gaming machine performance information with the flag, the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information are transmitted. The process to be performed can be simplified. In other words, by interlocking timers corresponding to various information, it is possible to transmit without individual management. Further, since the measurement start timing of the timer for transmitting the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information does not deviate, accurate transmission becomes possible.

In the next step S731, it is determined whether or not there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information. Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set. Therefore, if the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is "1", it is determined that there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information, and the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag must be "1". If so, it is judged that there is no notification request for the gaming machine installation information.
If it is determined that there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information, the process proceeds to step S734, and if it is determined that there is no notification request for the gaming machine installation information, the process proceeds to step S732.
In step S732, it is determined whether or not there is a notification request for the gaming machine performance information. Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set. Therefore, if the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is "1", it is determined that there is a notification request for the gaming machine performance information, and the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag must be "1". If so, it is judged that there is no notification request for the gaming machine performance information.
If it is determined that there is a notification request for the gaming machine performance information, the process proceeds to step S736, and if it is determined that there is no notification request for the gaming machine performance information, the process proceeds to step S733.

In step S733, the hall controller / fraud monitoring information transmission process is executed. Here, the hall controller / fraud monitoring information stored in the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 is acquired, the information is stored in the transmission register, and the information is transmitted. Then, after transmission, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
When it is determined in step S722 that the value before updating the gaming machine information notification timer A is "0", whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B or the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed. The transmission process of the hall controller / fraud monitoring information is executed without executing the determination (process of step S726 or step S728). The reason is that the value before the update of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "0" only at the time of the subtraction processing in the first interrupt processing immediately after the power is turned on. In other words, it is impossible that "60" seconds or "180" seconds have elapsed during the subtraction process in the first interrupt process immediately after the power is turned on. In such a case, by executing the hall control / fraud monitoring information transmission process without executing the determination of whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B or the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed. It is possible to speed up the processing (speed up the transmission processing).

Further, in step S731, it is determined whether or not there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information, and if it is determined that there is no notification request for the gaming machine installation information, the process proceeds to step S732 and there is a notification request for the gaming machine performance information. It is a processing order to judge whether or not. By setting such a processing order, in the situation where both the gaming machine installation information notification request flag and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag are set (the situation where the "180" second cycle has arrived), first By determining whether or not there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information, the transmission processing of the gaming machine installation information can be executed (priority can be given) before the transmission processing of the gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, as described above, in the transmission of the hall control / fraud monitoring information in step S733, the latest information at that time is transmitted.
For example, as for the (total) number of game media included in the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the information stored in the game medium number storage means 103a (_NB_MEDAL) at the time of transmission is transmitted. In other words, if the transmission timing every "300" ms, which is the transmission timing of the hall control / fraud monitoring information, coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information or the gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information or the gaming machine Since the transmission of performance information is prioritized, the hall controller / fraud monitoring information is not transmitted at that timing, and after the next "300" ms has elapsed (when it coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information) or "600" ms. After the lapse of time (when it coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information), the hall control / fraud monitoring information is transmitted. The "hole-con / fraud monitoring information transmitted after" 300 "ms or" 600 "ms has elapsed" is not the hall-con / fraud monitoring information at the time when it coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information, but " It is the hall control / fraud monitoring information acquired at the timing of transmitting the hall control / fraud monitoring information after the lapse of 300 "ms or after the lapse of" 600 "ms. Therefore, even if the transmission timing of the hall control / fraud monitoring information is delayed, the latest information can be transmitted.

In addition, after the transmission processing of the hall control / fraud monitoring information is completed, the serial number is updated (“1” is added). As for the serial number, like the counting serial number, "0" is transmitted as the serial number at the time of transmission immediately after the power is restored, and after that, any one of "1" to "255" can be transmitted ("1" to 25). It is updated (to circulate "255"). This serial number is a serial number that is updated when any one of the three information of hall control / fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information is transmitted. In other words, since the same serial number is used for hall control / fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, the serial number is updated every "300" ms when the power is turned on. It is configured to be.

When the process proceeds from step S731 to step S734, the game machine installation information transmission process is executed. The content to be transmitted at this time is the information stored in the game medium number control board 100 acquired at this timing. Next, the process proceeds to step S735, and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is set to "0". Further, after the transmission processing of the gaming machine installation information is completed, the serial number is updated (“1” is added). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S732 to step S736, the game machine performance information transmission process is executed. The content to be transmitted at this time is the information stored in the game medium number control board 100 acquired at this timing. Next, the process proceeds to step S735, and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is set to "0". Further, after the transmission processing of the gaming machine performance information is completed, the serial number is updated (“1” is added). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Subsequently, the relationship between the gaming machine information notification timers A to C and the information stored in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 will be described.
As described above, each storage area of the game machine information notification timers A to C is provided on the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100. Then, these storage areas are cleared (“0” is stored) by the initialization process when the power is turned on.
On the other hand, the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 is provided with, for example, the following data storage area as the data storage area required for lighting control of the role ratio monitor 113, in addition to the data storage area described above. There is.
"400" game count counter (counter for counting "400" games)
Total number of grants Ring buffer "0" to "14" (each buffer that counts the total number of grants between "400" games)
Number of consecutive bonuses granted Ring buffer "0" to "14" (buffer for counting the number of consecutive bonuses granted between "400" games, respectively)
Number of bonuses granted Ring buffers "0" to "14" (buffers that count the number of bonuses granted between "400" games, respectively)
Total number of games counter (storage area of count value of total number of games)
Advantageous section game count counter (storage area for the number of games in the advantageous section)
Total number of grants counter (storage area of count value of total number of grants)
Instructed number counter (storage area for the number given when the instruction function is activated)
Continuous bonus grant count counter (storage area for the number of grants when the continuous bonus is activated)
Counter for the number of grants (storage area for the number of grants when the bonus is activated)
Instructed accessory ratio data (storage area of the calculated indicated accessory ratio)
Advantageous section ratio data (storage area of the calculated advantageous section ratio)
Continuous bonus ratio data (storage area of the calculated continuous bonus ratio)
Character ratio data (storage area of the calculated character ratio)
Character, etc. state ratio data (calculated storage area for character, etc. state ratio)
Blinking switching time (storage area of count value related to blinking switching time) (described above)
Blinking switching flag (storage area of flag for determining whether to turn on or off) (described above)
The data storage area is a part of the data storage area required for lighting control of the combination monitor 113, and is not limited to the above.

Of the above storage areas, the ring buffer, the game count counter, the grant count counter, and the ratio data storage areas are not initialized by the power on / off or the setting change process. This is because even if the power is turned on / off or the setting change process is performed, the correct ratio display that reflects the past game history is performed.
However, when an unrecoverable error such as an RWM error occurs, all the above storage areas are initialized. This is to prevent leaving invalid data after restoration.
On the other hand, the blinking switching time and the blinking switching flag are initialized (cleared) by turning the power on / off or changing the setting. As a result, the display of the test pattern can be executed for "4800" ms each time the power is turned on. Further, even when the blinking display is performed after the power is turned on, the lighting can be started from the first lighting "3" seconds.

Further, the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is provided with, for example, the following data storage areas in addition to the bet number storage means 53a and the grant number storage means 53b shown in FIG. 29.
Input port level data (data storage area for determining whether each switch is in operation)
Input port rising data (data storage area for determining whether each switch has been operated)
Section type number (storage area of numbers for managing advantageous sections)
MY counter (storage area for difference number)
Prize and replay condition device number (storage area of the number of the prize and replay condition device operated in the game)
Character condition device number (storage area of the number of the character condition device operated in the game)
Minimum game period (timer value storage area for monitoring the minimum game period ("4.1" seconds) of one game)
Game standby display time (timer value storage area that measures the time until transition to game standby)
The above data storage area is a part of the data storage area of the RWM 53, and is not limited to the above.

Further, since the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is a medalless gaming machine, the following storage areas, for example, which are provided in the gaming machine using medals as tangible objects, are not provided.
Blocker signal (blocker on / off storage area)
Hopper motor drive signal (hopper motor on / off storage area)
Payout sensor check time (timer value storage area for detecting medal jam)
Blocker monitoring time (timer value storage area indicating the standby time for blocker on / off)
Medal payout control time (timer value storage area indicating the control time of the medal payout device)

In the above storage area of the RWM 53, for example, the minimum gaming time is not initialized by turning the power on / off. Therefore, when the power is turned off during the first measurement of the game time, when the power is turned on after that, the measurement of the minimum game time is restarted, and when it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, the game is started. The start (start of rotation of the reel 31) is permitted.
Therefore, the minimum gaming time and the gaming machine information notification timers A to C are common in that they both store timer values for measuring the time, but whether or not they are initialized by turning the power on / off. Is different.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 can communicate with each other via the game medium number control board 100 and the connection terminal board 130, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board 50 and the connection terminal board are not limited to this. The 130 may be connected so that the gaming machine 10 and the rental unit 200 can communicate with each other via the main control board 50 and the connection terminal board 130. If the configuration is as described above and the game medium number control board 100 is not mounted, the production cost can be reduced.
In this case, the main control board 50 performs all the processing controlled by the game medium number control board 100. Further, when the function of the main control board 50 and the function of the game medium number control board 100 are realized on the same board, the functions of the CPU 55 that controls the function of the main control board 50 and the function of the game medium number control board 100 are controlled. By separately providing the CPU 105, it is possible to realize the same processing as that of the above-described embodiment.

(2) In the above embodiment, the gaming machine installation information transmitted every "60" seconds is given first priority, and then the gaming machine performance information transmitted every "180" seconds is given second priority. However, this is an example, for example, when the gaming machine information notification 1 transmitted every "T1" second and the gaming machine information notification 2 transmitted every "T2" second (T2> T1) are provided. The specification may be such that the information notification 2 is transmitted with priority over the gaming machine information notification 1.

(3) The storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 and the RWM 103 of the game medium number control board 100 is generally divided into a used area and a non-used area.
Here, "in the used area" refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM for storing data related to the progress of the game.
On the other hand, "outside the used area" refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM for storing data not related to the progress of the game.
Therefore, since the data related to the display control of the combination monitor 113 is not related to the progress of the game, it is generally stored outside the used area of the RWM.
For example, when the display control of the combination monitor is executed on the main control board 50, the data related to the display control of the combination monitor is stored outside the used area of the RWM 53. This makes it possible to try to squeeze the storage capacity in the used area of the RWM53.

However, not limited to this, when the display control of the combination monitor 113 is executed by the game medium number control board 100, the storage capacity in the used area of the RWM 103 may be compressed by the data related to the display control of the combination monitor 113. It is also possible to provide a data storage area related to the display control of the role ratio monitor 113 in the used area of the RWM 103.
(4) In the above embodiment, the slot machine (rotary body type gaming machine) is shown as an example of the gaming machine 10, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be applied to various gaming models such as casino machines. Is.

<Third Embodiment>
The third embodiment relates to the structure of the main CPU 55 and instructions. In the third embodiment, the RWM 53, the ROM 54, and the main CPU 55 are provided on the main control board 50 as in the first embodiment.
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the built-in memory of the main CPU 55 in the third embodiment. In the figure, (A) is a diagram showing an outline of the built-in memory, and (B) is a diagram showing a built-in register area among the storage areas in the built-in memory. FIG. 42 shows only the portion of the built-in memory according to the present embodiment, and does not show all of the built-in memory.
In the ROM 54 area, the first program area and the first data area correspond to the used area (the area for storing the program and data related to the progress of the game), and the second program area and the second data area are. , Out of use area (area for storing programs and data not related to the progress of the game. For example, an area for storing programs and data related to display control of the combination monitor and programs and data related to output control of test signals. .) Corresponds to.
The "program area" is also referred to as a "control area".

The ROM 54 has a range of addresses "0000h" to "2FFFh" and has a storage area of "12K" bytes. In this storage area, the first program area is set to "4.5K" bytes, and the first data area is set to "3.0K" bytes.
Further, in the RWM53, the first work area and the first stack area are used (updated, referenced) during the execution of the first program (program related to the progress of the game) stored in the first program area. It is a storage area. Similarly, the second work area and the second stack area are used during the execution of the second program (a program not related to the progress of the game, for example, a program related to the display of the combination monitor) stored in the second program area. Storage area to be (updated, referenced).
Further, in the first program stored in the first program area, the data in the second work area and the second stack area cannot be updated, but the data in the second work area and the second stack area can be referred to. ..
Similarly, in the second program stored in the second program area, the data in the first work area and the first stack area cannot be updated, but the data in the first work area and the first stack area can be referred to. be.

Further, the built-in register area (synonymous with the built-in register area) includes register bank 0 and register bank 1. A main register (front register) and a sub register (back register) are provided in each register bank. The main register includes a so-called general-purpose register.
In the following description, the sub-register is omitted, and the term "register" refers to the main register.

Each register in register bank 0 is a register used when executing a program stored in the first program area. Similarly, each register in the register bank 1 is a register used when the program stored in the second program area is being executed. For example, the A register, the F register, and the like are provided in both the register bank 0 and the register bank 1, respectively. In other words, the A register in register bank 0 and the A register in register bank 1 are different registers.

The A register is an accumulator.
The F register is a flag register, and its structure will be described later.
The B, C, D, E, H, and L registers are general-purpose registers.
The IX and IY registers are index registers and are used, for example, when specifying an address.
The SP register is a stack pointer register. The SP register is a register that specifies to which address the data is saved when the data is saved in the stack area, and which address the data is returned when the data is returned from the stack area.
Specifically, the SP register of the register bank 0 specifies the address of the first stack area (range of "F1D0h" to "F1FFh"). Similarly, the SP register of the register bank 1 specifies the address of the second stack area (range of "F3E8h" to "F3FFh").

In addition to the register banks 0 and 1, I, R, PC, and IFF registers are provided.
The I register is an interrupt resist and is used when executing interrupt processing.
The R register is a refresh register and is used for refreshing the RWM53.
The PC register is a program counter and is a register that holds the currently executing address in the memory.

The IFF register is an interrupt enable register. The IFF register is composed of an IFF1 register that determines whether to enable or disable a non-maskable interrupt (INT) and an IFF2 register that restores IFF1 after processing a non-maskable interrupt (NMI). The IFF2 register is used not only for returning from the non-maskable interrupt process but also for returning by the RETEX instruction (described later) after the execution of the CALLEX instruction (described later).
Further, when a non-markable interrupt is accepted or a CALLEX instruction is executed, the IFF1 register is cleared (set to a value that prohibits interrupt processing (“0”)), masqueradable interrupts are prohibited, and the IFF2 register is in the state at this time (non-markable). Whether the interrupt was disabled or the interrupt was enabled when the interrupt was accepted or the CALLEX instruction was executed) is held. Further, by executing the RET instruction or the RETEX instruction, the IFF2 register value is moved to the IFF1 register, and the masqueradable interrupt acceptance state is returned to the previous state.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of the F register. The F register is composed of 1 byte (8 bits, represented by "D0" to "D7" in the figure). The structure of the F register is as follows.
(1) D0 bit: Carry flag (C)
The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" if a carry or a carry occurs as a result of the operation, and becomes "0" if a carry or a carry does not occur as a result of the operation.
(2) D1 bit: subtraction flag (N)
The subtraction flag is also referred to as a subtract flag. If the instruction executed immediately before is a subtraction instruction, it will be "1", and if it is not a subtraction instruction, it will be "0".

(3) D2 bit: Parity / overflow flag (P / V)
The parity / overflow flag is a flag that becomes "1" if the number of bits (parity) of "1" is even in the calculation result, and becomes "0" if the number of bits is odd. Further, it is a flag that becomes "1" when an overflow occurs as a result of the calculation, and becomes "0" when an overflow does not occur.
(4) D3 bit: Register bank monitor (RB)
The register bank monitor is a flag that becomes "0" while the register bank 0 is in use and becomes "1" when the register bank 1 is in use. Therefore, by referring to the D3 bit of the F register, it is possible to determine whether the register bank in use is 0 or 1.

(5) D4 bit: Half carry flag (H)
The half-carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when there is a carry from the lower 4 bits to the upper 4 bits at the time of calculation, and becomes "0" when there is no carry.
(6) D5 bit: 2nd zero flag (TZ)
The second zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the operation result is "0", and becomes "0" when the operation result is not "0".
(7) D6 bit: Zero flag (Z)
Similar to the above, the zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the operation result is "0", and becomes "0" when the operation result is not "0".
(8) D7 bit: Sign flag (S)
The sign flag is a flag that becomes "0" if the operation result is positive (plus) and "1" if the calculation result is negative (minus).

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a stack area in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 42, the RWM 53 includes a first stack area (“F1D0h” to “F1FFh”) for the first program and a second stack area (“F3E8h” to “F3FFh”) for the second program. To prepare for.
As described above, when data is stored in the first stack area (also referred to as stacking, saving, stacking, etc.), the data is stacked in ascending order (reverse order) from the final address. For example, when 2 bytes of data are first stacked in the first stack area, the data is stored in "F1FFh" and "F1FEh".
The same applies to the second stack area as described above, and stacking is performed in order from the final address (F3FFh).

Further, among the stack areas, the SP register stores a value indicating to which address the data is to be stacked. As shown in FIG. 42, the SP register is provided in both the register banks 0 and 1, and stores which address in the first stack area the SP register in the register bank 0 loads the data. Similarly, the SP register in the register bank 1 stores which address in the second stack area the data is loaded on.

As shown in FIG. 44, the initial value "F200h" is stored in the SP register of the register bank 0 by the instruction of "LD SP, F200h" when the power is turned on.
Next, some program (CALL instruction (also referred to as "first call instruction"), CALLEX instruction (also referred to as "second call instruction"), PUSH instruction (also referred to as "register save instruction"), etc. ) Is executed and data is loaded in the 2-byte area of "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" in the first stack area, the SP register value of the register bank 0 is updated to "F1FEh". The example of FIG. 44 shows an example in which "CALL mn" is executed.
Next, when calling the data stored in the "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" of the first stack area, some program (RET instruction (also referred to as "first return instruction"), RETEX instruction ("second"). (Also referred to as a "return instruction"), a POP instruction (also referred to as a "register return instruction"), etc.) is executed. Then, the instruction calls up the data stored in the 2-byte storage areas of "F1FEh" and "F1FFh". For example, the RET instruction (example in FIG. 44) returns to the instruction after CALL (returns to the program of the program counter stored in the stack area (returns to the program at the return address)), and the SP register value of register bank 0 is set. It is updated from "F1FEh" to "F200h".

The same applies to the second stack area.
The initial value "F400h" is stored in the SP register of the register bank 1 by the instruction of "LD SP, F400h" when the power is turned on.
Next, when some program (CALL instruction, PUSH instruction, etc.) is executed and data is loaded on the "F3FFh" of the second stack area, the SP register value of the register bank 1 is updated to "F1FFh". ..
Next, when calling the data stored in the "F3FFh" of the second stack area, some program (RET instruction, RETEX instruction, POP instruction, etc.) is executed. Then, the instruction stores the data stored in the 1-byte storage area of "F3FFh", returns to the instruction after CALL by the RET instruction or the RETEX instruction, and the SP register value of the register bank 1 changes from "F3FFh" to "F3FFh". It will be updated to "F400h".

Here, the details of the instruction will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the CALLEX instruction is an instruction possessed by the first program (when the register bank is 0) and is included in the second program (when the register bank is 1). It is an instruction that does not exist.
Further, the RETEX instruction is an instruction that the first program (when the register bank is 0) does not have, and is an instruction that the second program (when the register bank 1 is) has.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a main instruction in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, there are thousands of types of instructions, of which FIG. 45 shows three typical types.
In the figure, (A) shows an LDF instruction.
In FIG. 45, first, the opcode and the operand in the instruction statement will be described.
As shown in (A) in the figure, when the instruction is "LDF HL, mn", the first half "LDF" is called an opcode (function) and the second half "HL, mn" is called an operand (argument). There is. The LDF instruction is an aspect of the LD (load) instruction (a special form. The reason why it is special will be described later). Further, "HL" indicates an HL register, and "mn" indicates an address. The "LDF HL, mn" instruction is an instruction to store the address "mn" value in the HL register.
As will be described later, the LDF instruction is not limited to an instruction instructing to store an address value in a predetermined register, and a predetermined value (however, the “predetermined value” is limited to a predetermined range (described later)). It may be an instruction instructing to store.) In a predetermined register.

Specifically, for example, when "LDF HL, 1200h" is executed,
1200h = 0001/0010/0000/0000 ("/" is inserted every 4 bits. The same shall apply hereinafter.)
Because it is
H register value = 0001/0010
L register value = 0000/0000
Will be.

Furthermore, the LDF instruction is limited to an instruction that stores a value in the range of "1200h" to "1DFF" in a register (HL register in this example). Other load instruction opcodes use "LD" instead of "LDF".
That is,
LDF HL, mn (mn = 1200h-1DFFh)
LD HL, mn (mn ≠ 1200h ~ 1DFFh)
Is.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing modes of the LDF command and the LD command. As shown in FIG. 42, the range of the first data area is the address “1200h” to “1DF3h”. Therefore, in the case of a load instruction that specifies the address of the first data area, all can be executed by the LDF instruction.
On the other hand, the second data area is in the range of the addresses "2600h" to "2FBEh". Therefore, in the case of the load instruction that specifies the address of the second data area, the opcode "LDF" cannot be used, and the opcode "LD" is used.
In FIG. 46, (A) shows an LDF instruction for designating a range (first data area) of addresses "1200h" to "1DF3h", and (B) is a range of addresses "2600h" to "2FBEh" (No. 1). 2 Indicates an LD instruction that specifies the data area).

Further, the load instruction is not limited to an instruction for storing a predetermined address value in a predetermined register, but is also used for an instruction for storing, for example, any register value in any other register.
FIG. 46C shows “LDF HL, xy” which is an instruction to store a predetermined value “xy” (within the range of “1200h” to “1DFFh”) in the HL register by using the LDF instruction. As described above, when the value of "xy" is in the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", the LDF instruction can also be used for the instruction to store the value in the predetermined register.
For example, in the case of an instruction to store the timer value “5000 (D)” (1388h) in the HL register, it becomes “LDF HL, 1388h”.
Furthermore, FIG. 46 (D) is an instruction for storing a predetermined register value (HL register value in this example) in another predetermined register (A register in this example) using the LD instruction. (HL) ”is shown. In an instruction to copy a predetermined register value to another predetermined register, if the predetermined register value or the predetermined value of the copy source is out of the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", (LDF instruction). The LD instruction (rather than) is used.

Further, all the instructions such as "LDF HL, mn" and "LD HL, mn" are actually encoded and stored in the program area of the ROM 54.
Here, in the third embodiment, the code size of "LDF HL, mn" is 2 bytes, and the code size of "LD HL, mn" is 3 bytes.
First, in the case of the instruction of "LDF HL, mn", the range of "mn" is "1200h" to "1DFFh", but "1200h" and "1DFFh" (both are hexadecimal numbers) are 10 respectively. Expressed in decimal and binary,
1200h = 4608 (D) = 0001/0010/0000/0000 (B)
1DFFh = 7679 (D) = 0001/111/1111/1111 (B)
Will be.

When "1200h" is set to the reference value "0", "1DFFh" becomes "3070 (D)" or "1011/11111 / 1110 (B)" (12 bits).
Therefore, in the operation code for designating the address value in the LDF instruction, "1200h" is set to the value "0". As a result, 12 bits are sufficient to specify the address value "mn" (mn = "1200h" to "1DFFh").

It is also assumed that all the numbers of instructions are, for example, "3000" and that each instruction is assigned a unique value.
in this case,
3000 (D) = 1011/1011/1000 (B) (12 bits)
Therefore, it can be assigned to "0000/0000/0000 (B)" to "1011/1011/1000 (B)".
Then, in the case of a particularly important instruction, specifically, for example, a frequently used instruction, a small value is assigned. In the present embodiment, the code value of "LDF HL" is assigned to "1101" (4 bits).
Therefore, since "LDF HL" is 4 bits and "mn" is 12 bits, the total is 16 bits, that is, 2 bytes. Therefore, the code size of "LDF HL, mn (mn = 1200h to 1DFFh)" is 2 bytes.

On the other hand, among the load instructions, when the range of "mn" is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", especially when the range of the second data area "2600h" to "2FBEh" is specified, the following become that way.
Of the range of the second data area, the one with the largest address value is "2FBEh".
"2FBEh"-"1200h"
= 1DBEh
= 1/101/1101/1110 (B)
And it becomes 13 bits.
That is, when "1200h" is set to the reference value "0" as described above, "2FBEh" can be represented by 13 bits.
Therefore, when "LD HL" is encoded, it is set to 4 bits as in the above "LDF HL", and for "LD HL, mn" (mn ≠ 1200h to 1DFFh), "4 + 13 = 17 bits (3 bytes)". It is represented by.

Further, even in the case of the above-mentioned other load instructions such as "LDA, (HL)", the code size is set to 3 bytes in the same manner as described above.
If the code size of "LD HL, mn" is 3 bytes, "LD HL" does not necessarily have to be 4 bits, and if it is 11 bits or less, "mn" (mn ≠ 1200h). Since ~ 1DFFh) is 13 bits, the total of these can be contained within 24 bits (3 bytes).

From the above, in the third embodiment, the code size of the load instruction is
LDF HL, mn (mn = 1200h to 1DFFh): 2 bytes (16 bits)
LD HL, mn (mn ≠ 1200h to 1DFFh): 3 bytes (17 bits)
LD A, (HL) (“A” and “HL” are optional): 3 bytes.
As a result, the code size of "LDF HL, mn (mn = 1200h to 1DFFh)" that specifies the address of the first data area and stores it in the HL register can be one byte smaller than the code size of other load instructions. Therefore, it is possible to save the storage capacity of the first program area.

In particular, since the program related to the progress of the game is stored in the first program area, the capacity is larger than that of the program stored in the second program area, in other words, the program not related to the progress of the game (program related to the role ratio monitor). Is likely to increase. For example, a lottery process related to a game, a process for shifting a game state, a process for driving a reel, a process for assigning a game value (game medium) according to a game result (a combination of symbols displayed as stopped), etc. , Is running in the first program. Therefore, among the load instructions stored in the first program area, more programs can be stored in the first program area by reducing the code size of the load instructions that call the addresses "1200h" to "1DFFh". It will be possible.
On the other hand, among the programs stored in the second program area, the opcodes of the load instructions that specify the addresses in the second data area are all unified with "LD". As a result, in the program stored in the second program area, the validity of the program source can be confirmed more easily. In other words, it is possible to design the program with an emphasis on the visibility of the program rather than the reduction of the program capacity (code size).

The data area of the ROM 54 referred to in the second program is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh". Therefore, when specifying the address of the data area of the ROM 54 referred to in the second program, "LD HL, mn" (mn ≠ 1200h to 1DFF) is used.

There are a plurality of LD instructions (instructions using LD as an opcode, also referred to as "first load instruction") as instructions constituting the first program, and a plurality of instructions constituting the second program. However, although there are a plurality of LDF instructions (instructions using the LDF as an opcode; also referred to as "second load instruction" or "special load instruction") as instructions constituting the first program, instructions constituting the second program. Not as.
Further, even if it is an LD instruction, it can be an instruction to store 2-byte data in the HL register. However, the code size can be reduced by storing the 2-byte data in the HL register with the LDF instruction. However, in the case of the LDF instruction, the range of 2-byte data is limited.

The above-mentioned LDF command and LD command can be applied not only to various processes in a slot machine (for example, a spinning-type gaming machine under the Fudosan Law) but also to various general-purpose processes in a pachinko gaming machine without any problem. be.
Similar to the slot machine, the pachinko gaming machine also has a first program area and a second program area. The first program area stores programs related to the progress of the game, and the second program area stores the game. Stores a program that is not related to the progress of the game (for example, a program related to a base monitor that displays a base (meaning a value calculated by "number of prize balls paid out / total number of discharges x 100". The same shall apply hereinafter)). .. Therefore, the capacity of the first program area tends to increase more easily than that of the second program area. Therefore, the capacity compression effect can be expected by adopting the LDF instruction for the program stored in the first program area.

The programs stored in the first program area of the pachinko gaming machine include, for example, processing related to winning / failing lottery, processing related to control of stopping fluctuation of special symbols, processing related to display of special symbols or ordinary symbols, and game information (game information). For processing related to display of game status, error status, base, etc., processing related to jackpot control, processing related to movable control of various movable objects (large winning opening, electric accessory that activates the opening extension function, etc.), payout control Such processing and the like can be mentioned. LDF instructions can be used for these programs.
In particular, there are differences in the process of calculating the display content between the display control of the base monitor of the pachinko gaming machine and the display control of the role ratio monitor of the slot machine, but they are similar in that the game information is finally displayed as data. Display control is performed.
Not limited to the above, it is of course possible to use the LDF instruction in other processes controlled by the main CPU in both the slot machine and the pachinko game.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
FIG. 45B shows a CALLEX instruction. The CALLEX instruction is one of the call (CALL) instructions.
When the "CALLEX mn" command is executed,
(1) Non-maskable interrupts (NMI) and non-maskable interrupts (INT) are prohibited regardless of whether the interrupt is enabled or disabled at that time.
(2) Switch the register bank to "1" and
(3) Call (call) to the address specified by mn
Do that.
In the present embodiment, when the program in the second program area is executed from the program in the first program area, the program in the second program area can be executed by executing the CALLEX instruction.

In the above-mentioned load instruction, either the LDF instruction or the LD instruction is used depending on the range of mn, but in the call instruction of the third embodiment, the CALLEX instruction is used regardless of the range of mn. The CALLEX instruction is used when reading the second program from the first program.
Here, as shown in FIG. 42, the second program area is in the range of the addresses “2000h” to “25FFh”. Then, in the CALLEX instruction, the code size of "CALLEX mn" when calling the range of the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" among the addresses "2000h" to "25FFh" is 2 bytes, and the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". The code size of "CALLEX mn" when calling a range other than "" is configured to be 4 bytes.

Here, the range of the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" is "FFh", that is, 1 byte. In this case, the code value of the address value "2000h" is set to "0h". As a result, the code value when calling the address value "20FFh" can be set to "FFh", so that the code of "mn" can be set regardless of which of the range of the address "2000h" to "20FFh" is called. The size can be set to 1 byte.
Further, when encoding the opcode of "CALLEX", in the third embodiment, the code is set to "0100/1000", that is, 1 byte. Thereby, the code size of "CALLEX mn" (mn = 2000h to 20FFh) can be set to 2 bytes.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an aspect of the CALLEX instruction.
In the figure, (A) shows "CALLEX 2000h". The code value corresponding to "2000h" in this case is "0000/0000" as described above. Further, the code value of "CALLEX" when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh" is "0100/1000". Therefore, the code of "CALLEX 2000h" is
0100/1000/0000/0000
Will be.
When this instruction is executed, the instruction at the address "2000h" in the second program area is called.

Further, (B) in the figure shows "CALLEX 20FFh". The code value corresponding to "20FFh" in this case is "1111 / 1111". Further, as described above, the code value of "CALLEX" when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh" is "0100/1000". Therefore, the code of "CALLEX 20FFh" is
0100/1000/1111/1111
Will be.
When this instruction is executed, the instruction at the address "20FFh" in the second program area is called.

Furthermore, (C) in the figure shows "CALLEX 2100h". Here, when "mn" changes from "20FFh" to "2100h", a carry occurs, "mn" cannot be represented by 1 byte, and the code size of "mn" becomes 2 bytes. When "mn" = "2100h", the code of "mn" is
0000/0001/0000/0000
Will be.

Further, the code of "CALLEX" in this case is also different. The code of "CALLEX" when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh" is set to 1 byte, but when the range of "mn" is "2100h" to "25FFh", it is "CALLEX". 2 bytes instead of 1 byte for the code. As described above, when the opcode is composed of 1 byte, it is limited to 256 out of thousands of instructions, so "CALLEX" when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh". A 1-byte code is assigned as the code of, but if the range of "mn" is not "2000h" to "20FFh", a 2-byte code is assigned as the code of "CALLEX". In the example of FIG. 47, the code of "CALLEX" in this case is
1010/0000/1000/0000
It is supposed to be.
Therefore, the code of "CALLEX mn" when "mn" = "2100h" is
1010/0000/1000/0000/0000/0001/0000/0000
Will be.
When this instruction is executed, the instruction at the address "2100h" in the second program area is called.

Further, (D) in the figure shows "CALLEX 25FFh" (instruction to specify the last address of the second program area). The maximum value when the address of the second program area is specified is "25FFh".
When the code of "2000h" is "0", "25FFh" is
0000/0101/1111/1111
Will be.
Therefore, the code of "CALLEX 25FFh" is
1010/0000/1000/0000/0000/0101/1111/1111
Will be.
When this instruction is executed, the instruction at the address "25FFh" in the second program area is called.

As described above, in the "CALLEX mn" instruction of the third embodiment, if the range of "mn" is within the range of "2000h" to "20FFh", the code size is a 2-byte instruction, and the range of "mn". If is out of the above range, the instruction has a code size of 4 bytes.
Therefore, the more the number of instructions to be called, the more the instructions that the code size can be 2 bytes are increased if they are aggregated within the range of the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". This makes it possible to save the storage capacity of the ROM 54 that stores instructions.
Further, by storing the address when calling the second program from the first program in the range of the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" in the range of the addresses "2000h" to "25FFh" in the second program area. , When checking the second program, it can be easily grasped that the program is called from the first program.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
FIG. 45 (C) shows a RETEX instruction. This RETEX instruction is an instruction corresponding to the conventional return instruction.
The RETEX instruction is
(1) Set the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) and non-maskable interrupt (INT) to the state before the CALLEX instruction.
(2) Switch the register bank to "0" and
(3) Return (RET) (return to the state before CALLEX (next instruction of CALLEX (program at the return address)))
Do that.
This makes it possible to execute the program in the first program area.
If the state at the time of the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt enabled state is set by the RETEX instruction. On the other hand, when the state at the time of the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is set by the RETEX instruction.

In a conventional general call (CALL) / return (RET) instruction, a program is called by a call instruction, the program is executed, and then the return instruction returns after the call instruction.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the program is called by the CALLEX instruction, the program is executed, and then the RETEX instruction returns after the CALLEX instruction.
The above points will be described in more detail.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of a conventional CALL instruction and a RET instruction.
In this example, an example of calling the second program while the first program is being executed is shown.
When calling the second program while the first program is being executed, it is necessary to execute at least the following processing.
"1" Interrupt management processing In order to prevent the processing from becoming complicated, the interrupt processing is prevented from being executed during the execution of the second program.
"2" SP register switching process Since the stack area used in the second program is different from the stack area used in the first program, it is necessary to switch the SP register.
"3" Register management process When a register is used during execution of the second program, it is necessary to take over the register value and prevent it from returning to the first program.

To comply with the above, the program illustrated in FIG. 48 includes the instructions shown below.
First, when the second program is executed while the first program is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited. The interrupt prohibition instruction is a DI instruction in the figure. This is the instruction corresponding to the above "1". The EI instruction, which is an interrupt enable instruction, is paired with the DI instruction, which is an interrupt prohibition instruction. Although the DI instruction can prohibit non-maskable interrupt processing, it cannot prohibit non-maskable interrupt processing (NMI).

After executing the DI instruction, "PUSH AF" is executed in order to save the AF register. This instruction is an instruction corresponding to the above "3". The PUSH instruction is an instruction for storing data in the stack area. That is, the instruction to store the A register value and the F register value in the stack area is executed.
The next "CALL S_CHERR_CHK" command is a command to call "S_CHERR_CHK" (input / payout sensor abnormality management), which is one of the second programs. In this example, "S_CHERR_CHK" is mentioned as the second program.
When this "S_CHERR_CHK" (second program) is terminated, the saved AF register is restored by the "POP AF" instruction. This instruction is an instruction for calling the data in the stack area, and is an instruction corresponding to the above "3". Next, the interrupt processing is permitted by the EI instruction (instruction corresponding to the above "1").

In "S_CHERR_CHK" (second program), "LD (_SB_STACK2), SP" is an instruction (to "2" above) to save (store) the SP register value for the first program to a predetermined address in the second stack area. Corresponding instruction).
The next "LD SP, @ STACK2" is an instruction for setting the SP register for the second program (an instruction corresponding to the above "2").
Next, "PUSH GPR" and "PUSH QI" are executed, respectively, and the registers are saved. Here, "GPR" indicates the type of register to be saved, and corresponds to the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers. Further, since the "GPR" does not include the Q and I registers, "PUSH QI" is executed in addition to the "PUSH GPR" to save the Q and I registers (instruction corresponding to the above "3"). ..

Then, after the execution of the second program, the register and the SP register are restored. The Q and I registers are restored by "POP QI". Further, the "POP GPR" restores the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (these are the instructions corresponding to the above "3").
Next, the SP register is restored by "LD SP, (_SB_STACK2)" (instruction corresponding to the above "2").
Then, the state before the CALL instruction is returned by RET.

As described above, in the general call / return instruction, the instruction corresponding to the above "1" to "3" is used in the first program.
DI
PUSH AF
POP AF
EI
Need to be executed.
Also, in the second program,
LD (), SP
PUSH GPR
PUSH QI
POP QI
POP GPR
LD SP, ()
Need to be executed.

On the other hand, the CALLEX instruction in the present embodiment includes a process of disabling interrupts and a process of switching the register bank from 0 to 1, as described above. Therefore, the program in the second program area can be executed by the CALLEX instruction (1 instruction), and it is not necessary to independently provide an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction) and a register save instruction (PUSH instruction).
Further, the RETEX instruction includes a process of setting the interrupt to the state before the CALLEX instruction and a process of switching the register bank from 1 to 0. Therefore, the program in the first program area can be returned by the RETEX instruction (1 instruction), and the interrupt enable instruction (EI instruction) for returning the interrupt and the instruction for returning the register (POP instruction) are independent. There is no need to provide it.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity.

Furthermore, it is possible to return to the interrupt state of the first program immediately before executing the second program by the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction.
Therefore, if the state immediately before the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the program can be returned to the interrupt enabled state by the RETEX instruction after the execution of the second program.
On the other hand, if the state immediately before the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the program can be returned to the interrupt disabled state by the RETEX instruction after the execution of the second program.

Further, when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the register bank is switched from 0 to 1. Further, when the RETEX instruction is executed, the register bank is switched from 1 to 0.
Therefore, when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F register of the register banks 0 and 1 is updated from "0" to "1". Further, when the RETEX instruction is executed, the D3 bits of the F registers of the register banks 0 and 1 are updated from "1" to "0".
When the CALLEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F register of either register bank 0 or 1 may be updated from "0" to "1".

Further, the data stored in each register of the register banks 0 and 1 is not updated by the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction itself except for the D3 bit of the F register.
This point will be described with a concrete example.
In the following description, the A, B, H, and L registers of register bank 0 are referred to as 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers, respectively.
Further, the A, B, H, and L registers of the register bank 1 are referred to as 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers, respectively.
At present, it is assumed that the following data is stored in each of the registers of register banks 0 and 1.
0A register: 00000001 (B)
0B register: 00000000 (B)
0H register: 111110001 (B)
0L register: 00000001 (B)
1A register: 00000000 (B)
1B register: 000000111 (B)
1H register: 1110010 (B)
1L register: 00000001 (B)

When the CALLEX instruction is executed in this state, the state of using the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers up to that point is switched to the state of using the 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers. Then, immediately before and after the CALLEX instruction, the register values of the 0A, 0B, 0H, 0L, 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers do not change. As mentioned above, only the D3 bit of the F register is updated.
Next, by executing the second program, the 1A, 1H, and 1L registers are used, for example,
1A register: 000000111 (B)
1B register: 000000111 (B)
1H register: 111110001 (B)
1L register: 00000000 (B)
It is assumed that

Then, when the RETEX instruction is executed based on the end of the second program, the values of the above 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers remain unchanged, and the state switches to the state of using the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers. The values of the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers at this point are the values immediately before the CALLEX instruction, that is,
0A register: 00000001 (B)
0B register: 00000000 (B)
0H register: 111110001 (B)
0L register: 00000001 (B)
Is.
The 0H register value is maintained at the value immediately before the CALLEX instruction, and is not replaced with the 1H register value.
Then, when the execution of the first program, for example, the "1" addition process of the 0A register value is executed,
0A register: 000000010 (B)
Will be.

From the above, focusing on the specific register (for example, the A register), when the specific register value immediately before the CALLEX instruction is "x", the specific register value becomes "y" by the execution of the CALLEX instruction. This is because the specific register value is not changed by the CALLEX instruction, but the specific register to be used is changed from the specific register of register bank 0 to the specific register of register bank 1.

Then, it is assumed that the specific register is used and the specific register value is updated from "y" to "y'" by executing the program in the second program area. After that, when the RETEX instruction is executed, the specific register to be used is switched from the specific register of register bank 1 to the specific register of register bank 0. Therefore, the specific register value immediately after the RETEX instruction becomes the value immediately before the CALLEX instruction, that is, "x". Immediately after the RETEX instruction, the specific register value of the register bank 1 remains "y'".

Specifically, the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction described above are used as follows, for example.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the program start (M_PRG_START) in the third embodiment. In FIG. 49, the step numbers peculiar to the third embodiment are underlined.
The program start (M_PRG_START) is the program of the main control board 50 that is executed first after the power is turned on. The program.
When it is determined that there is a power failure / recovery error, the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 or the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.
When it is determined that the setting change mode can be changed, the process proceeds to the initialization process of step S2731, and after this initialization process, the setting change mode can be changed.
On the other hand, when the mode does not shift to the setting change mode and it is determined that there is no power failure / recovery abnormality, the power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721 is performed.

In FIG. 49, when the program start (M_PRG_START) process is started, first, in step S2851, the initial value is set in the SP register of the register bank 0. When the power is turned on, the SP register value of the register bank 0 is "0". Here, "F200h" is stored in the SP register of the register bank 0 by the instruction of "LD SP, F200h".

The value "F200h" stored here is a value obtained by adding "1" to the last address of the first stack area, as shown in FIG. 44. When the SP register value of the register bank 0 is "F200h", it indicates that the data is stored (loaded) in "F1FFh".
Further, in step S2851, secondly, "CALLEX 2000h" is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the start address of the RWM checksum calculation instruction in step S2852 is "2000h".
Next, the process proceeds to step S2852, and the second program (RWM checksum calculation) is started based on "CALLEX 2000h". When the second program is first started after the power is turned on, the initial value is set in the SP register of the register bank 1. When the power is turned on, the SP register value of the register bank 1 is "0". Here, "F400h" is stored in the SP register of the register bank 1 by the instruction of "LD SP, F400h".

As shown in FIG. 44, the value "F400h" stored here is a value obtained by adding "1" to the last address "F3FFh" of the second stack area. When the SP register value of the register bank 1 is "F400h", it indicates that the data is stored (loaded) in "F3FFh".
Further, when the RWM checksum calculation is completed, RETEX is executed, and the program (instruction) in the first program returns to the program (S2705) after CALLEX in step S2851. Then, the process proceeds to the process after step S2075. The processing after step S2705 will be omitted.
As described above, in the third embodiment, since the CALLEX instruction includes the register save instruction, it is not necessary to separately specify the register save instruction (“PUSH AF”, “PUSH GPR”, and “PUSH QI”). .. Similarly, since the RETEX instruction is an instruction including register return, it is not necessary to separately specify a register return instruction (“POP AF”, “POP GPR”, and “POP QI”).

Further, after the initial value "F400h" is stored in the SP register of the register bank 1 at the time of executing the first second program after the power is turned on (step S2852), the process returns to the first program and the second program is performed again. When executing the program, it is not necessary to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of the register bank 1 again.
In other words, starting from the time when the power is turned on, the process (instruction) for storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of the register bank 1 is executed at the first execution of the second program, but the subsequent execution of the second program is performed. Occasionally, it is not necessary to execute a process (instruction) for storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of the register bank 1. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the second program.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process (instruction) for storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of the register bank 1 may be executed every time the second program is executed. Alternatively, a process (instruction) for storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of the register bank 1 may be executed when a specific condition is satisfied at the time of executing the second program.
It is assumed that the initial value "F400h" is stored in the SP register of the register bank 1 and the second program is executed when the first second program is executed after the power is turned on. Then, when the data is stored in the second stack area during the execution of the second program, the SP register value of the register bank 1 is updated.

As described above, for example, when 2 bytes of data are first stored in the second stack area, the SP register value of the register bank 1 is updated from "F400h" to "F3FEh". After that, data is usually returned from the second stack area by the time the second program is terminated. Therefore, at the end of the second program, the SP register value of the register bank 1 is usually "F400h".
When the second program ends and returns to the first program, the SP register of register bank 0 is used. The SP register value of the register bank 0 maintains the value immediately before the transition to the second program. For example, if the SP register value of register bank 0 immediately before shifting to the second program is "F1FDh", when the second program is terminated and the program returns to the first program, the SP register value of register bank 0 is "F1FDh". It becomes.

Next, a method of using the CALLEX instruction (application example) will be described.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example using a CALLEX instruction and a JR instruction (jump instruction).
As described above, the CALLEX instruction can be a 2-byte instruction if the range of the address to be called is "2000h" to "20FFh". Therefore, when calling the second program from the first program, the CALLEX instruction is used. If you use as much as possible, you can save the storage capacity related to the instruction.

For example, when an instruction of "CALLEX 2000h" is provided and this instruction is executed, the program stored in the address "2000h" is called, but the description (memory) of the program is started from the address "2000h" and the program is described. If the program occupies most of the addresses "2000h" to "20FDh", many CALLEX instructions cannot be provided. To put it the other way around, if the program starts from the address "2000h" and continues to the address "20FFh", in other words, if there is only one program in the range of the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", 2 Only one byte CALLEX instruction can be provided.

Therefore, in the example of FIG. 50, a JR (jump) command is placed in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", and the destination of the JR command is specified outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". However, the actual program is stored in the destination of the JR instruction.
For example, "JR 2200h" is stored in the address "2000h". In the case of the command of "JR 2200h", it means to jump (jump) to the address "2200h". As a result, when "CALLEX 2000h" is executed, the address "2000h" is called, but since "JR 2200h" is stored in the address "2000h", it jumps to the address "2200h" further. .. Then, if the actual program (“program A” in FIG. 50) is stored after the address “2200h”, the actual program (program A) is placed outside the range of the addresses “2000h” to “20FFh”. Can be done.

In this embodiment, the code size required for the "JR mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh)" instruction is 3 bytes. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50,
2000h JR mn1 (in the example of FIG. 50, mn1 = 2200h)
2003h JR mn2 (in the example of FIG. 50, mn2 = 2250h)
2006h JR mn3 (in the example of FIG. 50, mn3 = 22A0h)
:
JR instructions are arranged in 3-byte increments.

However, not limited to this, if the code size required for the "JR mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh)" instruction can be configured from 2 bytes,
2000h JR mn1
2002h JR mn2
2004h JR mn3
:
Will be.
If the code size required for the "JR mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh)" instruction is 4 bytes,
2000h JR mn1
2004h JR mn2
2008h JR mn3
:
Will be.

In the example of FIG. 50, to put it in extreme terms, it is possible to place all JR instructions in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". In this case,
(1) 2000h JR mn1
(2) 2003h JR mn2
(3) 2006h JR mn3
:
(84) 20F9h JR mn84
(85) 20FCh JR mn85
(86) 20FFh JR mn86
Can be. Therefore, it is possible to store a total of 86 JR instructions consisting of 3 bytes within the range of the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh".

In the example of FIG. 50,
2000h JR 2200h
The actual program (program A) at the address "2000h" was stored in the range of the addresses "2200h" to "224Fh".
also,
2003h JR 2250h
The actual program (program B) of the address "2003h" was stored in the range of the addresses "2250h" to "229Fh".

Furthermore,
2006h JR 22A0h
The actual program (program C) of the address "2006h" was stored after the address "22A0h".
As described above, it is desirable that the actual program to be executed by the CALLEX instruction is hardly stored in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh" of the CALLEX instruction whose code size is 2 bytes. In other words, the address of the second program called by the CALLEX instruction is contained in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh". However, as will be described later, the JR instruction may not be used for the second program called by the CALLEX instruction, which is the closest to the address "20FFh" in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh". .. In this way, if the majority (including "almost" or "all") of the instructions of the second program called by the CALLEX instruction use the JR instruction and the actual program is stored after the address "2100h", The second program area can be used efficiently.

For example, when there are only 10 CALLEX instructions, the JR instruction is stored in the address corresponding to the 1st to 9th CALLEX instructions, but the address corresponding to the 10th CALLEX instruction is stored. May directly store the actual program without using the JR instruction.
On the other hand, regardless of the number of CALLEX instructions, it is stipulated that only JR instructions are stored in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh", and even if the number of JR instructions (CALLEX instructions) is significantly less than the upper limit of 86, the address The storage area before "20FFh" may be reserved as a spare.

As described above, in the CALLEX instruction, the code size is 2 bytes in the case of a call within the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", and in the case of a call outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". Has a code size of 4 bytes.
Therefore, since it is "CALLEX instruction 2 bytes + JR instruction 3 bytes", the total is 5 bytes, which is larger than the code size (4 bytes) of the CALLEX instruction that calls out of the range of the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh".

However, in the chips of gaming machines (rotating drum type gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, etc.) that comply with the rules of the Fudosan Law, there is no margin in the storage capacity of the first program area, and there is a margin in the storage capacity of the second program area. Is the reality.
Therefore, even if the number of JR instructions stored in the second program area increases by 3 bytes, it is better to set the code size of the CALLEX instruction stored in the first program area to 2 bytes for efficient use of the first program area. It is advantageous in terms of.

Further, at the end approaching the address "20FFh", the program itself may be stored without providing the JR instruction.
As described above, when the 3-byte JR instructions are sequentially arranged after the address "2000h", the instruction of "JR mn86" is stored in the address "20FFh". In this case, the instruction of "JR mn86" is stored in the 3-byte storage area of the addresses "20FFh" to "2101h".

However, it is better to store the program directly from the address "20FFh" than to store the JR instruction in the 3-byte storage area after the address "20FFh" and store the actual program for the instruction in another storage area. It saves space.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the JR instruction is not placed at the address "20FFh", and the program (program D) is stored from the address "20FFh".
As a result, when "CALLEX 20FFh" is executed, the program D stored after the address "20FFh" is executed.

In the above, the address "20FFh" is taken as an example, but it also applies to the case where the JR instruction is placed at the address "20FDh" or "20FEh".
Specifically, a person who stores a JR instruction in a 3-byte storage area of addresses "20FDh" to "20FFh" and stores a program directly after the address "20FDh" rather than storing a program in another storage area. Can be said to be preferable in terms of saving storage capacity.
Similarly, rather than storing the JR instruction in the 3-byte storage area of the addresses "20FEh" to "2100h" and storing the program in another storage area, it is better to store the program directly after the address "20FEh". It can be said that it is preferable in terms of saving capacity.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In FIG. 42, the ROM 54 is provided with a program management area and an unused area, but the ROM 54 is not limited to this, and at least the first program area, the first data area, the second program area, and the first program area are contained in the ROM 54. It suffices as long as it has two data areas. Further, for each of these storage areas, the start address and the end address are shown in FIG. 42, but the storage capacity shown in FIG. 42 is an example and is not limited to this. Therefore, the start address and the end address of each storage area shown in FIG. 42 are only examples, and can be arbitrarily set.

Therefore, in the example of FIG. 42, since the address range of the second program area is “2000h” to “25FFh”, the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be set to 2 bytes from “2000h” to “2000h”. Although "20FFh" is illustrated, if the address range of the second program area changes, the address range in which the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be set to 2 bytes also changes.
For example, when the address range of the second program area is "2150h" to "264Fh", the address range in which the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be 2 bytes is "2150h" to 224Fh.

(2) In the example of FIG. 42, the first program area, the first data area, the second program area, and the second data area are arranged in this order in the ROM 54, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the second program. The area and the second data area may be arranged before the first program area and the first data area. Further, a predetermined management area or the like may be arranged at the start address of the ROM 54 (in front of the first program area in FIG. 42).
Similarly, the RWM 53 is not limited to being arranged in the order of the work area and the stack area, and may be arranged in the order of the stack area and the work area. Further, the first work area, the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area are arranged in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the second work area and the second stack area are the first work area. And may be arranged before the first stack area. Furthermore, a predetermined management area or the like may be arranged at the start address of the RWM 53 (in front of the first work area in FIG. 42).

(3) In the built-in register area, each register bank is provided with a main register and a sub-register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the main register may be provided.
(4) In FIG. 43, the register bank monitor is assigned to the D3 bit of the F register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any bit may be assigned. For example, if the second zero flag is not used, the D5 bit may be used.
Further, instead of allocating a register bank monitor to a specific bit in the F register, it is also possible to provide a register dedicated to the register bank monitor.

(5) In the example of FIG. 42, it was explained that the address range of the first data area is set to "1200h" to "1DF3h", and the range of "mn" can be represented by 12 bits if it is within the range.
here,
1200h = 0000/0000/0000 (B)
When
1111/1111/1111 (B) = FFFh
Is.
and,
1200h + FFFh = 21FFh
Is.
Therefore, if the range of the first data area is within the range of "1200h" to "21FFh", the range of "mn" can be represented by 12 bits, and the code size of "LDF HL, mn" is 2 bytes. It can be configured with.

(6) The address range and size of the first stack area and the second stack area shown in FIG. 42 are examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, when the range of the first stack area is the addresses “F1D0h” to “F2FFh”, in step S2851 of FIG. 49, it becomes “LD SP, F300h”.

(7) The third embodiment can be applied not only to a medalless gaming machine but also to a spinning-type gaming machine under the Fudosan Law and a pachinko gaming machine. Furthermore, it can be applied to parrots and casino machines that use game balls.
(8) The various modifications shown in the first to third embodiments and the first to third embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Fourth Embodiment>
The gaming machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is a medalless gaming machine (managed gaming machine, enclosed gaming machine) as in the first and second embodiments.
In the fourth embodiment, the one-chip microprocessor 500 provided on the main control board 50 executes control including control of the number of game media.
Further, in the fourth embodiment, the CALLEX instruction, the RETEX instruction, the register bank, and the like described in the third embodiment are used.
FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing the gaming machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 29 (second embodiment).
As shown in FIG. 29, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment includes a gaming medium number control board 100 in addition to the main control board 50. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment does not include the gaming medium number control board 100.

In FIG. 51, the main control board 50 is provided with a one-chip microprocessor 500. The 1-chip microprocessor 500 is an illegal external processor by unifying the CPU (microprocessor, referred to as "main CPU 501" in FIG. 51), ROM (read-on memory), and RWM (read / write memory) into one chip. It blocks access and ensures high security.

In FIG. 51, the main CPU 501 corresponds to the “first main control CPU 55” in FIG. 29 (second embodiment). Here, the first main control CPU 55 in FIG. 29 did not execute control regarding the number of game media. In the second embodiment, the control regarding the number of game media is executed by the second main control CPU 105 provided on the game medium number control board 100.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the game medium number control board 100, that is, the second main control CPU 105 is not provided. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 501 executes control regarding the number of game media. The main CPU 501 controls the progress of the game (reel) in the same manner as the CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the other embodiments (the main CPU 55 in the first embodiment and the first main control CPU 55 in the second embodiment). Of course, drive control, combination lottery, etc.) and other controls (test signal output control for the testing machine, display control of the combination ratio monitor 113, etc.) are performed.

In FIG. 51, the main control ROM 502 is a storage means for storing programs and data for controlling the progress of the game, and the main control RWM503 temporarily stores the data when controlling the progress of the game. It is a storage means to keep.
Furthermore, the game medium number control ROM 502 is a storage means for storing programs and data for controlling the number of game media (calculation of the number of game media granted, processing of granting game media, etc.), and controls the number of game media. The RWM 503 is a storage means for temporarily storing data when controlling the number of game media.

What is "control of the number of game media"?
(1) Control for sending game media (medals, etc.) rented out or acquired by winning to a tray (when the game media (medals) are tangible),
Or,
(2) Control for transmitting a signal indicating the number of game media rented or acquired by winning to a game medium number display device (game ball number display device or medal number display device) (game medium (medal) is intangible If it is)
To say.
The program stored in the game medium number control ROM 504 and the data stored in the game medium number control ROM 504 and the game medium number control RWM505 are provided only for controlling the number of game media, and the number of game media is provided. No control other than control is performed.

In addition, "control of the number of game media" may be referred to as "control of the number of medals". In this case, it is referred to as "medal number control ROM", "medal number control RWM" or the like. However, as described in the second embodiment, the medalless gaming machine does not use medals as tangible objects. Therefore, the "medal" in the medalless gaming machine refers to a gaming medium (gaming value) used for gaming. Therefore, the term "medal" includes a case of referring to a medal (game medal) used in a spinning machine under the current Fudosan Law and a case of referring to a medal as an intangible object (for example, electronic data). The medal as an intangible object may be referred to as a game medium, a game value, a score (or simply "point"), an electronic medal, electronic data, electronic information, an electronic game medium, an electronic game value, or the like.

Further, the "game medium" in the "control of the number of game media" includes a game medium (game ball) used in a pachinko gaming machine under the Fudosan Law. In other words, it goes without saying that the "control of the number of gaming media" in the fourth embodiment is applicable to the pachinko gaming machine.

According to the current rules of the Fudosan Law, "The total number of ROMs and RWMs mounted on the main control board 50 shall not exceed one for each of all main boards (except for those specified in the game medium number control). It is stipulated.
Further, it is stipulated that "the total number of ROMs and RWMs mounted on the main control board 50 for controlling the number of game media shall not exceed one for each of all the main boards".
Therefore,
Main control ROM 502: 1 Main control RWM503: 1 Main control RWM503: 1 Game medium number control ROM 504: 1 Game medium number control RWM505: 1
It should be noted that the above four storage means do not mean that they are physically separated, and are provided in one built-in memory as described later.

The out-of-use area ROM 506 is a storage means other than the program or data stored in the in-use area ROM, and the out-of-use area RWM 507 is a storage means for storing data other than the data stored in the in-use area RWM.
Here, "outside the used area" means a storage area used for the purpose of signal output control and fraud prevention necessary for the test of the gaming machine 10. Further, the program and data "used for the purpose of fraud prevention" include, for example, the program and data necessary for the display control of the role ratio monitor 113. It is necessary that the programs and data placed in the ROM or RWM outside the used area do not impair the fairness of the game.
The area other than the "used area" is "outside the used area", and the "used area" is also referred to as "inside the used area".
Therefore, the main control ROM 502 and the game medium number control ROM 504 are ROMs in the used area.
Further, the main control RWM503 and the game medium number control RWM505 are RWMs in the use area.

The main control ROM 502, the main control RWM 503, the game medium number control ROM 504, the game medium number control RWM 505, the out-of-use area ROM 506, and the out-of-use area RWM 507 are provided as internal memories inside the one-chip microprocessor 500. Although the details will be described later, these ROMs and RWMs are arranged in a predetermined order in the order of addresses.
In other words, the main control ROM 502, the main control RWM 503, the game medium number control ROM 504, the game medium number control RWM 505, the out-of-use area ROM 506, and the out-of-use area RWM 507 are respectively arranged in the built-in memory.
However, the main control ROM 502, the game medium number control ROM 504, and the out-of-use area ROM 506 are each arranged in an explicitly divided area.
Similarly, the main control RWM503, the game medium number control RWM505, and the out-of-use area RWM507 are also arranged in the explicitly divided areas.

In the fourth embodiment, since the game medium number control board 100 is not provided as in the second embodiment, the total number of game media number clear switch 112 provided on the game medium number control board 100 in the second embodiment. The combination monitor 113 is provided on the main control board 50. As described above, the control for displaying the predetermined ratio on the combination ratio monitor 113 is executed based on the programs and data stored in the ROM 506 outside the used area and the RWM 507 outside the used area. The total number of game media clear switch 112 is not only directly provided on the main control board 50, but is also electrically connected to the main control board 50 (for example, the total number of game media clear switch 112 is mounted). The board and the main control board 50 may be electrically connected to each other).
Further, the game medium number display board (game medium number display device) 120 is electrically connected to the game medium number control board 100 in the second embodiment, but is electrically connected to the main control board 50 in the fourth embodiment. It is connected to the. The control for displaying the number of game media on the game medium number display unit 121 is executed based on the program and data stored in the game medium number control ROM 504 and the game medium number control RWM505.

The counting switch 47 is electrically connected to the game medium number control board 100 in the second embodiment, but is electrically connected to the main control board 50 in the fourth embodiment.
The connection terminal board 130 is electrically connected to the game medium number control board 100 in the second embodiment, but is electrically connected to the main control board 50 in the fourth embodiment.
In FIG. 29 of the second embodiment, the sub-control RWM83, the sub-control ROM 84, and the sub-control CPU 85 of the sub-control board 80 are shown, but these are 1 of the sub-control board 80 like the main control board 50. It is built into the chip microprocessor. Therefore, FIG. 51 illustrates the 1-chip microprocessor 80a of the sub-control board 80 as well as the 1-chip microprocessor 500 of the main control board 50.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a memory map of the built-in memory (ROM, RWM, etc.) provided in the 1-chip microprocessor 500 of the main control board 50. FIG. 52 shows only the portion of the built-in memory according to the present embodiment, and does not show all of the built-in memory.
In FIG. 42 of the third embodiment, the "program area" and the "control area" in FIG. 52 and the like have different names but the same functions.

Further, although the division of the storage area will be described later, in FIG. 52, the main control ROM 502 and the game medium number control ROM 504 are ROMs of the used area, and in addition to these, the ROM 506 outside the used area is provided. Similarly, the main control RWM503 and the game medium number control RWM505 are RWMs in the used area, and in addition to these, an out-of-use area RWM507 is provided.
Since the main control ROM 502 and the game medium number control ROM 504 are ROMs in the used area, they correspond to areas for storing programs and data related to the progress of the game (including control of the number of game media). On the other hand, since the ROM 506 outside the used area is a ROM outside the used area, it corresponds to an area for storing programs and data not related to the progress of the game. In particular, in the present embodiment, the ROM 506 outside the used area corresponds to a storage area for storing the program and data related to the display control of the role ratio monitor 113, and a storage area for storing the program and data related to the output control of the test signal. do.

Each storage area of the main control ROM 502, the game medium number control ROM 504, and the out-of-use area ROM 506 includes a control area and a data area.
Here, the "data area" means a storage area in which only information other than the program is stored or is to be stored.
In the fourth embodiment, the storage area related to the main control is referred to as "area 1", the storage area related to the game medium number control is referred to as "area 2", and the storage area outside the used area is referred to as "area 3".

The ROM has at least a range of addresses "0000h" to "2FFFh" and has a storage area of "16K" bytes or less. In this storage area, the control area 1 of the main control ROM 502 is set to "4.5 K" bytes or less, and the data area 1 is set to "3.0 K" bytes or less.
Further, the storage area of the game medium number control ROM 504 is set to "2.5 K" bytes or less in total of the control area 2 and the data area 2.

Further, during the RWM, the RWM area 1, which is the storage area of the main control RWM503, is used (updated, referenced) during the execution of the program (program related to the progress of the game) stored in the control area 1. It is an area. Similarly, the RWM area 2, which is the storage area of the game medium number control RWM505, is used (updated, referenced) during the execution of the program (program related to the control of the game medium number) stored in the control area 2. ) Storage area. Further, the RWM area 3, which is a storage area of the RWM 507 outside the used area, is a storage area used (updated or referred to) during execution of the program stored in the control area 3.
The RWM area is set to "1024K" bytes or less as a whole. Further, the RWM area 1 and the RWM area 2 are set to "512K" bytes or less, respectively.

An unused area may be interposed between each of the main control ROM 502, the game medium number control ROM 504, and the out-of-use area ROM 506 (example of FIG. 52), or the main control ROM 502, the game medium number control ROM 504, and The ROM 506 outside the used area may be arranged at consecutive addresses.
Similarly, the main control RWM503, the game medium number control RWM505, and the out-of-use area RWM507 may be arranged at consecutive addresses (example of FIG. 52), or the main control RWM503, the game medium number control RWM505, and the use area. An unused area or the like may be interposed between each of the outer RWM 507s.

Further, the built-in memory has one built-in register area. Further, the built-in register area includes a register bank 0 and a register bank 1. The register bank 0 and the register bank 1 are the same as those of the register bank 0 and the register bank 1 described with reference to FIG. 42 (third embodiment), and each register bank has various registers (see FIG. 42 (B)). ).

Although details will be described later, each register of register bank 0 or register bank 1 is used when a program stored in any of control area 1, control area 2, or control area 3 is being executed.
Specifically, for example, the following distribution can be mentioned.
(1) Pattern 1
Register bank 0: Used when executing a program stored in control area 1 Register bank 1: Used when executing a program stored in control area 2 and control area 3 (2) Pattern 2
Register bank 0: Used when executing a program stored in control area 1 and control area 2 Register bank 1: Used when executing a program stored in control area 3

(3) Pattern 3
Register bank 0: Used when executing a program stored in control area 1 and control area 3 Register bank 1: Used when executing a program stored in control area 2 (4) Other patterns In this embodiment, two register banks are provided, but for example, three register banks (for each control area) are provided.
Register bank 0: Used when the program stored in the control area 1 is being executed Register bank 1: Used when the program stored in the control area 2 is being executed Register bank 2: Used when the program stored in the control area 3 is being executed Register bank 2: Stored in the control area 3 It can also be used when the program is running.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52, the RWM area 1, the RWM area 2, and the RWM area 3 are provided with a unique stack area 1, a stack area 2, and a stack area 3, respectively. The program of the main control ROM 502 uses the stack area 1, the program of the game medium number control ROM 504 uses the stack area 2, and the program of the ROM 506 outside the used area uses the stack area 3. The program of the main control ROM 502, the program of the game medium number control ROM 504, and the program of the ROM 506 outside the used area are configured so as not to share the stack area. Specifically, for example, the program of the main control ROM 502 and the program of the game medium number control ROM 504 do not share the stack area 1.
Further, the program of the main control ROM 502, the program of the game medium number control ROM 504, and the program of the ROM 506 outside the used area all use a stack area other than the corresponding stack area (for example, the stack area 1 in the program of the main control ROM 502). It is configured not to. Specifically, for example, the program of the main control ROM 502 does not use the stack area 3.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment,
(1) The "control area 1" and "data area 1" refer to the storage area of the main control ROM 502 (used area).
(2) The "control area 2" and "data area 2" refer to the storage area of the game medium number control ROM 504 (used area).
(3) The "control area 3" and "data area 3" refer to the storage area of the ROM 506 outside the used area.
(4) “RWM area 1” refers to the storage area of the main control RWM503 (used area), and “stack area 1” refers to the stack area of RWM area 1.
(5) The “RWM area 2” refers to the storage area of the game medium number control RWM505 (used area), and the “stack area 2” refers to the stack area of the RWM area 2.
(6) The “RWM area 3” refers to the storage area of the RWM 507 outside the used area, and the “stack area 3” refers to the stack area of the RWM area 3.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a division example of a main control area, a game medium number control area, and an area outside the used area, where (A) shows Example 1 and (B) shows Example 2.
In Example 1 of (A) in the figure, the outside of the used area is not provided in the main control area. In other words, the area outside the used area is provided outside the main control area and the game medium number control area.
In this case,
(1) Main control area A storage area (main control ROM 502 and main control RWM503) for storing programs and data related to the progress of the game is included for the purpose of signal output control and fraud prevention necessary for the test of the game machine 10. It does not include the storage area used (ROM 506 outside the used area and RWM 507 outside the used area).
(2) Game medium number control area A storage area for storing programs and data related to control of the game medium number (game medium number control ROM 504, game medium number control RWM505).
(3) Area outside the used area Storage area used for the purpose of signal output control and fraud prevention required for testing the gaming machine 10 (ROM 506 outside the used area and RWM 507 outside the used area).
Will be.

Further, in Example 2 of (B) in the figure, the used area and the outside of the used area are provided in the main control area. It should be noted that the game medium number control area is only the used area, and does not have an outside of the used area. This is because, as described above, the game medium number control area is a storage area for storing programs and data for executing only the control related to the game medium number. Further, there is no outside of the used area outside the main control area and the game medium number control area.
In this case,
(1) Main control area Used for the purpose of storage area (main control ROM 502 and main control RWM503) for storing programs and data related to the progress of the game, and signal output control and fraud prevention necessary for testing the game machine 10. Storage area (ROM 506 outside the used area and RWM 507 outside the used area)
(2) Game medium number control area A storage area for storing programs and data related to control of the game medium number (game medium number control ROM 504, game medium number control RWM505).
Will be.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing communication between the main control area (used area, outside the used area) and the game medium number control area. In the example of FIG. 54, the storage area is divided according to the example 2 of FIG. 53 (B). That is, the used area and the outside of the used area are provided in the main control area.
The execution of the program in one main CPU 501 of the one-chip microprocessor 500 mounted on the main control board 50 is mainly the program in the control area 1 of the main control ROM 502. Further, the program in the used area of the game medium number control ROM 504 and the program in the area outside the used area ROM 506 use a predetermined address (in other words, "statically") from the program in the control area 1 of the main control ROM 502. ) Called and executed. In the program list at that time, the callee address is clearly described.
Further, the program of the game medium number control ROM 504 and the program of the ROM 506 outside the used area are modularized for each function, and are used by the program of the main control ROM 502 when called by the program of the main control ROM 502. All registers (“all registers” refer to a plurality of registers and are also referred to as “plurality of registers”; the same shall apply hereinafter) are configured to be protected. To protect all registers, the following methods can be mentioned.

(1) First method The register bank used in the program of the main control ROM 502 is different from the register bank used in the program of the game medium number control ROM 504 and the program of the ROM 506 outside the used area. In other words, when the program of the game medium number control ROM 504 or the program of the out-of-use area ROM 506 is called from the program of the main control ROM 502 and the program of the game medium number control ROM 504 or the program of the out-of-use area ROM 506 is executed, a register is used. Switch banks.

(2) Second method The register bank used in the program of the main control ROM 502 is made the same as the register bank used in the program of the game medium number control ROM 504 or the program of the ROM 506 outside the used area. In this case, when the program of the game medium number control ROM 504 or the program of the ROM 506 outside the used area is called and executed from the program of the main control ROM 502, the save instruction of all the registers is executed.
The program that protects all registers will be described later.

In the used area of the main control area, the program stored in the control area 1 can refer to the data stored in the data area 1. Further, the program stored in the control area 1 can refer to and update the data stored in the RWM area 1.
Similarly, the program stored in the control area 2 can refer to the data stored in the data area 2, and can refer to and update the data stored in the RWM area 2.
Further, the program stored in the control area 3 can refer to the data stored in the data area 3 and can refer to / update the data stored in the RWM area 3.

On the other hand, the program in the control area 1 can call the program in the control area 2, and can call the program in the control area 3. Specifically, it is possible to call and execute the program of the control area 2 based on the CALLEX instruction or the CALL instruction of the program of the control area 1. Further, based on the RETEX instruction or RET instruction of the program of the control area 2, it is possible to return immediately after the execution of the program of the control area 2 and immediately after the CALLEX instruction or the CALL instruction of the program of the control area 1.
Similarly, it is possible to call and execute the program of the control area 3 based on the CALLEX instruction or the CALL instruction of the program of the control area 1. Further, based on the RETEX instruction or the RET instruction of the program of the control area 3, it is possible to return immediately after the execution of the program of the control area 3 and immediately after the CALLEX instruction or the CALL instruction of the program of the control area 1.

On the other hand, the program of the control area 1 (subroutine) cannot be called from the program of the control area 2, and the program (subroutine) of the control area 3 cannot be called from the program of the control area 2. This is because if the program (subroutine) in the control area 1 or the control area 3 can be called from the program in the control area 2, the program configuration becomes complicated. This is also because there is a possibility of deviating from the purpose of setting an upper limit on the storage capacity of the main control ROM 502 and the game medium number control ROM 504.

Similarly, the program in the control area 1 (subroutine) cannot be called from the program in the control area 3, and the program (subroutine) in the control area 2 cannot be called from the program in the control area 3. This is because if the program (subroutine) in the control area 1 or the control area 2 can be called from the program in the control area 3, the program configuration becomes complicated. This is also because there is a possibility of deviating from the purpose of setting an upper limit on the storage capacity of the main control ROM 502 and the game medium number control ROM 504.

Furthermore, the program in the control area 1 cannot directly refer to the data in the data area 2. In this case, the program in the control area 2 is called from the program in the control area 1, and the data in the data area 2 is referred to by the program in the control area 2.
Similarly, the program in the control area 1 cannot directly refer to the data in the data area 3. In this case, the program in the control area 3 is called from the program in the control area 1, and the data in the data area 3 is referred to by the program in the control area 3.

Further, although the data in the RWM area 2 cannot be updated by the program in the control area 1, the data in the RWM area 2 can be referred to.
Similarly, the program in the control area 2 cannot update the data in the RWM area 1, but it is configured so that the data in the RWM area 1 can be referred to.
Further, although the data in the RWM area 3 cannot be updated by the program in the control area 1, the data in the RWM area 3 can be referred to.
Similarly, the program in the control area 3 cannot update the data in the RWM area 1, but it is configured so that the data in the RWM area 1 can be referred to.

Furthermore, it is configured so that the data in the RWM area 3 cannot be updated by the program in the control area 2, but the data in the RWM area 3 can be referred to.
Similarly, the program in the control area 3 cannot update the data in the RWM area 2, but it is configured so that the data in the RWM area 2 can be referred to.

As described above, the RWM area "M"("M" is "N") by the program of the control area "N"("N" is any of "1", "2", or "3"). It is configured so that the data of (other than) cannot be updated (reference is possible).
Assuming that the data in the RWM area "M" can be updated by the program in the control area "N", as shown in FIG. 52, the upper limit of the capacity of the RWM area 1 and the RWM area 2 is set to "512K" bytes. This is because it deviates from the purpose.

Further, in order to reduce the amount of the program used in the control area 1, the control area 2 or the control area 3 is configured not to have a common general-purpose subroutine. If a general-purpose subroutine that can be used in the program of the control area 1 is provided in the control area 2 or the control area 3, the program to be stored in the control area 1 can be substantially stored in the control area 2 or the control area 3. This is because there is a possibility that the storage capacity of the control area 1 deviates from the purpose of setting the upper limit (“4.5 K” bytes or less).

Furthermore, the modules of the programs in the control area 1, the control area 2, and the control area 3 are always called in the form of a subroutine, and after the subroutine is completed, they are configured to return immediately after being called by the RETEX instruction or the RET instruction. Further, one module is provided for each purpose. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clarify the structure of the program.
The "module" refers to a group of programs for each purpose.
Further, the "subroutine" refers to a group of programs that are called from the main routine by a CALLEX instruction, a CALL instruction, or the like, and always return immediately after being called by a RETEX instruction, a RET instruction, or the like. Therefore, it can be said that a subroutine is a subordinate concept of a module.

Subsequently, specific examples of the programs of the control area 1, the control area 2, and the control area 3 will be described.
In the examples of FIGS. 55 to 57 below,
Control area 1: Area used in the main control area Control area 2: Number of game media control area (area used)
Control area 3: Outside the used area of the main control area.
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example 1 of a program of the control area 1, the control area 2, and the control area 3. In Example 1, the program in the control area 1 uses the register bank 0, and the programs in the control area 2 and the control area 3 use the register bank 1. Therefore, when calling the program of the control area 2 or the control area 3 from the program of the control area 1 and executing the program of the control area 2 or the control area 3, it is necessary to switch the register bank from the register bank 0 to the register bank 1. be.
Further, when the program in the control area 2 or the control area 3 is terminated and returned to the program in the control area 1, it is necessary to switch (return) the register bank from the register bank 1 to the register bank 0.

While the program other than the program in the control area 1 (the program in the control area 2 or the program in the control area 3) is being executed, the interrupt processing is performed so that the data in the RWM area of the other area is not updated due to the interrupt processing. Is prohibited.
In addition, interrupts (NMI) that cannot be prohibited are not used.

In FIG. 55, the program of the control area 1 is as follows.
The first "ORG 0000h" indicates that the start address of the control area 1 is "0000h".
The next "M1_aaaaaa" indicates the first program of the control area 1.
In this program, the first "LD SP, @ STACK1" indicates that the stack 1 is set in the SP register (stack pointer register, which in this case refers to the SP register of register bank 0). The initial value (@ STACK1) of the stack 1 is “F200h” as shown in FIG. 55, and this value is written to the SP register of the register bank 0.

"CALLEX M2_nnnnnn" is an instruction to call the program "M2_nnnnnn". In this example, the program "M2_nnnnnn" is stored in the control area 2.
When the "CALLEX mn" command is executed,
(1) Disable interrupts regardless of whether interrupts are enabled or disabled at that time.
(2) Switch the register bank from register bank 0 to register bank 1,
(3) Call (call) to the specified address
Do that.
In this way, when the program in the second control area or the program in the third control area is executed from the program in the first control area, the program in the second control area or the third control area can be executed by executing the CALLEX instruction. And.

Here, the reason why the CALLEX instruction is used instead of the general CALL instruction is that the program "M1_aaaaa" in the control area 1 calls (executes) the program "M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 2, so that the register bank is used. This is because it is necessary to switch.
In other words, by using different register banks (different registers) when the program in the control area 1 is executed and when the program in the control area 2 is executed, after the program in the control area 2 ends, the program in the control area 1 becomes available. When it returns, it can return to the register value immediately before the program in the control area 2 is called.

Further, as described above, the CALLEX instruction does not provide a DI (interrupt prohibition) instruction because interrupts are prohibited before calling the target program.
Further, since another program is executed by the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction executed at the end of the other program includes an instruction for permitting an interrupt, an EI (interrupt enable) instruction is provided at the end of the other program. Not.

Execution of "CALLEX M2_nnnnnn" jumps to the start address of "M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 2. The "ORG 2000h" at the beginning of the program in the control area 2 indicates that the start address of the control area 2 is "2000h".
In the program "M2_nnnnnn" of the control area 2, the start address "LD SP, @ STACK2" is stacked in the SP register (here, after the register bank is switched, that is, it means the SP register of the register bank 1). Indicates that 2 is set. The initial value (@ STACK2) of the stack 2 is “F300h” as shown in FIG. 55, and this value is written to the SP register of the register bank 1.

The next "CALL M2_oooooo" is an instruction to call the program "M2_oooooo". The program "M2_oooooo" is stored in the control area 2 (same area). Here, it is not necessary to switch the register bank because the program "M2_oooo" in the same control area 2 is called. Therefore, the CALL instruction is used instead of the CALLEX instruction (in the CALL instruction, unlike the CALLEX instruction, the register bank is not switched). In Example 1 of FIG. 55, when the programs of the control area 2 and the control area 3 are executed, the register bank 1 is used in both cases. Then, the switching from the register bank 0 to the register bank 1 has already been executed by the above-mentioned "CALLEX M2_nnnnnn".

After terminating the program "M2_oooooo" (RET instruction), the RETEX instruction is executed. This RETEX instruction is an instruction corresponding to "CALLEX M2_nnnnnn" executed by the program in the control area 1.
The RETEX instruction is
(1) Set the interrupt state to the state before the CALLEX instruction.
(2) Switch the register bank from register bank 1 to register bank 0,
(3) Return (RET) (return to the next instruction (program at the return address) of "CALLEX M2_nnnnnn"))
Do that.
On the other hand, unlike the RETEX instruction, the RET instruction does not change the interrupt state. Also, the register bank is not switched.

As a result, the program returns to the control area 1 program again.
When the state at the time of the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt enabled state is set by the RETEX instruction. On the other hand, when the state at the time of the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is set by the RETEX instruction.

In the above program flow, for example, the SP registers of register bank 0 and register bank 1 are as follows.
In the program "M1_aaaaa" of the control area 1, by "LD SP, @ STACK1",
SP = F200h (register bank 0)
Will be.

Next, when some program is executed and, for example, 2-byte data is loaded on the stack area 1,
SP = F1FEh (register bank 0)
Will be updated to.
When "CALLEX M2_nnnnnn" is executed in the state of this SP register value, "LD SP, @ STACK2" of the program "M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 2 causes
SP = F300h (register bank 1)
Will be.

Then, when the stack area 2 is clogged with, for example, a 4-byte stack by executing the program "M2_oooooo" in the control area 2,
SP = F2FCh (register bank 1)
Will be updated to.
When the program "M2_oooo" ends in the state of this SP register value and returns to the program of the control area 1 by the RETEX instruction, the register bank used by the program of the control area 1 becomes the register bank 0, and the SP register value at that time is It becomes "F1FEh".
Even when the program "M2_oooo" in the control area 2 ends and returns to the program in the control area 1 by the RETEX instruction, the SP register value of the register bank 1 remains "F2FCh".

Next, in the program "M1_aaaaa" in the control area 1, "CALLEX M3_xxxxxx" is an instruction to call the program "M3_xxxxxx". In this example, the program "M3_xxxxxx" is stored in the control area 3.
Note that the register bank is switched from register bank 0 to register bank 1 again by this "CALLEX M3_xxxxxx".
Execution of "CALLEX M3_xxxxxx" jumps to the start address of "M3_xxxxxx" in the control area 3. The "ORG 2A00h" at the beginning of the control area 3 indicates that the start address of the control area 3 is "2A00h".

In the program "M3_xxxxxx" of the control area 3, "LD SP, @ STACK3" indicates that the stack 3 is set in the SP register (here, the SP register of the register bank 1). The initial value (@ STACK3) of the stack 3 is “F400h” as shown in FIG. 55, and this value is written to the SP register of the register bank 1. Therefore, as described above, the SP register value of the register bank 1 immediately before "LD SP, @ STACK3" is "F2FCh", but this value is overwritten by "F400h".
The next "CALL M3_yyyy" is an instruction to call the program "M3_yyyy". The program "M3_yyyy" is stored in the control area 3. Similar to the above, this CALL instruction does not switch the register bank.

Then, after the program "M3_yyyy" ends (RET instruction), the interrupt state is changed to the state before the "CALLEX M3_xxxxxx" instruction by the RETEX instruction, the register bank is switched from the register bank 1 to the register bank 0, and a return (RET) is performed. As a result, it returns to the next instruction (program of the return address) of "CALLEX M3_xxxxxx".

As described above, when jumping from the program in the control area 1 to the program in the control area 2 or the control area 3, the register bank is switched by the CALLEX instruction. As a result, each register of the register bank 0 used in the program of the control area 1 is protected.
On the other hand, in Example 1, after the program "M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 2 is executed, the program "M3_xxxxxx" in the control area 3 is executed. The register bank 1 is used in both the program in the control area 2 and the program in the control area 3. Therefore, the register value used in the program in the control area 2 may change depending on the execution of the program in the control area 3.

When it is not necessary to protect the register value in the traffic between the program in the control area 2 and the program in the control area 3, an instruction for protecting the register value is unnecessary. On the other hand, when the program in the control area 3 is executed after the program in the control area 2 is executed, or when the program in the control area 2 is executed after the program in the control area 3 is executed, the register value does not change. To protect the register, an instruction to protect the register is added before and after the program "CALL M2_oooo" in the control area 2 or before and after the program "CALL M3_yyyy" in the control area 3.

specifically,
In the program of control area 2,
PUSH ALL
CALL M2_oooooo
POP ALL
Or
In the program of the control area 3,
PUSH ALL
CALL M3_yyyyyy
POP ALL
And.
Here, as in the third embodiment, "PUSH ALL" is an instruction statement to save all the registers to the stack area, and "POP ALL" is an instruction statement to restore all the saved registers from the stack area.
Further, "PUSH AF" described later is a command statement to save the AF register to the stack area, and "POP AF" is a command statement to restore the saved AF register from the stack area.
The stack area when the stack area is saved or returned from the stack area is "PUSH ALL", "POP ALL", "PUSH AF", or "POP AF" as an instruction of the control area 1. In this case, the stack area 1 shown in FIG. 52 corresponds to the case, and when “PUSH ALL”, “POP ALL”, “PUSH AF”, and “POP AF” are executed as instructions in the control area 2, FIG. When the stack area 2 shown in 52 corresponds and "PUSH ALL", "POP ALL", "PUSH AF", and "POP AF" are executed as the instructions of the control area 3, the stack area shown in FIG. 52 is used. 3 is applicable.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example 2 of a program of the control area 1, the control area 2, and the control area 3. In Example 2, the programs in the control area 1 and the control area 2 use the register bank 0, and the programs in the control area 3 use the register bank 1. Therefore, when the program in the control area 2 is called and executed from the program in the control area 1, the register bank 0 remains. On the other hand, when the program in the control area 3 is called from the program in the control area 1 and executed, the register bank is switched from the register bank 0 to the register bank 1. Then, when the program in the control area 3 is terminated and the program is returned to the program in the control area 1, the register bank is switched (returned) from the register bank 1 to the register bank 0.

In FIG. 56, the program of the control area 1 is as follows.
The first "ORG 0000h" is the same as in Example 1.
“M1_aaaaaa” indicates a program of the start address of the control area 1.
In this program, "LD SP, @ STACK1" is an instruction to set the stack 1 in the SP register as in Example 1.
After that, the program "M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 2 is executed, but since the register bank 0 is used by both the program in the control area 1 and the program in the control area 2, the CALLEX instruction accompanied by the switching of the register banks is not used. In other words, the CALL instruction is used in this case. The register bank is not switched by the CALL instruction.

When the program in the control area 2 is executed while the program in the control area 1 is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited. The interrupt prohibition instruction is a DI instruction in the figure.
After executing the DI instruction, "PUSH AF" is executed in order to save the AF register (store it in the stack area). After that, the program "M2_nnnnnn" of the control area 2 is executed by "CALL M2_nnnnnn".
Here, the reason for saving the AF register is as follows. When the program "M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 2 is jumped to, the instruction "LD SP, @ STACK2" for setting the stack pointer is executed, as will be described later. When this LD instruction is executed, the value of the second zero flag (see FIG. 43) of the flag (F) register may change or may change. Therefore, the AF register is saved before jumping to the program in the control area 2.

The “ORG 2000h” at the beginning of the control area 2 is the same as in Example 1.
In "M2_nnnnnn" of the control area 2, "LD (BF_STACK), SP" is an instruction to save the stack pointer. This process corresponds to the process of storing the current SP register value in a predetermined storage area (BF_STACK) of the RWM area 2 shown in FIG. 52. Since the same register bank 0 is used by the program in the control area 1 and the program in the control area 2, the program in the control area 1 is executed when the program in the control area 1 jumps to the program in the control area 2. This is to save the stack pointer at the time and set the stack pointer for the program in the control area 2.

In other words, the register bank is not switched by the CALL instruction, and the same register bank register (for example, SP register) is used by the program in the control area 1 and the program in the control area 2, so that "LD (BF_STACK)" is used. ), SP ”, the register pointer used in the program in control area 1 will be rewritten by the execution of the program in control area 2, and after the program in control area 2 ends, the register pointer in control area 1 will be rewritten. This is because when returning to the program, the correct stack pointer in the program in the control area 1 cannot be specified.

The next "LD SP, @ STACK2" indicates that the stack 2 (F300h) is set in the SP register in the same manner as in Example 1 above.
As described above, "PUSH ALL" is an instruction to save all registers.
The next "CALL M2_oooooo" is an instruction to call the program "M2_oooooo". The program "M2_oooooo" is stored in the control area 2. Since the register bank is not switched by the normal CALL instruction, the register bank remains 0 even during the execution of the program "M2_oooooo".
When the program "M2_oooo" is terminated, all the saved registers are restored by "POP ALL".

The next "LD SP, (BF_STACK)" is an instruction to return the saved stack pointer. This process corresponds to the process of storing the data stored in the predetermined storage area (BF_STACK) of the RWM area 2 shown in FIG. 52 in the SP register (making it the SP register value). As a result, the stack pointer returns to the value before the instruction of "LD (BF_STACK), SP", in other words, the value when the program in the control area 1 was executed.
After that, the program returns to the control area 1 by the RET instruction.
When the program returns to the control area 1, the saved AF register is restored by "POP AF". As a result, the AF register returns to the value before the program "M2_nnnnnn" is executed.
Next, the disabled interrupt is restarted by the EI instruction.

The above stack pointer setting, saving, and returning will be described with specific examples.
First, in the program "M1_aaaaa" of the control area 1, by "LD SP, @ STACK1",
SP = F200h (register bank 0)
Will be.
Next, when some program is executed and, for example, 1-byte data is loaded on "F200h",
SP = F1FFh (register bank 0)
Will be updated to.
When "CALL M2_nnnnnn" is executed in the state of this SP register value and the program "M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 2 is executed, the stack pointer "F1FFh" in the program in the control area 1 is executed by "LD (BF_STACK), SP". To evacuate. In this case, "F1FFh" is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM area 2.

Next, by "LD SP, @ STACK2"
SP = F300h (register bank 0)
Will be.
Therefore, the SP is updated from the previous "F1FFh" to "F300h".
Then, when the stack of, for example, 2 bytes is piled up by executing the program "M2_oooooo",
SP = F2FEh (register bank 0)
Will be updated to.

Next, when the program "M2_oooo" is terminated and "LD SP, (BF_STACK)" is executed, "F1FFh" stored in the predetermined storage area is read and stored (overwritten) in the SP. In other words, the SP is updated from the previous "F2FEh" to "F1FFh".
Therefore,
SP = F1FFh (register bank 0)
Will be.

Next, in the program of the control area 1, the execution of "CALLEX M3_xxxxxx" jumps to "M3_xxxxxx" of the control area 3. Further, this CALLEX instruction prohibits interrupts and switches the register bank from register bank 0 to register bank 1.
“ORG 2A00h” at the beginning of the control area 3 is the same as in Example 1.
In "M3_xxxxxx" of the control area 3, in "LD SP, @ STACK3", the stack 3 (F400h) is set in the SP register (SP register of the register bank 1).
The next "CALL M3_yyyy" is an instruction to call the program "M3_yyyy". The program "M3_yyyy" is stored in the control area 3. Similar to the above, this CALL instruction does not switch the register bank.

Then, after the program "M3_yyyy" ends (RET instruction), the interrupt state is changed to the state before the "CALLEX M3_xxxxxx" instruction by the RETEX instruction, the register bank is switched from the register bank 1 to the register bank 0, and a return (RET) is performed. As a result, it returns to the next instruction (program of the return address) of "CALLEX M3_xxxxxx".

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example 3 of a program of the control area 1, the control area 2, and the control area 3. In Example 3, the programs in the control area 1 and the control area 3 use the register bank 0, and the programs in the control area 2 use the register bank 1. Therefore, when the program in the control area 3 is called and executed from the program in the control area 1, the register bank 0 remains. On the other hand, when the program in the control area 2 is called from the program in the control area 1 and executed, the register bank is switched from the register bank 0 to the register bank 1. Then, when the program in the control area 2 is terminated and the program is returned to the program in the control area 1, the register bank is switched (returned) from the register bank 1 to the register bank 0.

In FIG. 56, the program of the control area 1 is as follows.
The first "ORG 0000h" is the same as in Example 1.
In the next "M1_aaaaa", "LD SP, @ STACK1" is an instruction to set the stack 1 (F200h) in the SP register as in Example 1.
The next "CALLEX M2_nnnnnn" is an instruction to call the program "M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 2. This CALLEX instruction prohibits interrupts and switches the register bank from register bank 0 to register bank 1.
By executing "CALLEX M2_nnnnnn", the program "M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 2 is jumped to. The "ORG 2000h" at the beginning of the control area 2 is the same as in Example 1.
In "M2_nnnnnn" of the control area 2, "LD SP, @ STACK2" is an instruction to set the stack 2 (F300h) in the SP register (SP register of the register bank 1) as in Example 1.

The next "CALL M2_oooooo" is an instruction to call the program "M2_oooooo". The program "M2_oooooo" is stored in the control area 2. The register bank is not switched by the CALL instruction.
After terminating the program "M2_oooooo" (RET instruction), the RETEX instruction is executed. The RETEX instruction sets the interrupt state to the state before the CALLEX instruction, switches the register bank from register bank 1 to register bank 0, and returns (RET). As a result, the process returns to the next instruction (program at the return address) of "CALLEX M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 1. Then, the program in the first control area can be executed again.

After executing the program "M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 1, the program "M3_xxxxxx" in the control area 3 is executed.
Since the program in the control area 1 and the program in the control area 3 both use the register bank 0, the CALLEX instruction accompanied by the switching of the register bank is not used.
When the program in the control area 3 is executed while the program in the control area 1 is being executed, interrupt processing is first prohibited by the DI instruction.
After executing the DI instruction, the AF register is saved (stored in the stack area) by the "PUSH AF" instruction. After that, the program "M3_xxxxxx" of the control area 3 is executed by "CALL M3_xxxxxx".

“ORG 2A00h” at the beginning of the control area 3 is the same as in Example 1.
In "M3_xxxxxx" of the control area 3, "LD (BF_STACK), SP" is an instruction to save the stack pointer. This process corresponds to the process of storing the current SP register value in a predetermined storage area (BF_STACK) of the RWM area 3 shown in FIG. 52. Since the same register bank 0 is used by the program in the control area 1 and the program in the control area 3, the program in the control area 1 is executed when the program in the control area 1 jumps to the program in the control area 3. This is to save the stack pointer at the time and set the stack pointer for the program in the control area 3.

“LD SP, @ STACK3” indicates that the stack 3 (F400h) is set in the SP register in the same manner as in Example 1 above.
Next, all the registers are saved by "PUSH ALL".
The next "CALL M3_yyyy" is an instruction to call the program "M3_yyyy". The program "M3_yyyy" is stored in the control area 3. Since the register bank is not switched by the CALL instruction, the register bank remains 0 even during the execution of the program "M3_yyyy".
When the program "M3_yyyy" is terminated, all the saved registers are restored by "POP ALL".

The next "LD SP, (BF_STACK)" is an instruction to return the saved stack pointer. This process corresponds to the process of storing the data stored in the predetermined storage area (BF_STACK) of the RWM area 3 shown in FIG. 52 in the SP register (making it the SP register value). As a result, the stack pointer returns to the value before the instruction of "LD (BF_STACK), SP", in other words, the value when the program in the control area 1 was executed.
After that, the program returns to the control area 1 by the RET instruction.
When the program returns to the control area 1, the saved AF register is restored by "POP AF". As a result, the AF register returns to the value before the program "M2_nnnnnn" is executed.
Then, the disabled interrupt is restarted by the EI instruction.

Next, the code size of the program will be explained.
In the fourth embodiment, the code SARS of each instruction is as follows.
CALLEX mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh): 2 bytes CALLEX mn (mn ≠ 2000h to 20FFh): 4 bytes RETEX: 2 bytes CALL mn: 3 bytes RET: 1 byte DI: 1 byte EI: 1 byte PUSH AF: 1 byte POP AF: 1 byte

The code size of the CALLEX instruction is the same as that of the third embodiment, but will be described again.
In the CALLEX instruction, the code size of "CALLEX mn" when calling the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" is 2 bytes, and the code size of "CALLEX mn" when calling a range other than the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". The code size is configured to be 4 bytes.

The range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" is "FFh", that is, 1 byte. In this case, the code value of the address value "2000h" is set to "0h". As a result, the code value when calling the address value "20FFh" can be set to "FFh", so that the code of "mn" can be set regardless of which of the range of the address "2000h" to "20FFh" is called. The size can be set to 1 byte.
Further, when encoding the operation code of "CALLEX", the code is set to 1 byte. Thereby, the code size of "CALLEX mn" (mn = 2000h to 20FFh) can be set to 2 bytes.

On the other hand, when "mn" becomes "2100h" or more, the code size of "mn" becomes 2 bytes. Further, when the range of "mn" is not "2000h" to "20FFh", the code of "CALLEX" is composed of 2 bytes. When the opcode is composed of 1 byte, it is limited to 256 out of thousands of instructions, so 1 byte is used as the "CALLEX" code when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh". However, if the range of "mn" is not "2000h" to "20FFh", a 2-byte code is assigned as the "CALLEX" code.

As described above, in the "CALLEX mn" instruction, if the range of "mn" is within the range of "2000h" to "20FFh", the code size is a 2-byte instruction, and the range of "mn" is other than the above range. If so, the code size is a 4-byte instruction.
Therefore, the more the instructions are called, the more the instructions that the code size can be 2 bytes are increased if they are aggregated within the range of the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" of the control area 2. This makes it possible to save the storage capacity of the control area 1.
Further, in the range of the addresses "2000h" to "25FFh" of the second control area, the address when calling the program of the control area 2 from the program of the control area 1 can be set as much as possible in the range of the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". By storing a large amount, when checking the control area 2, it is possible to easily grasp that the program is called from the program in the control area 1.

FIG. 55 (Example 1) will be specifically described as an example.
As shown in FIG. 55, the start address of the control area 2 is "2000h". The start address of the control area 3 is "2A00h". Therefore, for example, if the program "M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 2 is arranged within the range of the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", the program "CALLEX M2_nnnnnn" in the control area 1 can be configured from 2 bytes.
Further, in the program "M2_nnnnnn" of the control area 2, the program "M2_oooooo" of the control area 2 is called by executing "CALL M2_oooooo" after "LD SP, @ STACK2". The program "M2_oooo" does not have to be in the range of the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh".

Here, in the program of the control area 1, it is conceivable to directly set "CALLEX M2_oooo" instead of "CALLEX M2_nnnnn".
However, in the program of the control area 2, the program "M2_oooo" to be actually executed is arranged after the address "2100h", and the program called by the CALLEX instruction of the control area 1 is in the range of the addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". The more the head programs of the above are arranged, the more 2-byte CALLEX instructions can be provided in the program of the control area 1. Therefore, it is possible to save the program capacity of the control area 1. In other words, the program of the control area 2 is called from the program of the control area 1 not only once, but may be configured to be called a plurality of times.

Further, the start address of the program in the control area 3 is "2A00h", which is after "20FFh". Therefore, the program "M3_xxxxxx" in the control area 3 is arranged after the address "20FFh". Therefore, the program "CALLEX M3_xxxxxx" in the control area 1 has 4 bytes. In other words, since the address of the control area 3 does not have a range of "2000h" to "20FFh", the code size of the CALLEX instruction when calling the program of the control area 3 from the program of the control area 1 is all 4 bytes. Become. It should be noted that the program in the control area 3 is not limited to being called only once from the program in the control area 1, and may be configured to be called a plurality of times.

Here, when calling the program "M3_xxxxxx" by a normal CALL instruction,
DI (1 byte)
PUSH AF (1 byte)
CALL M3_xxxxxx (3 bytes)
POP AF (1 byte)
EI (1 byte)
This is a total of 7 bytes, which is larger than the 4-byte CALLEX instruction. Therefore, even when the program of the control area 3 is called from the program of the control area 1, the capacity can be reduced by using the CALLEX instruction instead of the CALL instruction.

Although the fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In order to provide more "CALLEX mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh)" consisting of 2 bytes in the program of the control area 1, the JR (jump) instruction shown in FIG. 50 of the third embodiment is used. May be good.
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a program example in this case. It is assumed that the code size of the JR instruction is 3 bytes as in the third embodiment.

Then, a JR instruction is placed at the address of the control area 2 designated by the CALLEX instruction of the control area 1. For example, when "CALLEX 2000h" is set in the program of the control area 1, "JR 2100h" is placed at the address "2000h" of the control area 2. That is, the jump destination address is set after "2100h".
Since the "JR mn" instruction requires 3 bytes, "JR mn" is arranged in increments of 3 bytes after the address "2000h" in the control area 2.
Then, the actual program may be arranged after the address "2100h" of the control area 2.
With this setting, the program in the control area 1 can be provided with as many 2-byte CALLEX instructions as possible.

(2) In Examples 1 to 57 of FIG. 55, in the control area 1, the program “M2_nnnnnn” of the control area 2 is called, the program “M2_nnnnnn” is terminated, and then the program “M3_xxxxxx” of the control area 3 is executed. Although it was called and this "M3_xxxxxx" was executed, the design of the order of processing for executing the program in the control area 2 and the program in the control area 3 and the timing of the processing can be changed as appropriate.
For example, after executing the program in the control area 2, the program in the control area 1 is executed and the program in the control area 3 is executed at a certain processing timing, or after the program in the control area 3 is executed, the program in the control area 1 is executed. The program may be executed, and the program in the control area 2 may be executed at a certain processing timing.
Further, as described above, the number of times the program of the control area 2 is called from the program of the control area 1 is not limited to one time, and may be a plurality of times. Similarly, the number of times the program of the control area 3 is called from the program of the control area 1 is not limited to once, and may be a plurality of times.

(3) The fourth embodiment can be applied not only to a medalless gaming machine but also to a spinning-type gaming machine and a pachinko gaming machine under the Fudosan Law. Furthermore, it can be applied to parrots that use game balls and casino machines.
(4) The various modifications shown in the first to fourth embodiments and the first to fourth embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the terms "main control means" and "game medium number control means" are used.
In the fifth embodiment, a main control board (for example, "main control board 50" in FIG. 29), a game medium number control board (for example, "game medium number control board 100" in FIG. 29), and control boards thereof. Examples of the CPU mounted on the machine, the main control means and the game medium number control means in that case include the following first to third examples.
(1) First Example As shown in FIG. 29 (second embodiment), the main control board 50 and the game medium number control board 100 are divided, and the main control CPU (in FIG. 29) is on the main control board 50. , Corresponding to "first main control CPU 55"), and the game medium number control board 100 is equipped with a game medium number control CPU (corresponding to "second main control CPU 105" in FIG. 29). Be done.
In this case, the main control CPU corresponds to the "main control means" in the present embodiment, and the game medium number control CPU corresponds to the "game medium number control means".

(2) Second Example As shown in FIG. 51 (fourth embodiment), the game medium number control board is not provided, the main control board 50 is provided, and further, what is the configuration of FIG. 51? Although different, the main control CPU and the game medium number control CPU may be mounted separately on the main control board 50.
In this case, the main control CPU corresponds to the "main control means" of the present embodiment, and the game medium number control CPU corresponds to the "game medium number control means" of the present embodiment.

(3) Third Example As shown in FIG. 51 (fourth embodiment), the game medium number control board is not provided, the main control board 50 is provided, and further, as shown in FIG. 51, An example is one in which only one CPU (corresponding to "main CPU 501" in FIG. 51) is mounted on the main control board 50 (a game medium number control CPU is not mounted).
In this case, among the means possessed by the main CPU 501, the means for controlling the progress of the game corresponds to the "main control means" in the present embodiment. Further, among the means possessed by the main CPU 501, the means for controlling the game medium corresponds to the "game medium number control means" in the present embodiment.

Furthermore, the "main control RWM" refers to an RWM that stores data related to the main control and can be accessed by the main control means, and corresponds to, for example, the main control RWM 503 in FIG. 51. Further, the "main control ROM" refers to a ROM that stores data and programs related to the main control and can be accessed by the main control means, and corresponds to, for example, the main control ROM 502 in FIG. 51.
Further, the “game medium number control RWM” refers to an RWM that stores data related to the control of the number of game media and can be accessed by the game medium number control means, for example, in FIG. 29, the second main control RWM 103 or In FIG. 51, it corresponds to the game medium number control RWM505.
Further, the "game medium number control ROM" refers to a ROM that stores data and programs related to control of the number of game media and can be accessed by the game medium number control means, for example, the second main in FIG. 29. It corresponds to the control ROM 104 and the game medium number control ROM 504 in FIG. 51.

Further, in the description of the fifth embodiment, the sub-control CPU 85 (means for controlling the effect) in FIGS. 29 and 51 is referred to as "sub-control means". Further, the "sub-control RWM" refers to an RWM that stores data related to the sub-control (effect) and can be accessed by the sub-control means, and corresponds to, for example, the sub-control RWM 83 of FIG. 51.
Furthermore, the "sub-control ROM" refers to a ROM that stores data and programs related to the sub-control (effect) and can be accessed by the sub-control means, and corresponds to, for example, the sub-control ROM 84 in FIG. 51.

The game medium number control means manages the total number of game media (credited (stored)).
In the fifth embodiment, the game medium number control means determines whether the total number of game media exceeds the upper limit value and reaches the threshold value, and executes a predetermined process based on the determination result. do. In other words, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the total number of game media is below the upper limit value and whether or not it is below the threshold value, and executes a predetermined process based on the determination result.
When adding a predetermined number of game media to the total number of game media, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the upper limit value has been reached and whether or not the threshold value has been reached.
Here, the "addition of the total number of game media" is first executed when the game media corresponding to the winning small winning combination is given. Secondly, it is executed when the settlement switch 46 is operated when the game medium is bet. Thirdly, it is executed when the game medium is rented from the rental unit 200. Here, the determination of whether or not the upper limit value has been reached and whether or not the threshold value has been reached may be determined when "1" of the game media is added or when the addition process of a predetermined number of game media is completed.
Further, the "subtraction of the total number of gaming media" is first executed based on the bet processing. Secondly, it is executed based on the counting process. Further, the determination of whether or not the value is below the upper limit value and whether or not the value is below the threshold value may be determined when the "1" of the game medium is subtracted, or when the betting process or the counting process of a predetermined number of game media is completed.

In the following description, the upper limit is "16383". However, the upper limit value "16383" is an example and is not limited to this. For example, it may be "32767" or "655535".
Furthermore, in the following description, the threshold value is set to "15000". However, the threshold value "15000" is an example, and can be arbitrarily set as long as it is a value less than the above upper limit value. For example, the threshold value can be arbitrarily set as long as it is a value less than "upper limit value (16383)-count value for one time (50)" (less than "16333").

In the fifth embodiment, when the total number of gaming media reaches the upper limit, the total number of gaming media is not further added. Specifically, when the total number of game media reaches the upper limit value during the game medium grant process, the grant process is interrupted until the total number of game media is less than the upper limit value. Further, when the total number of game media reaches the upper limit, the game media is not rented until the total number of game media is less than the upper limit.
For example, when the total number of game media before the addition of "1" of the game medium is "16382", the total number of game media may be updated to "16383 (upper limit value)" by adding "1" to the game media. It is possible. On the other hand, when the total number of game media before the addition of "1" of the game medium is "16383 (upper limit value)", the "1" addition process of the game medium is not performed.
Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the total number of game media reaches the threshold value "15000", a predetermined control process (for example, a notification process or a game medium lending prohibition process) can be executed, and the total number of game media can be increased. When it becomes less than the threshold value, the predetermined control process can be terminated.

Next, a specific control process for the upper limit of the number of game media will be described.
The main control means and the game medium number control means each have an upper limit arrival flag for determining whether or not the total number of game media has reached the upper limit value (whether it is equal to or higher than the upper limit value). The upper limit value arrival flag is provided in a predetermined storage area of the main control RWM and the game medium number control RWM, respectively.
When the game medium number control means determines that the upper limit value has been reached as a result of adding "1" to the total number of game media, the upper limit value arrival flag is set to "1". When the upper limit value arrival flag is set to "1", the game medium number control means transmits the upper limit value arrival information to the main control means.

When the main control means receives the upper limit arrival information from the game medium number control means, the main control means sets the upper limit arrival flag to "1". When the upper limit value arrival flag is set to "1", the main control means transmits the upper limit value arrival information (also referred to as "notification request information"; the same applies hereinafter) to the sub control means.
The sub control means has an upper limit value notification flag. The upper limit value notification flag is provided in a predetermined storage area of the sub-control RWM. When the sub control means receives the upper limit arrival information from the main control means, the sub control means sets the upper limit notification flag to "1".
When the upper limit value notification flag is "1", the sub-control means notifies by at least one of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, or the image display device 23 that the total number of game media has reached the upper limit value ( Hereinafter, "upper limit arrival notification" and also referred to as "error notification") are executed.

On the other hand, when the game medium number control means detects the operation of the counting switch 47, the number of gaming media corresponding to the operation of the counting switch 47 is subtracted from the total number of gaming media.
When the game medium number control means determines that the total number of game media is less than the upper limit as a result of subtracting "1" from the total number of game media based on the operation of the counting switch 47, the upper limit arrival flag is set to ". Set to "0". When the upper limit value arrival flag is set to "0", the game medium number control means transmits the upper limit value non-arrival information to the main control means.
When the main control means receives the information that the upper limit value has not been reached from the game medium number control means, the main control means sets the upper limit value arrival flag to "0". When the upper limit value arrival flag is set to "0", the main control means transmits the upper limit value non-arrival information to the sub control means.

When the sub control means receives the upper limit non-arrival information from the main control means, the sub control means sets the upper limit notification flag to "0". When the upper limit value notification flag is "0", the sub-control means may not perform the upper limit value arrival notification (error notification). Therefore, when the upper limit value notification flag changes from "1" to "0", the sub-control means can end the upper limit value arrival notification.
When the upper limit value notification flag changes from "1" to "0", the sub-control means may immediately end the upper limit value arrival notification, but the upper limit value notification flag changes from "1" to "0". Immediately after, the upper limit arrival notification is continued, and the upper limit arrival notification is terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as after a predetermined period has elapsed since the upper limit notification flag changed from "1" to "0". You may.

As a specific process, when the sub control means determines that the upper limit value notification flag has changed from "1" to "0", the sub control means stores a predetermined value in a predetermined timer value storage area provided in the sub control RWM. , The process of subtracting "1" is executed for each interrupt process (for example, every "1" ms) in the sub-control means.
When the value of the predetermined timer value storage area is not "0", the sub-control means continues the notification of reaching the upper limit value. When the value of the predetermined timer value storage area becomes "0", the sub-control means determines that the predetermined end condition of the upper limit arrival notification is satisfied, and ends the upper limit arrival notification.

Next, the process of granting the game medium will be described.
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a game medium granting process by the main control means.
This game medium granting process is a process executed after determining the symbol combination stopped on the valid line and determining the number of gaming media to be granted based on the determination result. For example, when it is determined that a predetermined (small combination) symbol combination that can be given the number of game media "8" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, "8" is stored in the number storage area of the number of given game media described later. After that, this game medium granting process is executed.

In FIG. 59, in step S741, the main control means determines whether or not there is a game medium to be given (whether or not the symbol combination to which the game medium can be given is stopped and displayed), and there is no game medium to be given. If it is determined, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. Specifically, the main control RWM has a grant number storage area in which the grant number is stored when the grant number is determined, and whether or not the value of the grant number storage area is "0". To judge. When it is determined that the value of the granted number storage area is "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the granted number storage area is not "0", the process proceeds to step S742.

In step S742, it is determined whether or not the game medium grant timer value is “0”. The game medium addition timer is provided in a predetermined storage area of the main control RWM.
If the game medium grant timer value is not "0", the determination in step S742 is looped until it becomes "0", and if it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S743. In other words, the process of step S742 is a process of delaying the progress to the step S743 or later (the grant request command set of step S744 described later).

When it is determined that the game medium grant timer value is "0" and the process proceeds to step S743, the main control means stores the initial value "27" as the game medium grant timer value. The game medium grant timer value is configured to be updatable according to the execution of the timer interrupt process of the main control means (for example, "1" is subtracted when one timer interrupt process is executed. It is configured). The timer interrupt in the main control means is configured to be executable in a cycle of about "2.235" ms. Therefore, storing "27" as the game medium grant timer value is synonymous with storing the time corresponding to about "60" ms. Further, even if the timer interrupt process is executed when the game medium grant timer value is "0", the game medium grant timer value is maintained at "0".

In this way, in the case of assigning a plurality of gaming media by executing the storage process of the gaming medium granting time in step S743 after whether or not the gaming medium granting time in step S742 has elapsed, a step described later will be performed. The grant request command set process of S744 is executed at predetermined period intervals (in the above example, about "60" ms intervals).
For example, when the number of game media to be granted is "8" and the first game medium "1" is to be granted, the standby process based on the game medium grant timer value is not executed. At the time of shifting to the processing of the flowchart of FIG. 59, the game medium grant timer value is “0” and is determined to be “Yes” in step S742, so that the first game medium “1” grant process is immediately executed. This is because it is done. Thereby, the main control means can quickly execute the process for causing the game medium number control means to add the first game medium "1" to the total number of game media.

On the other hand, when the first game medium "1" is given, "27" is stored as the game medium grant timer value in step S743, so that each grant request command corresponding to "2" to "8" of the game medium is given. The set can be executed after the game medium grant timer value changes from "27" to "0". In other words, each grant request command set (step S744) corresponding to the grant of "2" to "8" of the game medium can be executed at intervals of about "60" ms. That is, the update of the total game medium by the game medium number control means based on the grant request command set can be executed every about "60" ms, and the display update of the game medium number display unit 121 capable of displaying the total number of game media. Can be updated about every "60" ms. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize how the total number of game media displayed on the game medium number display unit 121 is updated (counted up) by "1".

Note that, unlike the example of FIG. 59, after the game medium grant time of step S743 is stored, the process of determining whether the game medium grant time of step S742 has elapsed may be executed. In this case, also for the first grant of the game medium in the case of granting a plurality of game media, the main control means executes the standby process corresponding to the game medium grant time (game medium grant timer value), and then the number of game media. The control means adds "1" to the total number of game media.
Further, in the above example, "27" is stored as the game medium addition timer value in the process of step S743, but the total game medium displayed on the game medium number display unit 121 is updated by "1". Any numerical value (for example, a numerical value in the range of "10" to "200") that can be visually recognized by the player may be stored.

In the next step S744, the main control means stores in the command buffer of the main control means a grant request command indicating that the number of game media "1" is to be assigned. The command stored in the command buffer of the main control means is configured to be transmitted to the game medium number control means by the timer interrupt process on the main control means side. Therefore, the process of step S744 is synonymous with transmitting a grant request command indicating that the number of game media "1" is to be granted from the main control means to the game medium number control means.

For example, when the symbol combination that can give the game medium number "8" is stopped and displayed, the grant request command indicating that the game medium number "1" is given is transmitted to the game medium number control means eight times. By doing so, the total number of game media is updated. In this way, by configuring the total number of game media to be updated by "1", if all the number of game media to be given is added to the total number of game media, the upper limit of the total number of game media (16383) will be exceeded. Even in this case, the game medium can be added until the total number of game media reaches the upper limit.

In the next step S745, the main control means receives a response command. In step S744, the grant request command is transmitted to the game medium number control means, and when the game medium number control means receives the command, a response command corresponding to the grant request command is transmitted to the main control means.
Here, in the fifth embodiment, at least the following two are included as the response commands from the game medium number control means.
1) Grant permission command The grant permission command is a command indicating (permitting) adding the number of game media "1".
Specifically, when the game medium number control means receives the grant request command indicating that the game medium number "1" is to be added, and then adds "1" to the total game medium number, the total before addition. If it is determined that the number of game media has not reached the upper limit, a grant permission command indicating that "1" is added to the total number of game media is transmitted to the main control means.

2) Grant refusal command The grant refusal command is a command indicating that the number of game media "1" is not added (addition is not permitted, addition is prohibited).
Specifically, when the game medium number control means receives the grant request command indicating that the game medium number "1" is to be added, and then adds "1" to the total game medium number, the total before addition. When it is determined that the number of game media has reached the upper limit, a grant refusal command indicating that "1" cannot be added to the total number of game media is transmitted to the main control means. Here, when the game medium number control means receives the grant request command and determines that the total number of game media before addition has reached the upper limit, "1" is added to the total number of game media. The grant refusal command is sent to the main control means without any notice.

In the next step S746, the main control means determines whether or not the command received from the game medium number control means is a grant refusal command, and if it is a grant refusal command, proceeds to step S742 and the grant refusal command. If not, the process proceeds to step S747. In step S746, the main control means determines whether or not the command received from the game medium number control means is a grant permission command, and if it is not a grant permission command, the process proceeds to step S742, and the grant permission command is used. At some point, the process may proceed to step S747.

With this configuration, when the main control means determines in step S746 that the game medium cannot be added, the counting process by the game medium number control means is executed (a part or all of the total number of game media). Is counted), and the loop is performed between steps S742 and S746 until the total number of game media is less than the upper limit. As a result, the bet processing for starting the next game is not proceeded (the betting processing cannot be performed). Even when such a loop situation occurs, if the counting process by the game medium number control means is executed and the total number of game media becomes less than the upper limit value, the game medium number control means is used. Since the grant permission command is transmitted to the main control means, the determination in step S746 is "No", and it is possible to proceed to the process of step S747.

In other words, the game medium granting process ends even when the total number of gaming media reaches the upper limit value "16383" in the middle of the game medium granting process (a situation in which a part of the game medium to be granted still remains). Without doing so, a loop situation will occur. Further, even in this loop situation, the total number of game media can be set to less than the upper limit value "16383" by executing the counting process by the operation of the counting switch 47 by the player. That is, when the total number of game media is less than the upper limit value "16383", the loop status of the game medium grant process can be exited (it becomes "No" in the determination of step S746), and the game medium grant process is performed. You will be able to proceed. With such a configuration, even if the total number of game media reaches the upper limit value "16383" in the middle of the game medium granting process, the game medium to be granted is not discarded, so that the player can use it. It is possible to prevent giving a disadvantage.

The loop situation described above is not limited to this example. For example, when it is determined as "Yes" in step S746, step S744 (grant request command set), step S745 (command reception), and step S746 (grant not possible). Judgment as to whether or not it is) may be looped.

In step S747, the main control means subtracts "1" from the value of the granted number storage area. For example, when "8" is stored as the value of the granted number storage area, the value of the granted number storage area becomes "7" by the processing. Further, when the value of the granted number storage area is "1", the value of the granted number storage area becomes "0" by the processing.

Next, the process proceeds to step S748, and the main control means determines whether or not the value of the granted number storage area is “0”. If the value of the granted number storage area is not "0", the process returns to step S742. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S748 that the value of the granted number storage area is "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

By executing the game medium granting process as described above, the total number of game media can be controlled to be equal to or less than the upper limit value.
Further, if the process of assigning the game media by "1" is performed at high speed, the player cannot recognize that the game media are assigned by "1". Therefore, after the game medium is given "1", "60.35" ms (interrupt processing "27" times) is set as the game medium grant timer value, and the game medium is given every time "1" is given. The timer value is updated so that the game medium is given "1" again after "60.35" ms has elapsed. With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the game medium is given "1" at a time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a game medium addition process of the game medium number control means.
First, in step S751, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the grant request command transmitted from the main control means has been received. In FIG. 59, when the grant request command is transmitted in step S744, the game medium number control means receives the grant request command in step S751.
When the grant request command is received, the process proceeds to step S752. In step S752, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the total number of game media before adding "1" to the number of game media is the upper limit value. If it is determined that the upper limit value is not reached, the process proceeds to step S753, and if it is already determined that the upper limit value is not reached, the process proceeds to step S755.

In step S753, the game medium number control means transmits the grant permission command to the main control means. Next, the process proceeds to step S754, and "1" is added to the total number of game media to update the total number of game media. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. The processes of steps S753 and S754 may be reversed.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S755, the game medium number control means transmits a grant refusal command to the main control means. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. Therefore, in this case, the total number of game media is not updated (“1” addition process).

In the above example, the number of game media is added by "1", but the present invention is not limited to this, and "2" or more (plural) game media may be added together.
For example, when the main control means grants the number of game media "8", the game medium number control means is given a command for requesting whether or not the number of game media "8" can be added to the total number of game media. Send. Upon receiving the grant request command, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the upper limit is exceeded by adding "8" to the total number of game media ("total number of game media + number of grants>16383" is " (Determine whether or not it will be "Yes"), and if it exceeds the upper limit (if it is determined to be "Yes"), a command to the effect that "8" cannot be added to the total number of game media (grant refusal command) To the main control means. When the main control means receives the grant refusal command, the main control means again transmits a grant request command as to whether or not "8" can be added to the total number of game media to the game medium number control means.

Here, since the total number of game media has not decreased when the counting process has not been performed, the game medium number control means again mainly commands that "8" cannot be added to the total number of game media. It will be transmitted to the control means, and the game medium addition process will loop between the main control means and the game medium number control means. That is, it is configured to loop until the number of game media "8" is added. With such a configuration, since the game medium to be given is not discarded, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper limit value is not exceeded, a grant permission command indicating that "8" can be added to the total number of game media is transmitted to the main control means. Then, the game medium number control means adds "8" to the total number of game media, and ends the game medium granting process.

Next, the threshold value (15000) for the number of game media will be described.
The game medium number control means and the main control means each have a threshold value arrival flag for determining whether or not the total number of game media has reached the threshold value. The threshold value arrival flag of the main control means is provided in the main control RWM, and the threshold value arrival flag of the game medium number control means is provided in the game medium number control RWM.
When the game medium number control means determines that the threshold value has been reached as a result of adding "1" to the total number of game media, the threshold value arrival flag is set to "1".
When the threshold value arrival flag is set to "1", the game medium number control means transmits threshold value arrival information (command) to the main control means.
When the main control means receives the threshold value arrival information from the game medium number control means, the threshold value arrival flag is set to "1".
When the threshold value arrival flag is set to "1", the main control means transmits threshold value arrival information (command) to the sub control means. The "threshold value arrival information" here is, in other words, notification request information.

On the other hand, the sub control means has a threshold value notification flag. The threshold value notification flag of the sub-control means is provided in the sub-control RWM.
When the sub-control means receives the threshold arrival information from the main control means, the sub-control means sets the threshold value notification flag to "1".
When the threshold value notification flag is "1", the sub-control means enables the threshold value arrival notification to be performed by at least one of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23. The "threshold value arrival notification" here is, in other words, a warning notification.
Further, when the total number of game media has reached the threshold value, the game medium number control means transmits an abnormality as a loan receipt result response to be transmitted to the loan unit 200.

When the game medium number control means detects the operation of the counting switch 47, the number of game media corresponding to the operation of the counting switch 47 is subtracted from the total number of game media.
When the game medium number control means determines that the value is less than the threshold value as a result of subtracting "1" from the total number of game media, the threshold value arrival flag is set to "0".
When the threshold value arrival flag is "0", the game medium number control means transmits the threshold value non-arrival information to the main control means.
When the main control means receives the threshold value non-arrival information from the game medium number control means, the threshold value arrival flag is set to "0".
When the threshold value arrival flag is "0", the main control means transmits the threshold value non-arrival information to the sub control means.
When the sub-control means receives the threshold non-arrival information from the main control means, the sub-control means sets the threshold notification flag to "0".
When the threshold value notification flag is "0", the sub-control means does not have to perform the threshold value arrival notification.

The sub-control means may immediately end the threshold value notification flag when the threshold value notification flag changes from "1" to "0", but the threshold value notification flag changes from "1" to "0". After that, the threshold value arrival notification may be terminated after the lapse of a predetermined period. Therefore, the threshold value arrival notification is continued until the predetermined period elapses after the threshold value notification flag becomes “0”.
In this case, when the sub-control means determines that the threshold value notification flag has changed from "1" to "0", the sub-control means stores a predetermined value in a predetermined timer value storage area provided in the sub-control RWM, and the sub-control means in the sub-control means. A process of subtracting "1" is executed for each interrupt process (for example, every "1" ms).
When the predetermined timer value is not "0", the sub-control means continues the threshold value arrival notification.
When the predetermined timer value becomes "0", the sub-control means determines that the end condition of the threshold value arrival notification is satisfied and enables the threshold value arrival notification to be terminated.

The upper limit arrival information and the threshold arrival information transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means are transmitted as, for example, 1-byte arrival information (command), a specific bit of the arrival information is used as the upper limit arrival information, and the like. It is mentioned that the specific bit of is used as the threshold value arrival information.
For example, among the arrival information, the threshold arrival information is set to D0 bit, and when it is "1", it is information indicating that the threshold has been reached. Further, the upper limit value arrival information is set to the D1 bit, and when it is "1", it is information indicating that the upper limit value has been reached.
In this case, when the arrival information is "00000001 (B)", the threshold arrival information is "1" and the upper limit arrival information is "0", so that the threshold is reached but the upper limit is reached. It is information indicating that it is not done.
Further, when the arrival information is "00000011 (B)", the threshold arrival information is "1" and the upper limit arrival information is "1", so that the information indicating that the threshold and the upper limit have been reached. It becomes.
Since it is clear that the threshold value has been reached when the upper limit value has been reached, the arrival information when the upper limit value (and the threshold value) has been reached may be set to "00000010 (B)".

In this way, if the bit corresponding to the upper limit arrival information and the bit corresponding to the threshold arrival information are different, the sub-control means can perform different notifications based on the value of the arrival information. For example, when the sub-control means receives the arrival information in which the threshold arrival information is "1" and the upper limit arrival information is "0", the upper limit is reached in "○○. Operate the counting switch." Please do. "Can be displayed on the image display device 23. In addition, when the sub-control means receives the arrival information in which the threshold arrival information is "1" and the upper limit arrival information is "1", the game is interrupted because "the upper limit has been reached." Please operate. ”Can be displayed on the image display device 23.

Further, when different notifications are performed when the threshold value is reached and when the upper limit value is reached, the sub-control means can display an image of the number of remaining gaming media until the upper limit value is reached.
For example, the main control means calculates "upper limit value (16383) -current total number of game media = number of margins" and transmits the number of margins to the sub control means. The sub-control means displays an image of the received margin number. Alternatively, the main control means transmits only the information of the current total number of game media to the sub control means. When the sub control means receives the current total number of game media transmitted from the main control means and the threshold value arrival information is "1", the "upper limit value (16383) -current total number of game media". = Calculation of "margin number" and displaying the calculation result (margin number) as an image.
However, not limited to this, the sub-control means determines whether or not the arrival information transmitted from the main control means is "0", and if it is determined that it is not "0", it prompts a counting switch. May be notified. In this case, it is not determined whether or not the upper limit value has been reached, but at least it is determined that the threshold value has been reached.

Further, the main control means may transmit "1" or "0" arrival information to the sub control means. When the threshold value is not reached, the arrival information of "0" is transmitted, and when the threshold value is reached (whether or not the upper limit value is reached), the arrival information of "1" is transmitted.
In this case, even if the sub-control means receives the arrival information, it can determine that the threshold value has been reached, but cannot determine whether or not the upper limit value has been reached. Therefore, the sub-control means cannot make the notification effect (notification content) different between when the threshold value is reached and when the upper limit value is reached. Therefore, when the sub-control means receives the arrival information of "1", the sub-control means performs a common notification when the threshold value is reached and when the upper limit value is reached. In this case, the sub-control means may simply display "Please operate the counting switch" on the image display device 23. By doing so, the capacity of the command transmitted by the main control means to the sub control means can be reduced, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

When the sub-control means performs the same notification effect when the threshold value is reached and when the upper limit value is reached, the sub-control means performs the notification effect based on the arrival of the threshold value, and then suddenly performs the notification effect when the upper limit value is reached. The mode of the above does not change. As a result, as a result of winning a small role, a game medium is given, and even if the upper limit is exceeded, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the game medium exceeding the upper limit has been lost (urgency). Can be made to look like there is no).

Next, the overflow signal and the overflow test signal will be described.
When the game medium number control means determines that the total number of game media has reached the threshold value, the overflow signal is turned on (the overflow signal is raised). The overflow signal is kept on until the total number of gaming media falls below the threshold. When the game medium number control means determines that the total number of game media is less than the threshold value, the overflow signal is turned off (the overflow signal is turned down).
The game medium number control means transmits an overflow signal to the main control means. When the main control means determines that the overflow signal is turned on, the main control means performs a process for outputting the overflow test signal to the test IF (interface) board.

In the test firing test, when the total number of game media reaches the threshold value, it is controlled to be less than the threshold value. The test IF board is connected to the counting switch 47.
Then, when the process for outputting the overflow test signal to the test IF board is being executed, it is considered that the counting switch 47 has been operated, and the counting process is executed.
The main control means stores the overflow test signal timer value when starting the process for outputting the overflow test signal, in other words, when turning on the overflow test signal. The overflow test signal timer value is for managing the time for turning on the overflow test signal, and is provided in the main control RWM. The process for outputting the overflow test signal is executed until the overflow test signal timer value is determined to be "0".

When the main control means starts the process for outputting the overflow test signal, after storing the initial value as the overflow test signal timer value, the overflow test signal timer is used until it is determined that the overflow test signal has been turned off. Do not subtract the value. While the overflow signal is being output during the test firing test, the count switch signal will not be turned off.
When the game medium number control means determines that the total number of game media is less than the threshold value, the game medium number control means ends the process of transmitting the overflow signal to the main control means.
When the main control means determines that the overflow signal has turned off (when it detects the fall of the overflow signal), it starts subtracting the overflow test signal timer value. The overflow test signal remains on until the overflow test signal timer value becomes "0" even after the overflow signal is turned off, and turns off when the overflow test signal timer value becomes "0". Become. The subtraction of the overflow test signal timer value may be, for example, subtracting "1" for each interrupt process (every "2.235" ms) in the main control means.

The main control means determines whether or not the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is "0", and when it is determined that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is not "0", the overflow test signal is turned on. , Overflow test signal before subtraction When it is determined that the timer value is "0", the overflow test signal is turned off.
In the above example, the main control means determines whether or not the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is "0", and when it is determined that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is not "0", overflow. An example of turning on the test signal was described. However, not limited to this, it is determined whether or not the overflow test signal timer value after subtraction is "0", and when it is determined that the overflow test signal timer value after subtraction is not "0", the overflow test signal is used. You may turn it on.

As an initial value of the overflow test signal timer value to be stored when the overflow test signal is turned on, for example, "1209" may be set. Since the interrupt time interval of the main control means is "2.235" ms, when the interrupt process is executed "1209" times, "2702.115" ms elapses. Therefore, after the overflow signal is turned off, the overflow test signal will be output for "2702.115" ms.

The transmission interval of the game machine information notification transmitted by the game medium number control means toward the rental unit 200 is “300” ms. Therefore, the gaming machine information notification is transmitted nine times during "2702.115" ms.
That is, when the game medium number control means turns on the overflow signal and the main control means turns on the overflow test signal, the counting switch signal is turned on, "50" is counted as the number of counting game media, and then the game. The total number of game media falls below the threshold value of "15000" due to the execution of the counting process by the medium number control means.
Further, since the overflow test signal is maintained on for the interrupt processing "1209" times of the main control means even after the game medium number control means turns off the overflow signal, the counting switch 47 keeps turning on for "2702.115" ms. It can be a pseudo state that is turned on. As a result, "450" is counted as the number of counting game media for nine times of the gaming machine information notification.

Therefore, when the test IF board and the main control means are connected (when the test firing test is executed), the counting switch signal is also turned on when the game medium number control means once turns on the overflow signal. This means that in addition to one counting process (number of counting game media "50") that is executed when the overflow signal is turned on, the counting process can be executed nine times even after the overflow signal is turned off. , "500" will be counted as the number of counting game media.
As a result, after the total number of gaming media reaches the threshold value "15000" or more during the test firing test, the counting gaming media number "500" can be subtracted from the total number of gaming media, so that the overflow signal immediately overflows after the overflow signal is turned off. It is possible to prevent the signal from turning on (the threshold is reached again immediately after the total number of gaming media falls below the threshold), and when the gaming machine 10 during the test firing test is operating an AT or an accessory. Even in an advantageous state such as, the frequency of counting processing due to the total number of gaming media reaching the threshold value "15000" or more can be reduced, so that the malfunction of the gaming machine 10 and the output of an error sound during the test firing machine test are output. The frequency can be reduced.

The overflow test signal timer value is not limited to the above-mentioned value, and can be arbitrarily set as long as it is a value equal to or longer than the time (300 ms) for transmitting the gaming machine information notification once. That is, when the overflow test signal timer value is updated (subtracted) for each interrupt process, any value of "135" (2.235 ms × 135 = 301.725 ms) or more can be set as the overflow test signal timer value.
Further, in the above-mentioned example, the main control means has described an example of updating the overflow test signal timer value for each interrupt process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frequency is not limited to this, but once every two interrupts or once every three interrupts. The overflow test signal timer value may be updated. In this case, the overflow test signal timer value can be set to a small value. For example, when the main control means updates the overflow test signal timer value once every five interrupts, the overflow test signal timer value can be set to "242" instead of the above example "1209". By doing so, the overflow test signal timer value can be set to 1 byte or less (the capacity of the main control RWM can be saved), and the time for turning on the overflow test signal is set to "2704.35" ms. be able to.

Further, in the game machine 10, even during the counting process, the progress of the game (bet process, lottery process based on the operation of the start switch 41 and the start of the game, the stop control process of the reel 31 by the operation of the stop switch 42, etc.) Since it is possible, even if the total number of game media reaches the threshold value and the counting process is executed during the test firing test, the test firing test is not interrupted. Therefore, the test firing test can be smoothly executed.

Next, the (timer) interrupt processing of the game medium number control means will be described.
The game medium number control means executes interrupt processing every "1" ms. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution may be performed every "2.235" ms, which is the same as that of the main control means.
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) of the game medium number control means. Note that FIG. 61 is an excerpt of the process related to the fifth embodiment, and is not limited to the process shown in FIG. 61.
In FIG. 61, in step S801, the game medium number control means executes the input port reading process (I_IN_READ). This process is the process shown in FIG. 62, which will be described later. In particular, in the fifth embodiment, it is detected whether or not the counting switch 47 has been operated, and the processing according to the operation mode of the counting switch 47 is executed.

In the next step S802, the gaming medium number control means executes the gaming machine information management (I_INF_CTL). This process is the process shown in FIG. 63, which will be described later, and corresponds to FIG. 41 of the second embodiment. This process determines whether or not the timing for transmitting the gaming machine information notification has arrived, and when it is determined that the timing for transmitting the gaming machine information notification has arrived, the processing for transmitting the gaming machine information notification is executed. Is.
In the next step S803, the game medium number control means executes counting control (I_CAL_CTL). This process is a process shown in FIG. 68, which will be described later, and determines whether or not the timing for transmitting the count notification has arrived, and when it is determined that the timing for transmitting the count notification has arrived, the count notification is transmitted. It executes the process.

In the next step S804, the game medium number control means receives the loan notification. When the counting notification is transmitted in step S803, as shown in FIG. 32, the lending notification is transmitted from the lending unit 200 within "170" ms, and the process of receiving the lending notification is executed.
In the next step S805, the game medium number control means executes lending control (I_LEN_CTL). This process corresponds to any one of FIGS. 69 (Example 1) to 72 (Example 4) described later, and is an update process of the total number of gaming media and a loan receipt result based on the received loan notification. It executes response transmission processing and the like.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing input port reading (I_IN_READ) in step S801 of FIG. Here, the process shown in FIG. 61 is an excerpt of the main part related to counting in the input port read process. Therefore, in the input port reading process, various processes other than the process shown in FIG. 62 are executed. Further, the processing related to counting in the input port reading processing is not limited to the processing shown in FIG. 62.
In FIG. 62, in step S811, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the counting switch 47 has been operated. Here, it is determined whether or not the level data (counting switch signal) that is turned on when the counting switch 47 is operated is “1”. When it is determined that the counting switch 47 is not operated, the process proceeds to step S812, and when it is determined that the counting switch 47 is operated, the process proceeds to step S816.

In step S812, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the counting execution timer value is “0”. The counting execution timer is provided in the game medium number control RWM, and determines whether or not the counting execution timer value is “0”. When the counting switch 47 is not operated, the counting execution timer value is "0", and when it is determined that the counting switch 47 is operated, "1" is added to the counting execution timer value. Then, the counting execution timer value is added until the counting execution timer value becomes "500".
If it is determined in step S812 that the counting execution timer value is "0", the process proceeds to step S815, and if it is determined that the counting execution timer value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S813.

In step S813, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the counting execution flag is “0”. Here, the counting execution flag is provided in the game medium number control RWM, and it is determined whether or not the value of the counting execution flag is “0”. The counting execution flag is "0" when the counting switch 47 is not operated, "1" when it is short-pressed (about "500" ms or less), and long-pressed (about "500" ms or more). When it is, it is a flag that becomes "2".
Specifically, when the counting switch 47 is turned off after the counting switch 47 is operated (turned on) and before the counting execution timer value reaches "500", the counting is executed in step S814. The flag becomes "1". Since the counting execution timer value is added by "1" in step S817 for each timer interrupt processing (every "1" ms) by the game medium number control means, the counting execution timer value is set after the counting switch 47 is turned on. Will reach "500" after about "500" ms.

If it is determined in step S813 that the counting execution flag is not "0", the process proceeds to step S815, and if it is determined that the counting execution flag is "0", the process proceeds to step S814.
In step S814, the game medium number control means saves "1" in the counting execution flag. In other words, when the counting switch 47 is turned off (from on), the counting execution timer value is not "0", and the counting execution flag is "0", the counting switch 47 is briefly pressed. Therefore, the counting execution flag is set to "1". Next, the process proceeds to step S815 to clear the counting execution timer. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
When the counting process described later is executed, the counting execution flag is cleared (step S846 in FIG. 68).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S811 that the counting switch 47 is on and the process proceeds to step S816, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the counting execution timer value has reached "500". If it is determined that the counting execution timer value has not reached "500", the process proceeds to step S817, and if it is determined that the counting execution timer value has reached "500", the process proceeds to step S819.
In step S817, the game medium number control means adds “1” to the counting execution timer value. Next, the process proceeds to step S818, and the game medium number control means saves the counting execution timer value (the value after adding "1" in step S817). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S816 that the counting execution timer value has reached "500" and the process proceeds to step S819, the game medium number control means saves "2" in the counting execution flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

From the above, under the condition that the counting switch signal is on (the turning of the counting switch 47 is detected), the counting execution flag is not changed until the counting execution timer value reaches "500", and the counting execution timer is not changed. The value keeps updating. Then, when the counting execution timer value reaches "500" while the counting switch 47 is detected to be turned on, the counting execution flag becomes "2", and the counting execution timer value is not updated thereafter. After that, when the counting switch 47 is turned off, it is determined as "No" in step S811, "No" in step S812, and "Yes" in step S813, and the process proceeds to step S815 to clear the counting execution timer value.
On the other hand, if the counting switch signal is turned off after the counting switch signal is turned on and before the counting execution timer value reaches "500", the counting execution flag is set to "1". After that, the counting execution timer value is not updated.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information management (I_INF_CTL) shown in step S802 of FIG.
Here, the difference between the gaming machine information management in the second embodiment (FIG. 41) and the gaming machine information management in the fifth embodiment (FIG. 631) will be described.
In the second embodiment, the priority of the gaming machine information in the gaming machine information notification is, without exception, that the first priority is the gaming machine installation information (every "60" seconds) and the second priority is the gaming machine performance information ("180"). (Every second), and finally, the pachinko / fraud monitoring information (every "300" ms).
On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment,
(A) When there is no change in the main control state, there is no bet (insertion) of the game medium, and there is no grant (payout) of the game medium.
First priority: gaming machine installation information Second priority: gaming machine performance information Last: Hall control / fraud monitoring information (same as the second embodiment).
(B) When there is a change in the main control state, when there is a bet (insertion) of the game medium, or when there is a grant (payout) of the game medium.
1st priority: Hall control / fraud monitoring information 2nd priority: Pachinko machine installation information Last: Pachinko machine performance information.

In FIG. 63, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 41, and the step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined.
Hereinafter, the gaming machine information management of FIG. 63 will be described again including a portion overlapping with the second embodiment (FIG. 41).
First, in step S721, "1" is subtracted from the gaming machine information notification timer A (the gaming machine information notification timer A is updated). Next, the process proceeds to step S722, and it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is “0”. When the carry flag becomes "1" in the subtraction process of step S721, it is determined that the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "0". Since the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update was "0", the carry flag is set to "1" because the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to "0" when the power is turned on. Corresponds to the case where "1" is subtracted after (initialized). If it is determined that the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "0", the process proceeds to step S823, and if it is determined that the timer A is not "0", the process proceeds to step S723.

In step S723, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is “1”. In other words, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A has become "0" due to the update, and in other words, whether or not the zero flag has become "1" due to the update. When it is determined that the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "1", the process proceeds to step S724, and when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
When the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A before the update is "1", it means that it is the timing of the "300" ms cycle, that is, the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification including the hall computer / fraud monitoring information. ..

On the other hand, when it is not the transmission timing of the notification A, it is not the timing of the "300" ms cycle, so it is neither the transmission timing of the "60" second cycle nor the transmission timing of the "180" second cycle. In other words, it is neither the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification including the gaming machine installation information nor the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information including the gaming machine performance information. Therefore, when it is determined that it is not the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information including the hall control / fraud monitoring information, whether or not it is the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification including the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information are included. The game machine information management is terminated without determining whether or not it is the transmission timing of the game machine installation information. As a result, the program processing can be simplified and the game machine information management can be speeded up.

In step S724, the initial value is saved in the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A. Here, the initial value is "300". Since the timer interrupt cycle of the game medium number control means is "1" ms, it is possible to count "300" ms by storing "300" as the value of the game machine information notification timer A. Therefore, when the calculation result becomes "0" by the subtraction in step S721, "300" is immediately stored in step S724.

As the operation instruction in step S721 described above, a DCPWLD instruction can be mentioned. The DCPWLD instruction is an instruction to store a predetermined value when the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtracting "1". The predetermined value in this embodiment is "300". Therefore, after the game machine information notification timer A is initialized to "0" after the power is turned on, when "1" is subtracted in step S721 in the game machine information management process in the first interrupt process, the carry The flag becomes "1" and a predetermined value "300" is stored.
In this way, the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to "0" by the initialization process at the time of turning on the power, but other than that, except for the period after the process of step S721 and before the process of step S724. The value of the gaming machine information notification timer A never becomes "0" (except when an abnormality occurs).

In the next step S725, a process of adding "1" to the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is executed. A special addition instruction is used for the addition process here. Specifically, when a value less than "199" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B, "1" is added to the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B, and the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B is set. When it is not less than "199" (that is, when "199" is stored under normal operating conditions), it is an arithmetic process for storing "0" in the gaming machine information notification timer B.

When the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer B is performed, "0" to "199" can be circulated as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B.
Further, the situation in which "1" is added when "199" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B means that the opportunity for the gaming machine information notification timer A to become "0" has arrived "200" times. Corresponds to the situation. In other words, since the gaming machine information notification timer B is incremented by "1" every time the interrupt processing is executed "300" times, the interrupt processing of "300 times x 200 times = 60,000 times" is executed ( "60" seconds have passed).

Originally, a storage area of "2" bytes must be provided in order to measure whether or not "60,000" interrupt processes have been executed. However, by updating the gaming machine information notification timer B based on the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A, the storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer B can be set to "1" bytes, and the number of gaming media control RWM can be set. Capacity can be reduced.
Further, as an operation instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer B, an ICPLD instruction can be mentioned.
In the above example, the instruction to add "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer B is executed, but it may be an instruction to subtract "1". In the case of a subtraction command, "200" may be stored as an initial value in the gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and then "200" may be stored when the value becomes "0". Alternatively, "199" may be stored as an initial value in the gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and then "200" may be stored when the carry flag becomes "1".

Further, since the update of the game machine information notification timer B is used as the addition command, the process of setting the initial value can be omitted as compared with the case of the subtraction command (the initial value is "0" due to the initialization process at the time of turning on the power). Therefore, the processing speed can be improved and the program capacity can be reduced.

In step S726, it is determined whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed. Here, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes “0” by adding “1”, it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed. On the other hand, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer B does not become "0" due to the addition of "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has not elapsed.
When it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S727, and when it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S821.
In step S727, a process of adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C is executed.
A special addition instruction is used for the addition process here. Specifically, when a value less than "2" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer B, "1" is added to the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C, and the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C is set. When it is not less than "2" (that is, when "3" is stored under normal operating conditions), it is an arithmetic process for storing "0" in the gaming machine information notification timer C.

When the arithmetic processing using the special addition instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C is performed, "0" to "2" can be circulated as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C.
Further, the situation in which "1" is added when "2" is stored in the gaming machine information notification timer C means that the opportunity for the gaming machine information notification timer B to become "0" has arrived "3" times. Corresponds to the situation. In other words, the gaming machine information notification timer B is added by "1" every time the interrupt processing is executed "300" times, and the gaming machine information notification timer B is updated every "200" times. Since "1" is added to C, the interrupt processing of "300 times x 200 times x 3 times = 180,000 times" is executed ("180" seconds have elapsed).

Originally, in order to measure whether or not "180000" interrupt processing has been executed, a storage area of "3" bytes must be provided, but based on the value of the game machine information notification timer A. Since the value of the game machine information notification timer B is updated and the value of the game machine information notification timer C is updated based on the value of the game machine information notification timer B, the storage area of the game machine information notification timer C is set to "1". It can be a byte, and the storage capacity of the RWM 103 can be reduced.
Further, as an operation instruction for adding "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C, the above-mentioned ICPLD instruction can be mentioned.
In the above example, the instruction to add "1" to the gaming machine information notification timer C is executed, but it may be a subtraction instruction. In the case of the subtraction command, the initial value "3" may be stored as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, and then "3" may be stored when the value becomes "0". Alternatively, the initial value "2" may be stored as the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, and then "3" may be stored when the carry flag becomes "1".

However, if the update of the game machine information notification timer C is used as an addition command as in the present embodiment, the process of setting the initial value can be omitted as compared with the case of using the subtraction command (initialization process at power-on). Therefore, the initial value becomes "0"), so that the processing speed can be improved and the program capacity can be reduced.

In step S728, it is determined whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed. Here, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "0" by adding "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed. On the other hand, when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer C does not become "0" due to the addition of "1", it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has not elapsed.
When it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S729, and when it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S730.

It should be noted that the process of step S727 is executed only when it is determined as "Yes" in step S726. This is because the timing for updating the gaming machine information notification timer C is limited to when the gaming machine information notification timer B becomes “0”. Further, in the next step S728, it is determined whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed only when it is determined as "Yes" in step S726. Whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed depends on whether or not the cycle of "180" seconds has arrived, and the cycle of "180" seconds always arrives in the cycle of "60" seconds. Is coming (the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed).

In step S729, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag. In the next step S730, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag.
That is, when it is determined that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed, it means that the cycle of "180" seconds has arrived, and the cycle of "180" seconds includes the cycle of "60" seconds. Therefore, the timing for notifying the gaming machine performance information has arrived, and the timing for notifying the gaming machine installation information has arrived. Therefore, both the "D0" and "D1" bits of the gaming machine information notification request flag are set to "1".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S726 that the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B has elapsed and the time of the gaming machine information notification timer C has not elapsed, the cycle is "60" seconds. (Timing to notify the gaming machine installation information) has arrived, but the cycle of "180" seconds (timing to notify the gaming machine performance information) has not arrived. Therefore, in this case, the process of step S729 is not executed, only the process of step S730 is executed, and only the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is set to "1".

In this way, in order to manage the timing of transmitting the gaming machine installation information and the timing of transmitting the gaming machine performance information with the flag, the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information are transmitted. The process to be performed can be simplified. In other words, by interlocking timers corresponding to various information, it is possible to transmit without individual management. Further, since the measurement start timing of the timer for transmitting the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information does not deviate, accurate transmission becomes possible.

In step S821, the game medium number control means determines whether or not there has been a change in the main control state. Here, the "main control state" includes, in the present embodiment, when the accessory is not operating (non-special (BB, RB, CB, etc.) game) and when the accessory is operating (special game). Furthermore, non-AT and AT may be included.
The main control means transmits information on the main control state to the game medium number control means each time the transmission timing of the main control state arrives (for example, each timer interrupt process).
On the other hand, the game medium number control means has a new main control state storage area and an old main control state storage area. When the game medium number control means receives the main control state information from the main control means, the game medium number control means stores the received main control state information in the new main control state storage area. On the other hand, when the hall control / fraud monitoring information set described later is executed, the game medium number control means stores the main control state information stored in the new main control state storage area in the old main control state storage area. (Steps S953 and S954 in FIG. 64, which will be described later). Therefore, at the time of determination in step S821, the main control state information is stored in both the new main control state storage area and the old main control state storage area.
In this way, by storing the main control state information received from the main control means separately in the new main control state storage area and the old main control state storage area, the main control state information is stored from the main control means. It can be determined that there is no change in the main control state even if the above is not received, and the priority of the gaming machine information can be grasped.

Then, in step S821, the game medium number control means compares the information of the main control state stored in the new main control state storage area with the information of the main control state stored in the old main control state storage area, and both of them. When they are the same, it is judged that there is no change in the main control state, and when they are different, it is judged that there is a change in the main control state. When it is determined that there is a change in the main control state, the process proceeds to step S823, and when it is determined that there is no change, the process proceeds to step S822.

Here, the processing according to the main control state will be specifically described.
For example, assume that "0" is stored in the new main control state storage area and "0" is stored in the old main control state storage area.
In this state, when the determination timing of step S821 arrives, the value of the new main control state storage area (“0”) and the value of the old main control state storage area (“0”) are the same, so that the main control state is entered. It is judged that there is no change.
Further, when the hall controller / fraud monitoring information set is executed, the value "0" of the new main control state storage area is acquired and stored in the old main control state storage area. However, even if this process is executed, the value of the new main control state storage area and the value of the old main control state storage area remain "0".

When the main control state changes (here, it is assumed that the state changes from "0" to "1"), the main control means informs the game medium number control means of the main control state "1". To send. When the game medium number control means receives the information "1" of the main control state, it stores it in the new main control state storage area. As a result, the value of the new main control state storage area is updated from "0" to "1".
In this state, when the determination timing of step S821 arrives, the value of the new main control state storage area (“1”) and the value of the old main control state storage area (“0”) are different, so that the main control state changes. It is judged that there is.

Further, when the hall controller / fraud monitoring information set is executed, the value "1" of the new main control state storage area is acquired and stored in the old main control state storage area. As a result, both the value of the new main control state storage area and the value of the old main control state storage area become "1".
Therefore, when the gaming machine information management is executed again after the elapse of "300" ms, in step S821, both the value of the new main control state storage area and the value of the old main control state storage area are "1". It is judged that there is no change in the control state.
In this way, when there is a change in the main control state, it is determined that there is a change in the main control state only once.

In the next step S822, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the bet number information of the game medium is not "0" and whether or not the grant number information of the game medium is not "0".
In the fifth embodiment, the game medium number control RWM has a bet number information storage area for storing the bet number information of the game this time and a grant number information storage area for storing the grant number information of the game medium of the game this time. are doing. These bet number information storage areas and grant number information storage areas are storage areas different from the storage areas used in the bet processing and grant processing, and the bet number and grant number storage areas used in the combination monitor, and the game It is a storage area for use in machine information management.

The game medium number control means does not store the bet number information in the bet number information storage area only when the game medium is bet. When the game is started, the main control means transmits a start switch acceptance command to the game medium number control means. The game medium number control control means generates a bet number when the start switch acceptance command is received (when the bet number is fixed), and stores the bet number information in the bet number information storage area.
Further, when the main control means determines that all reels have stopped, the main control means transmits a command to stop all reels to the game medium number control means. When the game medium number control means receives the command to stop all reels, the game medium number control means generates the grant number of the game media and stores the grant number information in the grant number information storage area.

Then, at the timing of step S822, the game medium number control means is not "0" whether or not the value stored in the bet number information storage area is "0", and the value stored in the granted number information storage area is not "0". Judge whether or not. If the value stored in the bet number information storage area is not "0", or if the value stored in the grant number information storage area is not "0", the process proceeds to step S823. On the other hand, if the value stored in the bet number information storage area is "0" and the value stored in the grant number information storage area is "0", the process proceeds to step S731.

When the hall control / fraud monitoring information set is executed, the bet number information stored in the bet number information storage area and the grant number stored in the grant number information storage area are executed in step S952 of FIG. 64, which will be described later. The information is cleared. Therefore, if the game machine information management is executed again after the lapse of "300" ms after it is determined in step S822 that the bet number information or the grant number information is not "0", the bet number information and the grant are granted in step S822. Since all the numerical information is "0", it is determined to be "No".
If the next game is started within "300" ms after the game medium is given, or if the game medium is given within "300" ms after the game is started, the next game machine information management will be performed. Will be judged as "Yes" in step S822, but such an event is considered to be rare.

In step S731, the gaming medium number control means determines whether or not there is a notification request for gaming machine installation information. Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set. Therefore, if the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is "1", it is determined that there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information, and the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag must be "1". If so, it is judged that there is no notification request for the gaming machine installation information.
If it is determined that there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information, the process proceeds to step S825, and if it is determined that there is no notification request for the gaming machine installation information, the process proceeds to step S732.

In step S732, the gaming medium number control means determines whether or not there is a notification request for gaming machine performance information. Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set. Therefore, if the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is "1", it is determined that there is a notification request for the gaming machine performance information, and the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag must be "1". If so, it is judged that there is no notification request for the gaming machine performance information.
If it is determined that there is a notification request for the gaming machine performance information, the process proceeds to step S824, and if it is determined that there is no notification request for the gaming machine performance information, the process proceeds to step S823.

In step S823, the game medium number control means executes the hall controller / fraud monitoring information set (I_INF_INJ). This process is a process shown in FIG. 64, which will be described later, and is a process for outputting a gaming machine information notification including hall control / fraud monitoring information.
In step S722, when the gaming medium number control means determines that the value before the update of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "0", the gaming machine information notification timer B or the gaming machine information notification timer C is used. The hall controller / fraud monitoring information set is executed without executing the determination of whether or not the time has elapsed (processes of steps S726 and S728). The reason is that the value before the update of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "0" only at the time of the subtraction processing in the first interrupt processing immediately after the power is turned on. In other words, it is impossible that "60" seconds or "180" seconds have elapsed during the subtraction process in the first interrupt process immediately after the power is turned on. In such a case, the processing can be performed by executing the hall controller / fraud monitoring information set without executing the determination of whether or not the time of the gaming machine information notification timer B or the gaming machine information notification timer C has elapsed. It is possible to speed up (speed up the transmission process).

Further, in step S731, it is determined whether or not there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information, and if it is determined that there is no notification request for the gaming machine installation information, the process proceeds to step S732 and there is a notification request for the gaming machine performance information. It is a processing order to judge whether or not. By setting such a processing order, in the situation where both the gaming machine installation information notification request flag and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag are set (the situation where the "180" second cycle has arrived), first By determining whether or not there is a notification request for the gaming machine installation information, the transmission processing of the gaming machine installation information can be executed (priority can be given) before the transmission processing of the gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, in the hall control / fraud monitoring information set in step S823, the latest information at that time is transmitted.
For example, as for the total number of game media included in the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the information stored in the game medium number storage means 103a (_NB_MEDAL) at the time of transmission is transmitted. In other words, if the transmission timing every "300" ms, which is the transmission timing of the hall controller / fraud monitoring information, coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information or the gaming machine performance information, the pachinko / pachislot machine performance information is transmitted in step S821 or step S822. Unless it is judged as "Yes", the transmission of the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information is prioritized, so the hall computer / fraud monitoring information is not transmitted at that timing, and after the next "300" ms elapses ( Hall control / fraud monitoring information is transmitted when it coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information) or after "600" ms has elapsed (when it coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information).
The "hole-con / fraud monitoring information transmitted after" 300 "ms or" 600 "ms has elapsed" is not the hall-con / fraud monitoring information at the time when it coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information, but " It is the hall control / fraud monitoring information acquired at the timing of transmitting the hall control / fraud monitoring information after the lapse of 300 "ms or after the lapse of" 600 "ms. Therefore, even if the transmission timing of the hall control / fraud monitoring information is delayed, the latest information can be transmitted.

From step S731 to step S825, the game medium number control means executes the game machine installation information set (I_INF_INS). This process is a process shown in FIG. 66, which will be described later, and is a process for outputting a game machine information notification including game machine installation information. Further, the content to be transmitted at this time is the information stored in the game medium number control ROM or the like acquired at this timing.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S732 to step S824, the game medium number control means executes the game machine performance information set (I_INF_INJ). This process is a process shown in FIG. 65, which will be described later, and is a process for outputting a gaming machine information notification including gaming machine performance information. Further, the content to be transmitted at this time is the information stored in the game medium number control RWM or the like acquired at this timing.

As described above, when there is no change in the main control state at the determination timings of steps S821 and S822, and the bet number information of the game medium is "0" and the grant number information is "0", the game machine is installed. Information and gaming machine performance information are transmitted with priority over hall control / fraud monitoring information.
On the other hand, if there is a change in the main control state at the determination timings of steps S821 and S822, or if the bet number information of the gaming medium is not "0" or the grant number information is not "0", the hall controller. The fraud monitoring information is transmitted with priority over the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information.

By executing the process shown in FIG. 63, it is possible to transmit the gaming machine information having a high priority in the gaming machine information notification. Then, it is possible to speed up the processing without complicating the program (without increasing the program capacity) while enabling the transmission of the gaming machine information having a high priority.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the hole control / fraud monitoring information set (I_INF_INJ) in step S823 of FIG.
First, in step S951, the game medium number control means sets the hall controller / fraud monitoring information. This process is a process of transmitting a gaming machine information notification including hall control / fraud monitoring information.
In the next step S952, the game medium number control means clears the bet number information and the grant number information. This process is a process of setting the bet number information stored in the bet number information storage area and the grant number information stored in the grant number information storage area to “0”.

In this way, the bet number information is cleared every time the hole control / fraud monitoring information set is executed, so that the hole is based on the fact that the bet number information is not "0" at the timing of transmitting the next game information notification. The transmission of fraud monitoring information is not prioritized.
Similarly, since the grant number information is cleared each time the hall control / fraud monitoring information set is executed, the hall control is based on the fact that the grant number information is not "0" at the timing of transmitting the next game information notification. -The transmission of fraud monitoring information is not prioritized.

In the next step S953, the game medium number control means acquires the main control state stored in the new main control state storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S954, and the main control state acquired in step S953 is stored in the old main control state storage area. By the processing of these steps S953 and S954, the main control state stored in the old main control state storage area is updated. In other words, the main control state stored in the old main control state storage area is updated every time the hall controller / fraud monitoring information is executed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S955, and the game medium number control means updates the serial number (adds "1"). As for the serial number, like the counting serial number, "0" is transmitted as the serial number at the time of transmission immediately after the power is restored, and after that, any one of "1" to "255" can be transmitted ("1" to 25). It is updated (to circulate "255"). This serial number is a serial number that is updated when any one of the three information of hall control / fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information is transmitted. In other words, since the same serial number is used for hall control / fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, the serial number is updated every "300" ms when the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine performance information set (I_INF_ABI) in step S824 of FIG.
First, in step S971, the gaming medium number control means sets the gaming machine performance information. This process is a process of transmitting a gaming machine information notification including gaming functionality information. Next, the process proceeds to step S972, and the gaming medium number control means clears the gaming machine performance information notification request flag. Specifically, the "D0" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is set to "0". This process is the same as the process of step S737 in FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S973, and the game medium number control means updates the serial number (adds “1”). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine installation information set (I_INF_INS) in step S825 of FIG. 63.
First, in step S981, the gaming medium number control means sets the gaming machine installation information. This process is a process of transmitting a gaming machine information notification including gaming machine installation information. Next, the process proceeds to step S982, and the gaming medium number control means clears the gaming machine installation information notification request flag. Specifically, the "D1" bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag is set to "0". This process is the same as the process of step S735 in FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S983, and the game medium number control means updates the serial number (adds “1”). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Subsequently, the transmission of the gaming machine information notification in the fifth embodiment will be described in chronological order.
FIG. 67 is a diagram (time chart) showing an update sequence of the gaming machine information notification timer according to the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 40 of the second embodiment. In FIG. 63, when it is determined to be "No" in step S821 and "No" is determined in step S822, the priority of the gaming machine information notification is the same as that of the second embodiment, and the update shown in FIG. 40. Same as the sequence.
On the other hand, FIG. 67 shows an example in which the hall controller / fraud monitoring information has priority over the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information.
FIG. 67 shows an example in which the timer value for hall control / fraud monitoring information transmission changes from “1” to “300” at the timing of “T1”, and the main control state changes at this timing. It shall be. Further, at the timing of "T1", the timer value for transmitting the gaming machine installation information is changed from "199" to "0", and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is changed to "1". ("* 2" in the figure). In other words, at the timing of "T1", the transmission timings of the hall controller / fraud monitoring information and the gaming machine installation information are duplicated.

Then, in the hall control / fraud monitoring information whose main control state is changing and the gaming machine installation information, the transmission of the hall control / fraud monitoring information whose main control state is changing is prioritized. Therefore, at the timing of "T1", the hall control / fraud monitoring information is transmitted ("* 1" in the figure). Therefore, at the timing of "T1", the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is set to "1", but the gaming machine installation information is not transmitted ("* 2" in the figure).

Next, when "300" ms has elapsed from the timing of "T1" and the timing of "T2" is reached, there is no change in the main control state, and both the bet number information and the grant number information are "0". Suppose that In this case, the transmission of the gaming machine installation information is prioritized between the hall computer / fraud monitoring information and the gaming machine installation information. Therefore, at the timing of "T2", the hall controller / fraud monitoring information is not transmitted ("* 3" in the figure), but the gaming machine installation information is transmitted ("* 4" in the figure). Then, after this transmission, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) becomes "0".

Next, an example is shown in which the timer value for hall control / fraud monitoring information transmission changes from "1" to "300" at the timing of "T3", and the number of grant information is not "0" at this timing. And. Further, at the timing of "T3", an example in which the timer value for transmitting the gaming machine installation information is changed from "199" to "0" and the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is changed to "1" is shown. ("* 6" in the figure). Further, at the timing of "T3", an example is shown in which the timer value for transmitting the gaming machine performance information is changed from "2" to "0" and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) is changed to "1". ("* 7" in the figure). In other words, at the timing of "T3", the transmission timings of the hall controller / fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information are duplicated.

Then, in the hall control / fraud monitoring information whose grant number information is not "0", the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information, the transmission of the hall control / fraud monitoring information whose grant number information is not "0" is prioritized. Therefore, at the timing of "T3", the hall control / fraud monitoring information is transmitted ("* 5" in the figure). Therefore, at the timing of "T3", the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is set to "1", but the gaming machine installation information is not transmitted ("* 6" in the figure).
Similarly, at the timing of "T3", the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) is set to "1", but the gaming machine performance information is not transmitted ("* 7" in the figure).

Next, when "300" ms has elapsed from the timing of "T3" and the timing of "T4" is reached, there is no change in the main control state, and both the bet number information and the grant number information are "0". Suppose that In this case, the transmission of the gaming machine installation information is prioritized in the hall control / fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information. Therefore, at the timing of "T4", the hall controller / fraud monitoring information is not transmitted ("* 8" in the figure), and the gaming machine performance information is not transmitted ("* 10" in the figure), and the gaming machine is installed. Information is transmitted (“* 9” in the figure). Then, after this transmission, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) becomes "0".

Further, when "300" ms has elapsed from the timing of "T4" and the timing of "T5" is reached, there is no change in the main control state, and both the bet number information and the grant number information are "0". It shall be. At the timing of "T5", the gaming machine installation information notification request flag (D1 bit) is "0", so it is not the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information. On the other hand, at the timing of "T5", the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) is "1", so that it is the transmission timing of the gaming machine performance information.
In this case, the transmission of the gaming machine performance information is prioritized between the hall control / fraud monitoring information and the gaming machine performance information. Therefore, at the timing of "T5", the hall controller / fraud monitoring information is not transmitted ("* 11" in the figure), but the gaming machine performance information is transmitted ("* 12" in the figure). Then, after this transmission, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag (D0 bit) becomes "0".

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the counting control (I_CAL_CTL) in step S803 of FIG. This process corresponds to FIG. 37 of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the counting process of the fifth embodiment will be described again.
Similar to the second embodiment, in the fifth embodiment as well, the game medium number control RWM is provided with the following storage area.
(A) Counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE)
It is a storage area for storing data indicating whether or not counting is in progress.
(B) Count value storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL)
It is a storage area for storing the counting value (counting game medium number) to be transmitted at the time of counting notification.
(C) Count cumulative value storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL)
It is a storage area for storing the cumulative count value (the number of cumulative game media for count).
(D) Counting serial number storage area (_NB_CAL_NUM)
It is a storage area for storing the counting serial number.

First, in step S831, the game medium number control means determines whether or not it is the counting notification timing. As shown in FIG. 32, the “counting notification timing” refers to a timing that is “100” ms after the game machine information notification is transmitted.
When it is determined that it is the counting notification timing, the process proceeds to step S832, and when it is determined that it is not the counting notification timing, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

When it is determined that it is the counting notification timing and the process proceeds to step S832, the game medium number control means clears the counting flag (to "0"). Next, the process proceeds to step S833, and the game medium number control means determines whether or not the counting execution flag is “0”. If it is determined that the counting execution flag is not "0", the process proceeds to step S834, and if it is determined that the counting execution flag is "0", the process proceeds to step S848. The fact that the counting execution flag is "0" means that the counting switch 47 is not operated.
In step S834, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the total number of game media is “0”. If it is determined that the total number of gaming media is not "0", the process proceeds to step S835, and if it is determined that the total number of gaming media is "0", the process proceeds to step S848.

In step S835, "50" is set as the counting value (number of counting game media).
Next, the process proceeds to step S836, and the game medium number control means determines whether or not the counting execution flag is “2”. The fact that the counting execution flag is "2" means that the counting switch 47 has been pressed for a long time. If it is determined that the counting execution flag is "2", the process proceeds to step S837, and if it is determined that the counting execution flag is not "2", the process proceeds to step S847.

In step S837, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the total number of game media is "50" or more. If it is determined that the total number of gaming media is "50" or more, the process proceeds to step S839, and if it is determined that the total number of gaming media is not "50" or more, the process proceeds to step S838.
In step S838, the total number of game media is set as a counting value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S839 to save the counted value.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S833 that the counting execution flag is "0" (the counting switch 47 is not operated) and the process proceeds to step S848, the game medium number control means sets "0" as the counting value. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S839 to save the count value “0”.

If it is determined in step S836 that the count execution flag is not "2", the process proceeds to step S847 and the count value "1" is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S839 to save the count value “1”. Here, it is determined that "No" is determined in step S833 and "No" is determined in step S836 when the counting execution flag is "1", so that the counting switch 47 is briefly pressed. means.
Since the count value is "0" before the start of this process (because the count value is cleared in step S844 of the previous process), the process of step S848 may not be performed. Therefore, when it is determined as "Yes" in step S833, the process may proceed to step S839.

From the above,
(1) When the counting switch 47 is not operated, the counting value "0" is set.
(2) Even when the counting switch 47 is operated, when the total number of game media is "0", the counting value "0" is set.
(3) When the counting switch 47 is briefly pressed and the total number of game media is not "0", the counting value "1" is set.
(4) When the counting switch 47 is pressed and held for a long time and the total number of game media is "50" or more, the counting value "50" is set.
(5) When the counting switch 47 is pressed and held for a long time and the total number of gaming media is less than "50", the total number of gaming media is set as the counting value.
It will be.

In the next step S840, the game medium number control means updates the total number of game media. This process is a process of subtracting the count value from the total number of game media.
Next, the process proceeds to step S841, and the game medium number control means adds the count value to the value in the count cumulative value storage area and updates the value in the count cumulative value storage area.
Next, the process proceeds to step S842, and the game medium number control means sets the counting flag (stores “FFh”).

Then, the process proceeds to step S843, and the game medium number control means outputs a counting notification. Specifically, "0x07h" is output as the message length, "0x02h" is output as a command, the counting serial number stored in the counting serial number storage area is output as the counting serial number, and the counting value is stored as the counting value. The count value stored in the area is output, the count cumulative value stored in the count cumulative value storage area is output as the count cumulative value, and the checksum value (1 byte) of the output various data is output (1 byte). See FIG. 30).
In the next step S844, the game medium number control means clears the count value. The value stored in the cumulative count value storage area is not cleared at the timing when the count notification is output.

Next, the process proceeds to step S845, and the game medium number control means executes a process of updating the counting serial number (a process of setting it to “+1”). Since the result of performing "+1" when the counting serial number is "255 (D)" is "0", if it becomes "0", the process of updating the counting serial number again ("+1"). ”Process) is executed.
Further, the game medium number control means transmits information based on the counting flag to the main control means. Thereby, the main control means can determine that counting is in progress. Further, for example, by transmitting information indicating that counting is in progress from the main control means to the sub control means, the sub control means can perform an effect corresponding to the counting.
Next, the process proceeds to step S846, and the counting execution flag is cleared (set to "0"). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the fifth embodiment as well, as in the second embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is possible even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
However, when the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where the game medium can be bet, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is executed, but the counting switch 47 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When it is operated, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that if the counting switch 47 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, there is a high possibility that the hall clerk is counting (possibly not a player). (Because of its high sex).

On the other hand, when the counting switch 47 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the dedicated screen in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the image display device 23 or the sound is output. You may. In this way, the necessary information can be provided to the hall clerk. Further, while displaying a dedicated screen in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, displaying "counting in progress" on the screen) may be performed. The notification in this case is configured to be different from the above-mentioned effect during counting (to the player). Attention can be issued by such notification.

Further, in the present embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is possible even during an error (a predetermined (predetermined) error may be performed or all errors may be performed).
However, when the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where the game medium can be bet, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is executed, but when the counting switch 47 is operated during the error, the counting switch 47 is operated. The effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that if the counting switch 47 is operated during an error, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed.
Further, depending on the type of error, a situation in which the counting process is impossible and a situation in which the counting process is possible may be provided. For example, it is possible to make counting processing impossible while a recoverable error is occurring and to enable counting processing while a recoverable error is occurring.

On the other hand, when the counting switch 47 is operated during the error, the dedicated screen during the error may be displayed on the image display device 23 or the sound may be output. In this way, the necessary information can be provided to the hall clerk. Further, a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, displaying "counting in progress" on the screen) may be performed while displaying a dedicated screen during an error. The notification in this case is configured to be different from the above-mentioned effect during counting (to the player). Attention can be issued by such notification. At this time, the number of bets may not be returned by the settlement switch 46.

Further, also in the fifth embodiment, as in the second embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is possible even during the game (for example, in a situation where the reel 31 is rotating).
However, when the counting switch 47 is operated in a situation where the game medium can be bet, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 is executed, but when the counting switch 47 is operated during the game, the counting switch 47 is operated. The effect based on the operation of the counting switch 47 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that if the counting switch 47 is operated during the game, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed.

69 to 72 are flowcharts showing Example 1, Example 2, Example 3, and Example 4 of the lending control (I_LEN_CTL) in step S805 of FIG. 61, respectively. That is, four examples are given as the lending control of the fifth embodiment. In FIGS. 69 to 72, the same process is assigned the same step number.
In the fifth embodiment, when the total game medium reaches the threshold value "15000", the lending of the game medium by the lending unit 200 is newly or restricted, and the total game medium becomes less than the threshold value "15000". Once again, the lending of the game medium by the lending unit 200 can be permitted.
The game medium number control means can transmit an "abnormality" as a loan receipt result response corresponding to the loan notification from the loan unit 200, based on the fact that the total number of game media reaches the threshold value "15000". As shown in FIG. 30, when the result of receiving the number of loaned game media is normal, "0" is transmitted as the response of the result of receiving the loan, and when the result of receiving the number of loaned game media is abnormal, "1" is sent as the response of the result of the loan. Is sent.

The lending unit 200 invalidates the operation of the lending switch 202 when the lending receipt result response is abnormal. Specifically, even when the lending switch 202 is operated and the game medium can be rented, the game medium is not rented (lending is prohibited).
When the game is digested and the total number of game media becomes less than the threshold value "15000", the game medium number control means normally transmits as a loan receipt result response corresponding to the loan notification from the loan unit 200.
The lending unit 200 enables the operation of the lending switch 202 when the lending receipt result response is normal.

First, Example 1 of FIG. 69 will be described.
In step S861, the game medium number control means acquires a rental serial number. This process is a process of reading a lending serial number (a lending serial number transmitted in response to the previous lending receipt result) stored in the game medium number control RWM. Next, the process proceeds to step S862, and "1" is added to the read lending serial number. In the next step S863, it is determined whether or not the lending serial number to which "1" is added is "0", and if it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S864, and if it is "0", the process returns to step S862 and "" again. 1 ”is added to execute the process of step S863. This is because the rental serial number is "0" only immediately after the power is turned on, and the value is "1" or more in other cases.

In step S864, it is determined whether or not the lending serial number is normal. This process is a process of confirming whether or not the lending serial number in the lending notification sent from the lending unit 200 matches the lending serial number added by "1" in step S862. If it is determined that the lending serial number is normal, the process proceeds to step S865, and if it is determined that the loan serial number is not normal, the process proceeds to step S873.

In step S865, the serial number abnormality flag is cleared. When it is determined that the rental serial number is not normal, the serial number abnormality flag "1" is set in the storage area of the serial number abnormality flag provided in the game medium number control RWM (step S873 described later), so that "1" has already been set. Executes the process of clearing the serial number error flag regardless of whether it is stored or not.
In the next step S866, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the number of rented game media is “0”. The number of rental game media is included in the rental notification sent from the rental unit 200 (FIG. 30). If it is determined that the number of rented game media is "0", the process proceeds to step S871, and if it is determined that the number of rented game media is not "0", the process proceeds to step S8671.
In step S867, the game medium number control means acquires the total number of game media. Then, in the next step S868, it is determined whether or not the total number of acquired game media is equal to or greater than the threshold value “15000”. If it is determined that the threshold value is not "15000" or more, the process proceeds to step S869, and if it is determined that the threshold value is "15000" or more, the process proceeds to step S874.

In step S869, the number of rented game media is added to the total number of game media. In the next step S870, the total number of game media calculated in step S869 is stored. In the next step S871, the loan serial number updated in step S862 is saved. Further, in the next step S872, normality (“0”) is saved as the result of receiving the number of rental game media. The loan serial number saved in step S871 and the number of rental game media receipt results saved in step S872 are used for the loan receipt result response.

Next, the process proceeds to step S875, and the message length of the loan receipt result response to be transmitted next is set. Then, in the next step S876, the loan receipt result response is set. The loan receipt result response has the data structure shown in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S877, and the lending control command set process is performed. By this process, as shown in FIG. 32, when the game medium number control means receives the loan notification from the lending unit 200, the game medium number control means transmits the lending receipt result response to the lending unit 200 within "10" ms.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S864 that the lending serial number is not normal, the process proceeds to step S873 to set the serial number abnormality flag. Further, in the next step S874, the abnormality (“1”) is saved as the result of receiving the number of rental game media. Therefore, regardless of the total number of game media, if the rental serial number is abnormal, the abnormality is set as the result of receiving the number of rental game media.

Further, even when it is determined in step S868 that the total number of game media is equal to or greater than the threshold value "15000", the process proceeds to step S874 to set an abnormality as a result of receiving the number of rental game media. When it is determined in step S868 that the total number of game media is equal to or greater than the threshold value "15000", the process does not proceed to the process after step S869, so that the number of loaned game media is not added to the total number of game media. Therefore, for example, even when a rental notification indicating "50" as the number of rental game media is received from the rental unit 200, if the total number of game media is equal to or greater than the threshold value at that time, the total number of game media is lent. The process of adding the number of game media (the process of updating the total number of game media) is not performed.

Further, the game medium number control means sends a loan receipt result response to the lending unit 200 to the effect that the lending game medium number receiving result is abnormal, and when the lending unit 200 receives this, the lending unit 200 receives the lending unit 200. Do not subtract the number of rental game media sent in the loan notification.
A specific example will be described below.
When the number of game media that can be rented at that time of the lending unit 200 is "N" and the lending unit 200 sends a lending notice including data of the number of lending game media "50", the game medium number control means lends. When it is determined that the serial number is normal and the total number of game media (the total number of game media at this point is "M") is less than the threshold value, the total number of game media is updated to "M + 50". The number of loaned game media The response of the loan receipt result to the effect that the receipt result is normal is transmitted to the loan unit 200. When the lending unit 200 receives the lending receipt result response, the lending unit 200 updates the number of lending game media to "N-50".

On the other hand, when the number of game media that can be rented at that time of the rental unit 200 is "N" and the rental unit 200 sends a loan notification including data of the number of game media to be rented "50", the number of game media is controlled. When the means determines that the total number of game media "M" is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the total number of game media "M" is not updated, and the result of receiving the loaned game media is abnormal. The response is sent to the lending unit 200. When the lending unit 200 receives the lending receipt result response, the lending unit 200 maintains the number of lending game media "N".

Next, FIG. 70 (Example 2) will be described. In FIG. 70, the step numbers are underlined for processes different from those in FIG. 69. Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 69 will be described.
In FIG. 70, when it is determined in step S868 that the total number of game media is not equal to or more than the threshold value “15000”, the process proceeds to step S881. In step S881, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the bet processing is in progress. The game medium number control means turns on the bet processing flag (provided in the game medium number control RWM) when the bet processing is started, and turns off the bet processing flag when the bet processing is completed. do.

Then, in step S881, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the betting processing flag is on. If it is determined that the bet processing is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S869, and if it is determined that the bet processing is in progress, the process proceeds to step S882.
In step S882, the total number of game media before betting is acquired. Here, for example, first, before starting the bet processing, the total number of game media immediately before the bet processing may be stored. Alternatively, secondly, the total number of game media before betting may be calculated by acquiring the number of bets at that time and adding the number of bets to the total number of game media.

Next, the process proceeds to step S883, and it is determined whether or not the total number of game media before betting is equal to or greater than the threshold value “15000”. If it is determined that the total number of gaming media before betting is equal to or greater than the threshold value "15000", the process proceeds to step S874, and if it is determined that the total number of gaming media before betting is not equal to or greater than the threshold value "15000", the process proceeds to step S869.
By the above processing, even if it is determined in step S868 that the total number of gaming media is not the threshold value "15000" or more, the total number of gaming media before betting is the threshold value "15000" or more during the betting process. In some cases, the number of rented game media is not added to the total number of game media, the abnormality is saved as a result of receiving the number of rented game media, and is transmitted to the rental unit 200. Therefore, on the lending unit 200 side, the operation of the lending switch 202 becomes invalid, and the lending of the game medium is prohibited. Further, since the rented gaming medium transmitted by the lending notification is not stored in the gaming machine 10, the number of rentable gaming media is not updated even on the lending unit 200 side.
On the other hand, when the bet processing is completed, the result is "No" in step S881. Therefore, if the total number of game media after the bet processing is less than the threshold value "15000", the total number of game media is updated (rental game media). The number is added to the total number of gaming media up to that point).

A specific example will be described below.
For example, when the total number of game media before betting is "15001" and the number of game media "3" is bet by the bet processing, the final "1" bet is made after the bet processing of the number of game media "2" is executed. It is assumed that the process of FIG. 70 is executed before the process.
In this case, since the number of bets "2" is subtracted from the total number of game media "15001", the total number of game media at the time of determination in step S868 is "14999", and it is determined as "No" in step S868. Next, when the process proceeds to step S881, it is determined as "Yes" because the bet processing is in progress. In the next step S882, “15001” is acquired as the total number of game media before betting, so that it is determined as “Yes” in step S883. As a result, data indicating that the number of loaned game media receipt result is abnormal is transmitted to the lending unit 200 as a response to the loan receipt result, so that the lending unit 200 does not allow the lending of the gaming medium (lending switch 202). To disable).
By processing in this way, it is possible to prevent the lending permission / non-permission from being switched during the bet processing, and it is possible to accurately grasp the number of lending.

On the other hand, when the total number of game media before betting is "15001" and the number of game media "3" is bet by the bet process, the process of FIG. 70 is executed after the bet process of the number of game media "3". Suppose.
In this case, since the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the total number of game media "15001", the total number of game media at the time of determination in step S868 is "14998", and in step S868 it is determined to be "No". Next, when the process proceeds to step S881, it is determined as "No" because the bet processing is not in progress. As a result, the lending unit 200 permits the lending of the gaming media because the data indicating that the result of receiving the number of lending game media is normal is transmitted to the lending unit 200 as a response to the lending receipt result.

On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 69, unlike FIG. 70, the processing of steps S881 to S883 is not provided. Therefore, even during the bet processing, when the total number of game media becomes less than the threshold value “15000”, it is determined as “No” in step S868, so that the lending unit 200 receives a lending result as a response. The data indicating that the result of receiving the number of rental game media is normal is transmitted. As a result, the rental unit 200 permits the rental of the game medium.
For example, when the "3" bet process is started in the state of the total number of game media "15000", the total number of game media becomes "14999" after the first "1" bet process, which is below the threshold value. As a result, in FIG. 69, it is determined as "No" in step S868. Therefore, even during the bet processing, when the total number of game media falls below the threshold value, data indicating that the result of receiving the number of loaned game media is normal is transmitted to the lending unit 200 as a response to the result of receiving the loan. As a result, the rental unit 200 permits the rental of the game medium.
By processing in this way, it is possible to promptly permit the rental of game media.

Next, FIG. 71 (Example 3) will be described. In FIG. 71, the step numbers are underlined for the processes different from those in FIG. 69. Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 69 will be described.
In FIG. 71, when it is determined in step S868 that the total number of game media is not equal to or more than the threshold value “15000”, the process proceeds to step S884. In step S884, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the game medium is bet (whether or not the bet number is “0”). Here, when the game medium is bet, it is stored in the bet number storage means (for example, the bet number storage means 53a in FIG. 29) of the game medium number control RWM, so that the bet is bet according to the value of the bet number storage means. Determine if you have the game medium that is being played.
If it is determined that there is a bet game medium, the process proceeds to step S885, and if it is determined that there is no bet game medium, the process proceeds to step S869.
In step S885, a value obtained by adding the number of bets and the total number of game media is acquired.

Next, the process proceeds to step S886, and it is determined whether or not the value obtained by adding the number of bets and the total number of game media is equal to or greater than the threshold value “15000”. If it is determined that the value is not more than or equal to the threshold value "15000", the process proceeds to step S874, and if it is determined that the value is not more than or equal to the threshold value "15000", the process proceeds to step S869.
By the above processing, even if it is determined in step S868 that the total number of gaming media is not the threshold value "15000" or more, if the total number of bets and the total number of gaming media is the threshold value "15000" or more. , The number of rental game media is not added to the total number of game media, and the abnormality is saved as a result of receiving the number of rental game media and transmitted to the rental unit 200. Therefore, on the lending unit 200 side, the operation of the lending switch 202 becomes invalid, and the lending of the game medium is prohibited. Further, since the rented gaming medium transmitted by the lending notification is not stored in the gaming machine 10, the number of rentable gaming media is not updated even on the lending unit 200 side.

A specific example will be described below.
For example, when the total number of game media is "14999" and the number of bets is "3", it is determined as "No" in step S868. Next, when the process proceeds to step S884, it is determined as "Yes" because it has the number of bets. In the next step S885, "14999 + 3 = 15002" is acquired, and in the next step S886, it is determined to be "Yes". As a result, data indicating that the number of loaned game media receipt result is abnormal is transmitted to the lending unit 200 as a response to the loan receipt result, so that the lending unit 200 prohibits the lending of the gaming medium (lending switch 202). To disable).
By processing in this way, it is possible to prevent the lending permission and the lending prohibition from being repeated by repeating the settlement process (the process of returning the bet game medium to the total game medium) and the bet process.

On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 69, unlike FIG. 71, the processing of steps S884 to S886 is not provided. Therefore, when the total number of game media is "14999" and the number of bets is "3", it is determined as "No" in step S868 in FIG. 69, so that the loan unit 200 is lent out. As a response to the receipt result, data indicating that the receipt result is normal is transmitted. As a result, the rental unit 200 permits the rental of the game medium.
By processing in this way, it is possible to allow the rental of game media as much as possible.

Next, FIG. 72 (Example 4) will be described. In FIG. 72, the step numbers are underlined for the processes different from those in FIG. 69. Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 69 will be described.
In FIG. 72, when it is determined in step S868 that the total number of game media is not equal to or more than the threshold value “15000”, the process proceeds to step S891.
In step S891, it is determined whether or not the granting flag is "1". The game medium number control RWM is provided with a flag being assigned. The granting flag is a flag that is turned on when the granting process of the game medium is started and turned off when the granting process is completed.
Therefore, when the small winning combination is won and the game medium is given, the game medium giving process is executed after the granting flag is set to "1".
In step S891, if it is determined that the granting flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S892, and if it is determined that the granting flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S874.
In step S892, the game medium number control means determines whether or not the total number of game media before the game medium is added in the game this time is less than the threshold value “15000”. If it is determined to be "Yes", the process proceeds to step S869, and if it is determined to be "No", the process proceeds to step S874.

As a result, when the total number of game media is the threshold value "15000" or more, the total number of game media before the grant is already the threshold value "15000" or more even when the game medium is not being given or the game medium is being given. In this case, the number of rented game media is not added to the total number of game media, and data indicating that the result of receiving the number of rented game media is abnormal is transmitted to the lending unit 200 as a response to the result of receiving the loan. As a result, the rental unit 200 prohibits the rental of game media.
On the other hand, even when the total number of game media is the threshold "15000" or more, the game medium is being given, and the total number of game media becomes the threshold "15000" or more by the addition of the game medium of the game this time. At that time, the number of rented game media is added to the total number of game media, and data indicating that the result of receiving the number of rented game media is normal is transmitted to the lending unit 200 as a response to the result of receiving the loan. As a result, the rental unit 200 permits the rental of the game medium.

A specific example will be described below.
For example, it is assumed that the total number of game media at the start of the game this time is "14998", and the small winning combination corresponding to the number of game media "5" is won. Then, it is assumed that the game medium granting process is executed, and out of the game medium number "5" to be granted, the game medium granting process of "2" is completed, and the total number of game media reaches "15000". At this point, the total number of gaming media becomes the threshold value “15000” or more, and in FIG. 72, it is determined as “Yes” in step S868. Next, when the process proceeds to step S891, it is determined to be "Yes" because the game medium is being applied. Further, when the process proceeds to the next step S892, the total number of game media before the game medium is added in this game is "14998", which is less than the threshold value, and therefore, it is determined to be "Yes" in step S892. As a result, data indicating that the number of loaned game media receipt result is normal is transmitted to the lending unit 200 as a response to the loan receipt result, so that the lending unit 200 permits the lending of the game medium.
By processing in this way, it is possible to prevent the game media from being lent / prohibited from being switched during the game media granting process. Further, if the lending is switched from permitted to prohibited during the game medium granting process, the player may misunderstand that the gaming machine 10 or the lending unit 200 may have failed, but such a misunderstanding may occur. Can be eliminated.

On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 69, unlike FIG. 72, the processing of steps S891 and S892 is not provided. Therefore, when the total number of game media at the start of the game (before the process of granting the game media) is "14998" and the small winning combination corresponding to the number of game media "5" is won, the number is "2". When the game medium is given, the total number of game media becomes the threshold value "15000" or more, and the process proceeds from step S868 to step S874. Therefore, data to the effect that the result of receiving the number of loaned game media is abnormal is transmitted to the lending unit 200 as a response to the result of receiving the loan. As a result, the rental unit 200 prohibits the rental of game media.
By processing in this way, it is possible to prevent the total number of gaming media from exceeding the threshold value due to lending. Further, when the total number of game media exceeds the threshold value, it is possible to promptly prohibit the lending of the game media.

Subsequently, the threshold value notification by the sub-control means will be described.
In the fifth embodiment, the sub-control means can execute a predetermined notification based on the fact that the total number of game media has reached the threshold value.
73 and 74 are flows showing threshold processing by the main control means, FIG. 73 shows Example 1, and FIG. 74 shows Example 2. In FIG. 74, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 73 are underlined.
In Example 1 of FIG. 73, in step S901, the main control means determines whether or not the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value “15000”. If it is determined that the total number of gaming media has not reached the threshold value "15000", the process proceeds to step S902, and if it is determined that the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value "15000", the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S902, the main control means sets the threshold value arrival flag to “0”. The threshold value arrival flag is provided in the main control RWM, and stores "0" when the threshold value has not been reached and stores "1" when the threshold value has been reached. Next, the process proceeds to step S903, and the threshold value non-arrival information is set.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S901 that the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value and the process proceeds to step S904, the main control means sets the threshold value arrival flag to "1". Next, the process proceeds to step S905, and the threshold value arrival information is set.
The main control means transmits threshold non-reach information (when the threshold arrival flag is “0”) or threshold arrival information (when the threshold arrival flag is “1”) to the sub control means. When the threshold value (not reached, reached) information is set in steps S903 and S905, the main control means transmits the threshold value (not reached, reached) information to the sub control means at a predetermined timing. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Further, in Example 2 of FIG. 74, in step S901, the main control means determines whether or not the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value “15000”. If it is determined that the total number of gaming media has not reached the threshold value "15000", the process proceeds to step S911, and if it is determined that the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value "15000", the process proceeds to step S904. Since the processing after proceeding to step S904 is the same as that in FIG. 73 (Example 1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S911, the main control means determines whether or not the game medium is bet. When it is determined that the game medium is bet, the process proceeds to step S912, and when it is determined that the game medium is not bet, the process proceeds to step S902.
In step S912, the main control means acquires a value obtained by adding the number of bets and the total number of game media. Next, the process proceeds to step S913, and the main control means determines whether or not the value obtained by adding the number of bets and the total number of gaming media is equal to or greater than the threshold value “15000”. When it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of bets and the total number of game media is not the threshold value "15000" or more, the process proceeds to step S902. Since the processing after step S902 is the same as that in FIG. 73 (Example 1), the description thereof will be omitted.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S913 that the value obtained by adding the number of bets and the total number of game media is the threshold value "15000" or more, the process proceeds to step S904.

By the above processing, in Example 1 of FIG. 73, the threshold value arrival information is not transmitted to the sub-control means when the total number of game media is less than the threshold value “15000”. Therefore, for example, when the number of bets is "3" and the total number of game media is "14999", the threshold value non-arrival information is transmitted to the sub-control means.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 74, even if the total number of game media is less than the threshold value “15000”, when the number of bets is “3”, the total of both is the threshold value “15000” or more. The threshold value arrival information is transmitted to the sub-control means.
Although the details will be described later, when the threshold value arrival information is transmitted to the sub-control means, the sub-control means can execute the notification indicating that the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value. Therefore, in Example 1 of FIG. 73, when the number of bets is "3" and the total number of game media is "14999", the notification indicating that the total number of game media has reached the threshold value is not executed. .. On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 74, when the number of bets is "3" and the total number of game media is "14999", the notification indicating that the total number of game media has reached the threshold value is notified. Make it feasible.

75 and 76 are flowcharts showing the threshold value notification process by the sub-control means, FIG. 75 shows Example 1, and FIG. 76 shows Example 2. In FIG. 76, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 75 are underlined.
Here, "threshold notification" means notification to the player (attention) that the total number of game media has reached the threshold, and operation of the counting switch 47 because the total number of game media has reached the threshold. It corresponds to the notification to urge the player.
In Example 1 of FIG. 75, in step S921, the sub-control means determines whether or not the threshold value notification flag is “1”. Here, the sub-control RWM is provided with a threshold value notification flag. The threshold value notification flag is a flag indicating that the threshold value has been reached when the value is "1" and that the threshold value has not been reached when the value is "0". When the threshold value notification flag is "1", notification indicating that the threshold value has been reached can be executed.

If it is determined in step S921 that the threshold value notification flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S922, and if it is determined that the threshold value notification flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S925.
In step S922, the sub control means determines whether or not the threshold arrival information has been received from the main control means. When the threshold value arrival information is not received (without notifying), the process according to this flowchart is terminated. When it is determined that the threshold value arrival information has been received, the process proceeds to step S923. In step S923, the sub-control means sets the threshold value notification flag to "1". Then, the process proceeds to step S924, a notification indicating that the total number of game media has reached the threshold value is output, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S921 that the threshold value arrival flag is "1" and the process proceeds to step S925, the sub-control means determines whether or not the threshold value non-arrival information has been received from the main control means. If it is determined that the threshold value non-arrival information has not been received, the process proceeds to step S924, and if it is determined that the threshold value non-arrival information has been received, the process proceeds to step S926. In step S926, the sub-control means sets the threshold value notification flag to “0”. Then, the process proceeds to step S927, the notification being output is terminated, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
As described above, in Example 1, when the total number of gaming media becomes less than the threshold value, the notification is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 76, when it is determined in step S925 that the threshold value non-arrival information has been received, the process proceeds to step S928. In step S928, the sub-control means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S926 to end the notification. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S924 to continue the notification.
Therefore, in Example 2, the sub-control means receives the threshold non-arrival information from the main control means, continues the notification even when it is determined that the total number of gaming media is less than the threshold, and then sets a predetermined condition. When the condition is satisfied, the notification is terminated.

Here, examples of the "predetermined condition" in step S928 include the following conditions.
(1) When a predetermined number (for example, "50") of game media has been counted The main control means has determined that the counting switch 47 has been operated by the player and the predetermined number of game media has been counted. Command is sent to the sub-control means. The sub-control means determines that the threshold value notification flag is "1", and after receiving the threshold value non-arrival information, when a command indicating that a predetermined number of game media have been counted is received, the predetermined condition is satisfied. And proceed to step S926. As a result, the notification ends.
In this way, the notification does not end unless the total number of game media falls below the threshold value by a certain number. As a result, it is possible to prevent the total number of gaming media from falling below the threshold value and then immediately reaching the threshold value to be notified again. In other words, it is possible to prevent the presence / absence of notification from being repeated in a short time.

(2) When the total number of game media falls below a predetermined value (for example, "14500"), the sub control means receives the information on the total number of game media transmitted from the main control means, and updates the total number of game media. continue. Then, the sub-control means determines that the threshold value notification flag is "1", and after receiving the threshold value non-arrival information, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the total number of game media falls below the predetermined value, and after step S926. Proceed to the processing of. As a result, the notification ends.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the total number of gaming media from falling below a predetermined value and the notification being resumed immediately once the notification is completed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the presence / absence of notification from being repeated in a short time. Further, it is possible to urge the player to operate the counting switch 47.

(3) When one game is completed The main control means is sub-controlled when one game is completed (when all reels 31 are stopped and the game medium addition process is completed when the game medium is applied). A game end command is sent to the means. The sub-control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the threshold value notification flag is "1" and receives the threshold value non-arrival information and then receives the game end command, and proceeds to the process of step S926 and subsequent steps. As a result, the notification ends.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the notification from being continuously notified even when the game is not being played (while waiting for the game).

Although the fifth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the threshold value “15000” has been reached (whether or not the threshold value has fallen below the threshold value “15000”). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined whether or not the threshold value "15000" is exceeded (whether or not the threshold value is "15000" or less).
Similarly, in the present embodiment, it was determined whether or not the upper limit value "16383" was reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined whether or not the upper limit value “16383” has been exceeded.
It should be noted that the threshold value "15000" and the upper limit value "16383" are examples, and are not limited to these values, as described above.

(2) When the total number of game media reaches the threshold value, the lending of the game media is prohibited, but the lending of the game media is not prohibited but may be restricted. For example, until the total number of gaming media reaches the threshold value, the lending switch 202 is pressed and held to control the lending of "50" gaming media at a time, but after the total number of gaming media reaches the threshold value, the lending switch is used. It is also possible to limit the number of gaming media lent out at one time when 202 is pressed and held to, for example, "10" (a number smaller than the original number "50").
Alternatively, even after the total number of game media reaches the threshold value, when the lending switch 202 is pressed and held for a long time, the number of game media "50" is rented at one time, but after the threshold is reached, the number of game media "50" is once reached. It is also possible to control the lending so that the lending is not performed again until a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed after the lending.

(3) When the total number of game media reaches the threshold value during the character operation (during special game) or during AT and the notification that the threshold value has been reached is performed, the effect related to the character operation and AT and the threshold value are set. Notification (directing) of arrival is suffered. In this case, if the image display (layer) related to the accessory operation or AT is arranged on the front side and the image display (layer) indicating that the threshold value has been reached is arranged on the rear side, the image display related to the accessory operation or AT can be displayed. It is possible not to block the image display indicating that the threshold value has been reached.
On the contrary, if the image display (layer) related to the accessory operation and AT is placed on the rear side and the image display (layer) indicating that the threshold value has been reached is placed on the front side, the caution that the threshold value has been reached. The arousal can be surely notified to the player. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the display area for the number of acquired games and the display area for the number of remaining games do not overlap with the display area indicating that the threshold value has been reached.

(4) In the notification executed when the total number of gaming media reaches the threshold value or the upper limit value, not only the contents of the image display and the sound may be different, but also the volume may be different. For example, the notification volume when the threshold value is reached is set to "N1" decibel, and the notification volume when the upper limit value is reached is set to "N2"(N2> N1) decibel.
Further, when the upper limit value is reached, a dedicated effect output device (for example, a rotating lamp (patrol lamp)) is provided, and when the threshold value is reached, the effect output device is not operated, but when the upper limit value is reached, the effect output device is not operated. It is also possible to activate.

<Additional Notes>
The inventions (initial inventions) described in the initial specification of the present application can be, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 11, respectively, in order to solve the problems to be solved by the initial invention and the problems related to the initial invention, respectively. The means and the effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the invention described in the present specification does not mean that the invention is limited to the initial inventions 1 to 11.

1. 1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a medalless gaming machine (also referred to as a "managed gaming machine", an "enclosed gaming machine", etc.).
Conventionally, a medalless gaming machine capable of lending a gaming medium from a lending unit to a gaming machine has been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-198565).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, since the gaming medium can be rented more than necessary, the total number of gaming media on the gaming machine side may become excessive.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately control the lending of game media.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 1 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (fifth embodiment) is
With the game medium number control means (for example, the second main control CPU 105 in FIG. 29),
A total number of game media storage means (for example, in FIG. 29, a game medium number storage means 103a) capable of storing the total number of game media is provided.
When the total number of game media reaches the threshold value (15000), the game medium number control means can execute a process for prohibiting or limiting the lending of the game media (step in FIG. 69). S868, S874),
The game medium number control means is in a situation where the total number of game media has not reached the threshold value due to the bet of the game medium in the situation where the total number of game media has reached the threshold value (in FIG. 69, The “No” in step S868 is characterized in that the process for permitting the lending of the game medium (steps S869, S870, S872) can be executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, lending of gaming media is prohibited or restricted based on whether or not the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value, so that the total number of gaming media on the gaming machine side is excessive. Can be prevented from becoming. In addition, when the total number of game media has not reached the threshold value due to betting, the game media can be rented, so that the game media can be rented as much as possible.

2. 2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 2 Same as the initial invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (fifth embodiment) is
With the game medium number control means (for example, the second main control CPU 105 in FIG. 29),
A total number of game media storage means (for example, in FIG. 29, a game medium number storage means 103a) capable of storing the total number of game media is provided.
When the total number of game media reaches the threshold value (15000), the game medium number control means can execute a process for prohibiting or limiting the lending of the game media (step in FIG. 71). S868, S874),
The game medium number control means rents out game media even when the total number of game media has not reached the threshold due to betting of the game media while the total number of game media has reached the threshold. Maintain processing for prohibiting or limiting (steps S884, S885, S886, S874 in FIG. 71).
It is characterized by that.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, lending of gaming media is prohibited or restricted based on whether or not the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value, so that the total number of gaming media on the gaming machine side is excessive. Can be prevented from becoming. In addition, since the prohibition or restriction of lending of game media is maintained even when the total number of game media has not reached the threshold value due to betting, the prohibition or restriction of lending of game media and the permission of lending are maintained. And can be prevented from being repeated in a short period of time.

3. 3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 3 Same as the initial invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (fifth embodiment) is
With the game medium number control means (for example, the second main control CPU 105 in FIG. 29),
A total number of game media storage means (for example, in FIG. 29, a game medium number storage means 103a) capable of storing the total number of game media, and
A counting switch (for example, counting switch 47 in FIG. 29) operated when refunding the gaming medium stored in the total number of gaming media storage means, and
It is provided with a notification means (for example, in FIG. 29, an effect lamp 21, a speaker 22, and an image display device 23).
The game medium number control means can execute a counting process for subtracting the total number of game media based on the operation of the counting switch (FIG. 68).
When the total number of gaming media reaches a threshold value, the notification means can execute notification for prompting the operation of the counting switch (FIG. 75).
The notification means is in a situation where the total number of game media has not reached the threshold value due to the bet of the game medium in the situation where the total number of game media has reached the threshold value (in FIG. 75, in step S925). “Yes”) is characterized in that the notification prompting the operation of the counting switch can be terminated.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value. In addition, the notification can be minimized.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 4 Same as the initial invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (fifth embodiment) is
With the game medium number control means (for example, the second main control CPU 105 in FIG. 29),
A total number of game media storage means (for example, in FIG. 29, a game medium number storage means 103a) capable of storing the total number of game media, and
A counting switch (for example, counting switch 47 in FIG. 29) operated when refunding the gaming medium stored in the total number of gaming media storage means.
It is provided with a notification means (for example, in FIG. 29, an effect lamp 21, a speaker 22, and an image display device 23).
The game medium number control means can execute a counting process for subtracting the total number of game media based on the operation of the counting switch (FIG. 68).
When the total number of gaming media reaches a threshold value, the notification means can execute notification for prompting the operation of the counting switch (FIG. 75).
The notification means prompts the operation of the counting switch even when the total number of gaming media has not reached the threshold due to the betting of the gaming media in the situation where the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold. Maintain notification (steps S911, S913, S905 in FIG. 74)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value. Further, since the notification is not terminated only when the total number of game media falls below the threshold value due to the bet, it is possible to prevent the notification / non-notification from being repeated in a short period of time.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 5 Same as the initial invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 5 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (fifth embodiment) is
With the game medium number control means (for example, the second main control CPU 105 in FIG. 29),
A total number of game media storage means (for example, in FIG. 29, a game medium number storage means 103a) capable of storing the total number of game media is provided.
When the total number of game media reaches the threshold value, the game medium number control means can execute a process for prohibiting or limiting the lending of the game media (steps S868 and S874 in FIG. 70). ,
In the game medium number control means, the betting operation of the game medium is performed while the total number of game media has reached the threshold value, and the total number of game media has not reached the threshold value during the betting process. At that time, it is possible to execute a process for permitting the lending of the game medium after the bet process is completed (steps S881 and S883 in FIG. 70).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, lending of gaming media is prohibited or restricted based on whether or not the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value, so that the total number of gaming media on the gaming machine side is excessive. Can be prevented from becoming. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being prohibited or restricted from being lent out during the bet processing.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 6 Same as the initial invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (fifth embodiment) is
With the game medium number control means (for example, the second main control CPU 105 in FIG. 29),
A total number of game media storage means (for example, in FIG. 29, a game medium number storage means 103a) capable of storing the total number of game media is provided.
When the total number of game media reaches the threshold value, the game medium number control means can execute a process for prohibiting or limiting the lending of the game media (steps S868 and S874 in FIG. 69). ,
In the game medium number control means, the betting operation of the game medium is performed while the total number of game media has reached the threshold value, and the total number of game media has not reached the threshold value during the betting process. In this case, it is possible to execute a process for permitting the lending of the game medium before the bet process is completed (steps S868 and S872 in FIG. 69).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, lending of gaming media is prohibited or restricted based on whether or not the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value, so that the total number of gaming media on the gaming machine side is excessive. Can be prevented from becoming. In addition, if the total number of game media does not reach the threshold value during the bet processing, the game media can be rented to minimize the period of prohibition or restriction of the game media. Can be done.

7. Initial invention 7
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 7 Same as the initial invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (fifth embodiment) is
With the game medium number control means (for example, the second main control CPU 105 in FIG. 29),
A total number of game media storage means (for example, in FIG. 29, a game medium number storage means 103a) capable of storing the total number of game media is provided.
When the total number of game media reaches the threshold value, the game medium number control means can execute a process for prohibiting or limiting the lending of the game media (steps S868 and S874 in FIG. 72). ,
In the game medium number control means, the game medium addition process is performed in a situation where the total number of game media has not reached the threshold value, and the total number of game media has reached the threshold value in the middle of the application process. In that case, it is possible to execute a process for prohibiting or restricting the lending of the game medium after the end of the grant process (steps S891 and S892 in FIG. 72).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, lending of gaming media is prohibited or restricted based on whether or not the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value, so that the total number of gaming media on the gaming machine side is excessive. Can be prevented from becoming. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being rented out to be prohibited or restricted during the process of granting the game medium.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 8 Same as the initial invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (fifth embodiment) is
With the game medium number control means (for example, the second main control CPU 105 in FIG. 29),
A total number of game media storage means (for example, in FIG. 29, a game medium number storage means 103a) capable of storing the total number of game media is provided.
When the total number of game media reaches the threshold value, the game medium number control means can execute a process for prohibiting or limiting the lending of the game media (steps S868 and S874 in FIG. 69). ,
In the game medium number control means, the game medium addition process is performed in a situation where the total number of game media has not reached the threshold value, and the total number of game media has reached the threshold value in the middle of the application process. In this case, it is possible to execute a process for prohibiting or restricting the lending of the game medium before the granting process is completed (steps S868 and S874 in FIG. 69).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, lending of gaming media is prohibited or restricted based on whether or not the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value, so that the total number of gaming media on the gaming machine side is excessive. Can be prevented from becoming. Further, when the total number of game media reaches the threshold value, the rental of game media can be prohibited or restricted immediately.

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a medalless gaming machine (also referred to as a “managed gaming machine”, an “enclosed gaming machine”, etc.).
Conventionally, a medalless gaming machine capable of refunding (counting processing) the number of gaming media stored in the gaming machine by operating a counting switch has been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-198565). ..
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, the counting process of the number of gaming media desired by the player cannot be performed by a simple method.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to perform the counting process of the number of gaming media desired by the player by a simple method.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 9 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (fifth embodiment) is
With the game medium number control means (for example, the second main control CPU 105 in FIG. 29),
A total number of game media storage means (for example, in FIG. 29, a game medium number storage means 103a) capable of storing the total number of game media, and
A counting switch (for example, counting switch 47 in FIG. 29) operated when refunding the gaming medium stored in the total number of gaming media storage means is provided.
The game medium number control means can measure the period from when the counting switch is turned on to when it is turned off (steps S811, S817 in FIG. 62).
The game medium number control means derives a counting value according to a period from when the counting switch is turned on to when the counting switch is turned off (steps S835, S838, S847, S848 in FIG. 68).
The game medium number control means can execute a counting process of subtracting a derived count value from the total number of game media (steps S839, S840, S841 and the like in FIG. 68).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, the counting process of the counting value according to the period from when the counting switch is turned on to when the counting switch is turned off can be executed, so that the game desired by the player can be executed. It becomes possible to execute the counting process of the number of media by a simple method.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a medalless gaming machine (also referred to as a "managed gaming machine", an "enclosed gaming machine", etc.).
Conventionally, in a medalless gaming machine, it has been known that gaming machine information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the rental unit every "300" ms, "60" seconds, and "180" seconds (for example, special feature). Kai 2019-198565 (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-198565).
It is also known that when the transmission timings of these gaming machine information overlap, they are transmitted according to the priority.
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, the priority of the gaming machine information to be transmitted may differ depending on the gaming situation, etc., and if it is uniformly set, the transmission is postponed even though the priority is originally high. There is a risk of becoming.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to execute an appropriate transmission process according to the priority of the gaming machine information to be transmitted.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (fifth embodiment) is
At least the first gaming machine information (hole control / fraud monitoring information) and the second gaming machine information (for example, gaming machine installation information) can be transmitted.
There is a case where the transmission timing of the first gaming machine information (every "300" ms) and the transmission timing of the second gaming machine information (every "60" seconds) overlap.
When the transmission timing of the first gaming machine information and the transmission timing of the second gaming machine information overlap, and the predetermined information regarding the gaming medium has not changed since the previous transmission of the first gaming machine information. (When "No" in step S822 in FIG. 63) enables transmission of the second gaming machine information (step S825 in FIG. 63), and after transmitting the second gaming machine information, the next first. When the transmission timing of the gaming machine information of is reached, the first gaming machine information can be transmitted (in FIG. 63, step S823).
When the transmission timing of the first gaming machine information and the transmission timing of the second gaming machine information overlap, and the predetermined information regarding the gaming medium has changed since the previous transmission of the first gaming machine information. (When "Yes" in step S822 in FIG. 63) enables transmission of the first gaming machine information (step S823 in FIG. 63), and after transmitting the first gaming machine information, the next first. The second gaming machine information can be transmitted when the transmission timing of the gaming machine information of the above is reached (step S825 in FIG. 63).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, the priority of the first gaming machine information can be changed according to whether or not the information regarding the gaming medium has changed, so that the gaming machine information to be transmitted can be changed. Appropriate transmission processing can be executed according to the priority of.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 11 The initial invention relates to a medalless gaming machine (also referred to as a "managed gaming machine", an "enclosed gaming machine", etc.).
Conventionally, medalless gaming machines have been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-198565).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, how the game medium number control means grasps the change in the main control state becomes a problem.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to enable the game medium number control means to correctly determine the change in the main control state.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (fifth embodiment) is
A main control means for controlling the main control state (for example, the first main control CPU 55 in FIG. 29) and
A game medium number control means (for example, the second main control CPU 105 in FIG. 29) for controlling the number of game media is provided.
The main control means can transmit information about the main control state to the game medium number control means.
When the game medium number control means receives the information regarding the main control state, it can be stored in the first storage area (new main control state storage area) (step S953 in FIG. 64).
When the game medium number control means transmits the predetermined game machine information, the information regarding the main control state stored in the first storage area can be stored in the second storage area (former main control state storage area). (Step S954 in FIG. 64)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, the change in the main control state can be correctly determined by comparing the information in the first storage area with the information in the second storage area.

10 Slot machine, game machine 11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting switch 14 Reset switch 21 Direction lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 40a 1 Bet switch 40b 3 Bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 46 Cancel switch, checkout switch 47 Count switch 50 Main control board (main control means), main control board (main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 (1st main control) RWM
53a Bet number storage means 53b Granted number storage means 54 (first main control) ROM
55 Main CPU, (1st main control) CPU
61 Combination lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning judgment means 67 Granting means 73 Set value display means 76 Credit number display LED
77 Bet number display unit 78 Acquisition number display LED, grant number display unit 80 Sub control board (sub control means), sub control board (sub control means)
80a 1-chip microprocessor 81 Input port 82 Output port 83 (secondary control) RWM
84 (secondary control) ROM
85 sub CPU, (sub control) CPU
91 Directional output control means 100 Payout control board (credit number management board), game medium number control board 101 Input port 102 Output port 103 (second main control) RWM
103a Number of game media storage means 104 (second main control) ROM
105 Credit number management CPU, (second main control) CPU
106 Capacitor 107 Capacitor A
108 Capacitor B
111 Credit number management means 112 Total number of game media clear switch 113 Role ratio monitor 120 Game medium number display board (game medium number display device)
121 Game medium number display unit 130 Connection terminal board 150 Power supply board 151 Capacitor 161 Harness A
162 Harness B
163 Harness C
164 Harness D
165 Harness E
166 Harness F
167 Harness G
168 Harness H
190 External centralized terminal board 200 Management device (CR unit), lending unit 201 Banknote slot 202 Lending switch 203 Return switch 204 Frequency display unit 205 Card reader / writer 300 Hall computer 400 Management computer 500 1-chip microprocessor 501 Main CPU
502 Main control ROM
503 Main control RWM
504 Game medium number control ROM
505 Game medium number control RWM
506 Out-of-use ROM
507 Out of use area RWM

Claims (1)

A game medium number control means and
It is equipped with a means for storing the total number of game media that can store the total number of game media.
When the total number of game media reaches a threshold value, the game medium number control means can execute a process for prohibiting or limiting the lending of game media.
When the total number of gaming media has not reached the threshold value due to the betting of the gaming media in the situation where the total number of gaming media has reached the threshold value, the game medium number control means of the gaming medium. A gaming machine characterized in that processing for permitting lending can be executed.

Images